八年级下册英语课件

八年级下册英语课件。

教案课件是我们老师的部分工作，因此每天老师都会按质按时去写好教案课件。做好教案对于提高教学质量有着至关重要的作用，写教案课件时需要注意哪些方面？您需要的“八年级下册英语课件”已经准备就绪了，本文值得收藏方便针对性的参考！

八年级下册英语课件 篇1

一、学习目标：1.添括号法则.

2.利用添括号法则灵活应用完全平方公式

二、重点难点

重 点： 理解添括号法则，进一步熟悉乘法公式的合理利用

难 点： 在多项式与多项式的乘法中适当添括号达到应用公式的目的.

三、合作学习

Ⅰ.提出问题，创设情境

请同学们完成下列运算并回忆去括号法则.

(1)4+(5+2) (2)4-(5+2) (3)a+(b+c) (4)a-(b-c)

去括号法则：

去括号时，如果括号前是正号，去掉括号后，括号里的每一项都不变号;

如果括号前是负号，去掉括号后，括号里的各项都要变号。

1.在等号右边的括号内填上适当的项：

(1)a+b-c=a+( ) (2)a-b+c=a-( )

(3)a-b-c=a-( ) (4)a+b+c=a-( )

2.判断下列运算是否正确.

(1)2a-b- =2a-(b- ) (2)m-3n+2a-b=m+(3n+2a-b)

(3)2x-3y+2=-(2x+3y-2) (4)a-2b-4c+5=(a-2b)-(4c+5)

添括号法则：添上一个正括号，扩到括号里的不变号，添上一个负括号，扩到括号里的要变号。

五、精讲精练

例：运用乘法公式计算

(1)(x+2y-3)(x-2y+3) (2)(a+b+c)2

(3)(x+3)2-x2 (4)(x+5)2-(x-2)(x-3)

随堂练习：教科书练习

五、小结：去括号法则

六、作业：教科书习题

第三十七学时：14.3.1用提公因式法分解因式

一、学习目标：让学生了解多项式公因式的意义，初步会用提公因式法分解因式

二、重点难点

重 点： 能观察出多项式的公因式，并根据分配律把公因式提出来

难 点： 让学生识别多项式的公因式.

三、合作学习：

公因式与提公因式法分解因式的概念.

三个矩形的长分别为a、b、c，宽都是m，则这块场地的面积为ma+mb+mc,或m(a+b+c)

既ma+mb+mc = m(a+b+c)

由上式可知，把多项式ma+mb+mc写成m与(a+b+c)的乘积的形式，相当于把公因式m从各项中提出来，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的一个因式，把m从多项式ma+mb+mc各项中提出后形成的多项式(a+b+c)，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的另一个因式，这种分解因式的方法叫做提公因式法。

四、精讲精练

例1、将下列各式分解因式：

(1)3x+6; (2)7x2-21x; (3)8a3b2-12ab3c+abc (4)-24x3-12x2+28x.

例2把下列各式分解因式:

(1)a(x-y)+b(y-x);(2)6(m-n)3-12(n-m)2.

(3) a(x-3)+2b(x-3)

通过刚才的练习，下面大家互相交流，总结出找公因式的一般步骤.

首先找各项系数的____________________，如8和12的公约数是4.

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，如(3)中相同的字母有ab,相同字母的指数取次数最___________的.

课堂练习

1.写出下列多项式各项的公因式.

(1)ma+mb 2)4kx-8ky (3)5y3+20y2 (4)a2b-2ab2+ab

2.把下列各式分解因式

(1)8x-72 (2)a2b-5ab

(3)4m3-6m2 (4)a2b-5ab+9b

(5)(p-q)2+(q-p)3 (6)3m(x-y)-2(y-x)2

五、小结：

总结出找公因式的一般步骤.：

首先找各项系数的大公约数，

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，相同字母的指数取次数最小的.

注意：(a-b)2=(b-a)2

六、作业 1、教科书习题

2、已知2x-y=1/3 ，xy=2，求2x4y3-x3y4 3、(-2)+(-2)

4、已知a-2b=2，,4-5b=6，求3a(a-2b)2-5(2b-a)3

冀教版八年级数学下册教案

八年级下册英语课件 篇2

外研版八年级下册英语Module 2 Friendship Unit1教

学设计

作者：admin 资源来源：本站原创 点击数：

一。教材分析

1.《新标准》英语采用发现式语法学习法： 呈现---提问---发现---总结，培养学生自主学习的能力。宾语从句是初中阶段较难掌握的，在JEFC教材中出现在九年级，现提早了一个学期，所以难度较大。这需要老师很好地设计课堂教学活动。

2.本模块以友谊为话题，通过听力、对话和阅读材料的学习介绍了宾语从句。友谊是同学们较为感兴趣的话题，也与他们自身经历相关。借助友谊展开话题讨论，同时培养学生关爱他人的情感。

二。学情分析

1.知识基础：部分学生缺少丰富的语言基础，对某些任务的完成有一定的难度。

2.思维能力：有较强的记忆力和模仿能力，有待培养知识的扩展运用能力。

3.认知心理：有较强的求知欲和表现欲，部分学生存在不自信，羞于表现等思想顾虑。

三。教学目标

1.语言技能目标：

听：能听懂用宾语从句表述的意义。说：能运用不同宾语从句来询问和表达友谊。

读：能读懂阅读文章，理解语篇主题和细节。写：能用宾语从句来写与友谊有关的短文。

2.语言知识目标：

1）能利用宾语从句讨论与友谊有关的话题。正确使用宾语从句的三种句式。

2）能够理解下列单词和词组：a couple of, junior high school

3）能够正确使用本模块中出现的四会词及短语。

3.情感态度目标：

1）通过对友谊的交流，掌握如何与他人交朋友，理解自己生活中情感影响的重要性。

2）引导学生与他人合作，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务，尽情享受学习的乐趣。

4.学习策略目标：

1）自主学习能够结合个人的情况预习教材和拓展。

2）合作学习能够与同学交流学习心得体会，共享学习策略。

四。教学重点与难点

教学重点： 正确运用宾语从句描述友谊。

教学难点： 宾语从句的引导词、语序及时态。

五。教学过程

Step 1 Warming up

are you from? is his name?

do you ask? do you ask?

ask where you are ask what his name is.设计意图 通过问与答的形式，呈现宾语从句，为下异步的操练做准备。

Step 2 Pair work

are you from? is your good friend from?

S1: Where are you from? S1: Where is your good friend from?

S2: I am from… S2: My good friend…is from…

S1: S2 says that he / she is from… S1: S2 says that …

设计意图 联系学生生活实际，体现用中学原则。用地图操练巩固目标句型---that引导的宾语从句。

Step 3 Group work

something about my good friend

S1 has heard that Sally…

S2 knows that Sally…

S3 says that Sally…

I think that Sally…

设计意图 通过谈论熟悉人物 Sally, 进一步加强目标语的操练。同时，相互交流和帮助又培养了合作精神。

Step 4 Presentation

talk

you ever made telephone calls?

Who do you usually call?

a telephone call with a the other students an example.（suppose tomorrow is Saturday, you want to invite someone to have a picnic with you.）

T: Hello, this is Miss Wu I speak to LiHui?

S1: Hello, Miss Wu, this is LiHui are you?

T: I'm fine , ,LiHui, we are going to have a picnic tomorrow, would you like to go with us?

S1: Great!I'd love and where shall we meet?

T: Let's meet at half pass 8, at our school : Ok, see you : See you and find out:

What do Ann's mother and Bill talk about on the phone?

（事先交代情景： Ann's classmate Bill called Ann wasn't 's mother answered the phone.）

Expressions of making telephone calls:

Hello!Could I speak to Ann, please?

I'm afraid she isn't here right I take a message for you?

This is 'll give her the message…

设计意图 新语言项目在情景中自然呈现，比较中、英文打电话的不同用语，引导学生判断、总结，从而达到理解、学习并运用语言的目的。充分体现了学习的过程。

Step 5 Practice

and find out how many people you hear.（Turn to page 10-1）

and number the order.（Turn to page 10-2）

a telephone telephoned Father wasn't answered the telephone.（用两只电话机让学生在课堂上表演）

Activity 5, 2, 3, 4

设计意图 在常规听力练习中进一步提高学生听的能力，在尽可能真实的情景中巩固打电话用语。

Step 6 Presentation Why does Sally call Chen Huan?

设计意图 激发求知欲望。顺利进入新课的学习。

Step 7 Listening and reading:（Turn to Page 10-3）

and answer the questions:

1）How many persons are there in the dialogue？

2）Where are they?

and answer（必须用宾语从句回答）

1）What does Chen Huan say? He says that…

2）What does Sally say? She says that …

and check（√）the true sentences.（Turn to Page 11-4）

设计意图 听读两方面入手，由易到难，层层推进，重视对学生学习能力和技巧的培养。

Step8 Exercise

the words with their and answer the questions about the words in the box.（Turn to p11-5）

设计意图 由单词的复习过渡到句子的复习，既培养学生在语境中理解、识记单词的能力，又为新课的学习起到较好的铺垫作用。

Homework

your teacher

假设10年后，你参加工作，当了一名记者，回来看望老师。学生自由向老师提问，老师重复学生的问题，很自然地引出新知识---疑问句的宾语从句。: Miss Ni, do you still like teaching English?

T: S1 wants to know if I still like teaching 'm glad to tell you that I like teaching English very .给好朋友打个电话，请他来参加你的生日晚会。

设计意图

1.英语是一门语言，而语言是用来交际的。只有多听、多读，才能让我们的英语说得更加流利，掌握得更加牢固。

2.让学生学会一切可利用的资源来获取更多的学习信息。学习活动由课堂向课外延伸。

3.贯彻从师生交流到生生交流的原则，在体现学生自主学习的同时，注重教师的示范作用。

八年级下册英语课件 篇3

Unit6 Enjoying Cycling

Topic 1 We’re going on a spring field trip

Section A说课稿

一、说教材

1. 教材分析

仁爱版初中英语教材共六册,每册由四个模块组成,每个模块由单元----话题----功能---任务构成,编写思路清晰,符合学生的认识发展规律.八年级英语下册第六单元Topic1 Section A讲述了让学生学习如何用英语谈论旅游，并收集旅游信息。它由3部分组成，用1课时完成。通过学习Section A,学生可以更多的了解旅游知识并提高实际能力;动词不定式是本节课的重点语法项目。

2.教学目标

(1).知识目标

要求学生牢记Section A所有新学的四会单词.短语和重点句型;掌握不定式“to do”的用法。

(2).技能目标：

能用英语与他人谈论关于旅游的话题。培养学生提高语言交际能力,能在小组中积极与他人协作,从而开阔自己的视野,扩大知识面。

(3).情感目标

培养学生爱护大自然，热爱旅游.积极参与课堂上各种英语实践活动的兴趣。培养学生分工合作和团体协作精神。

3.教学重点和难点

(1).重点:谈论关于旅游的话题。

(2).重点和难点:不定式“to do”的用法。

二.说学情

1.学生对旅游较感兴趣,但对旅游知识了解较少。

2.学生的词汇量掌握不多。

3. 学生平时较少用英语与他人交谈并表达信息.。

三.说教法学法

按照课程改革的要求,遵循“老师由主演变导演，学生由配角变主角”的角色转换,采用把课堂交给学生的教学理论,我运用自由讨论.分组工作.结对练习.问答练习等方法,借助多媒体、录音机,图片等教学手段,设置特定的语言环境,使学生在轻松愉快的气氛中理解.运用英语。

四.说教学程序

我设计了以下的步骤来训练学生的听.说.读.写的能力,尤其是他们“说”的能力。

(一)温故知新

(1).请两位学生用上节课重点句型号，分别复述Unit 5 Topic3 Section D 1a

(2).教师与学生之间进行问答对话，让学生谈论关于他们最喜爱的旅游方式。 设计意图：巩固上节课学过的知识，为学习新课铺垫。

(二)情景导入

用多媒体展示一些关于旅游和交通的图片,来引起学生的兴趣,并由此教学本节课

的新单词,如:field ,trip ,cycle ,vehicle ,airline等。

设计意图：通过用多媒体展示学生熟悉的交通工具图片，激发学生的学习兴趣，轻松掌握新单词，顺利带入新课。

(三)重点呈现

1、展示多媒体( Flash课件)1a,并回答以下问题:

(1)Where will they go?

(2)What will Kangkang and Michael do?

(3)What will Helen do?

(4)How about Jane?

设计意图：应用多媒体展示，形象直观，给学生予视、听训练，根据情景对话,通过问答活动,以达到提高学生的“听.读”能力。

2、讲解重点.难点

(1)动词不定式“to do"的用法

a)不定式作主语

b)不定式作定语

c)不定式作目的状语

d)不定式作宾语

(2)It’s too+形容词+(for sb.)+to do sth.的句型

设计意图：训练学生理解和应用语言点的能力。

(四)知识巩固

1、放录音，让学生听并跟读

2、找出重要句型

3、给学生一点时间完成1b，然后用多媒展示的画面，请两组学生用带有“to do "的句子表演对话。

设计意图：我想知道我的学生是否真正了解整个对话的内容，并掌握了这节课我所传授的知识。此外，我将把学生们找到的重点句型板书在黑板上，以便他们能够更简单地记忆。

(五)归纳总结

让学生交流本节课所学的知识，教师除了板书所呈现的重点.难点内容外，又以“堂堂清”的形式进行当堂操练，进一步巩固对本课内容的理解和运用。

展示板书(根据本课的重点难点)

Unit 6 Topic 1 Section A

1.I have some exciting news to tell you !

2.It’s too far for cycling 。

3.Do you know the best way to get there?

4.It’s hard to say。

5.We’ll decide on the best way to go on our trip。

2、家庭作业

(1)抄写新单词和本节课重点句子。

(2)给学生看四幅名胜古迹的图片，让学生回去查找信息，看看哪个地方最值得参观，并编成对话，内容包括旅游的时间.方式和票价(要求用动词不定式)。

设计意图：

五、教学评价：

本课以课改为目的，结合教材重点.难点及英语学科的特点，利用多媒体辅助教学，体现“自主，合作，探究”的学习方式，它较之传统教学更能使每位学生都能积极参与到课堂学习及课外活动中去。使学生的听.说 .读.写能力得到全面提高，在愉快轻松的氛围中掌握知识。与此同时，带来的问题是：每个学生接受知识，获取知识的方式与快慢存在着差异，这就决定了在学习成效上的差别。为此，老师要对每个学生作深入了解，并制定相应“水平线”以鼓励学生超越。

八年级下册英语课件 篇4

冀教版三年级英语下册教案

八年级下册英语课件 篇5

教案设计：

本单元的教学目标主要包括：

1. 学会本单元的生词和短语，能够进行简单的拼写和记忆。

2. 掌握本单元的语法知识，能够进行简单的句型转换。

3. 培养学生的英语听说能力，能够听懂和说出简单的英语。

教学重点和难点：

教学重点：本单元的语法知识，包括时态、语态、主谓一致等。

教学难点：培养学生的英语听说能力，包括听懂和说出简单的英语。

教学方法：

1. 听力训练：通过听录音或者播放音频，让学生掌握本单元的生词和短语，并能够进行简单的句型转换。

2. 口语训练：通过对话练习，让学生掌握本单元的语法知识，并能够进行简单的句型转换。

3. 阅读训练：通过阅读文章，让学生掌握本单元的生词和短语，并能够进行简单的句型转换。

4. 游戏教学：通过游戏的形式，让学生更好地掌握本单元的语法知识。

教学评价：

教学评价主要包括课堂表现评价、作业评价和考试成绩评价。

课堂表现评价：通过课堂上的表现，如回答问题、积极参与课堂讨论、认真听讲等，来评估学生的学习效果。

作业评价：通过作业，如填空题、选择题、对话练习等，来评估学生对本单元的掌握情况。

考试成绩评价：通过学生的考试成绩，如单元测验、期末测验等，来评估学生对本单元的掌握情况。

反思：

通过这次教学，我发现学生对于本单元的语法知识掌握情况不够好，需要加强听力和口语训练，以及提高学生的阅读水平。

八年级下册英语课件 篇6

【主题一】My Favorite Hobby

I have a lot of hobbies, such as reading, playing sports, and listening to music. But my favorite hobby is drawing. I began drawing when I was just a little kid, and I fell in love with it right away. I enjoy creating different images and bringing my imagination to life.

When I draw, I feel relaxed and happy. It's like I enter into a different world where there are no rules or boundaries, and I can let my mind go wild. I usually draw in my free time, and every time I finish a drawing, I feel a sense of accomplishment.

Drawing helps me express my feelings and emotions in a positive way. Sometimes, I feel sad or anxious, and I don't know how to deal with it. But when I draw, I can let everything out, and it makes me feel better. Drawing also helps me improve my concentration and focus, which is essential for my studies.

In the future, I want to become a professional artist. I believe that the more I draw, the better I will become, and I will be able to make a living from my art. Even if I don't become famous, I will still be happy as long as I can continue to draw and express myself.

【主题二】My Dream Job

My dream job is to become a doctor. Ever since I was a little kid, I wanted to help people and make a difference in their lives. Being a doctor would allow me to do just that. I believe that being a doctor is one of the most honorable professions in the world.

I am currently studying hard to achieve my dream. I am taking science and math courses to prepare me for medical school. I know that the road to becoming a doctor is challenging, but I am willing to put in the work and effort to achieve my goals.

Being a doctor would allow me to help people in many different ways. I could diagnose and treat illnesses, save lives in emergency situations, and even prevent diseases through public education and awareness campaigns.

I know that being a doctor requires a lot of knowledge, skill, and dedication, but I believe that I have what it takes to become a successful doctor. I am passionate about helping others, and I think that this is the most important quality for a doctor to have.

In the future, I hope to work in a hospital or clinic where I can help people who are sick or injured. I believe that being a doctor is not just a job, but a calling. I am excited about my future career and look forward to making a difference in the world.

【主题三】My Travel Experience

I have always enjoyed traveling and exploring new places. One of my most memorable travel experiences was when I went to Japan with my family.

Japan is a beautiful country with a rich history and culture. We visited many famous landmarks, such as the Tokyo Tower, Mount Fuji, and the Imperial Palace. We also tried many delicious Japanese foods, such as sushi and ramen.

One of the highlights of our trip was when we visited Kyoto. Kyoto is a city that is known for its traditional architecture and beautiful temples. We visited the Kiyomizu-dera temple, which is a UNESCO World Heritage site. The temple was built in the 17th century and is famous for its wooden stage that overlooks the city.

Another memorable experience was when we went to Hiroshima. Hiroshima is a city that is famous for being the site of the atomic bombing during World War II. We visited the Peace Memorial Park and Museum, which was both moving and educational.

Traveling to Japan was an amazing experience that allowed me to learn about a different culture and way of life. I realized that there is so much in the world to explore and discover. I hope to have many more travel experiences in the future and continue to learn and grow as a person.

八年级下册英语课件 篇7

一、教案

单元名称：Going to a Party (参加派对)

教学目标：

1. 掌握句型"What are you going to wear?" (你打算穿什么？) 和"I'm going to wear ..." (我打算穿...)

2. 通过学习并模仿对话，能够完整运用句型"What are you going to wear?"来询问他人的打算，并用"I'm going to wear..."回答。

3. 学习并理解涉及派对主题的词汇和短语，加深对该主题的理解。

重点词汇：

wear (穿着), jeans (牛仔裤), skirt (裙子), T-shirt (T恤衫), dress (连衣裙), suit (西服), jacket (夹克衫), shoes (鞋子)

教学方法：听说读写综合教学

教学步骤：

1. 导入新知识，利用图片、视频等资源向学生展示不同派对的照片，激发学生对话题的兴趣，引起学生的思考和讨论。

2. 听力训练：播放录音，让学生听取不同场景中人们要参加派对时的对话，学生通过听力练习锻炼辨音和提高听力技巧。

3. 口语练习：学生分组，以小组形式练习对话，一个学生问"What are you going to wear?"，另一个回答"I'm going to wear..."，并展示自己选好的派对服装。

4. 课文阅读：学生阅读教材中的对话，理解对话内容和所涉及的词汇和短语。

5. 课堂练习：老师出示图片，让学生描述图片中人物的服装，并进行问答。

6. 小组活动：学生分组，每个小组设计一个虚拟派对，要求小组成员互相提问并回答"What are you going to wear?"，并展示自己的派对服装。

7. 家庭作业：学生完成作业本上的练习题，巩固本单元所学内容。

二、反思

在教学过程中，我使用了多种教学方法，如听力训练、口语练习、课文阅读和小组活动等，以提高学生的听说读写能力并增加他们对该主题的兴趣。通过引入具体的图片和视频资源，我成功地激发了学生的兴趣，使他们更好地参与到课堂活动中。

在教学初期，我发现学生对新句型"What are you going to wear?"和"I'm going to wear..."的理解有些困难。为了解决这一问题，我进行了多次示范和口语练习，鼓励学生多多运用这些句型进行对话，同时我也特别关注学生的发音和语法错误，及时进行纠正。通过这样的反复练习，学生逐渐掌握了这个句型，并且积极参与到小组活动中，展示自己的派对服装。

在教学过程中，我还注意到一些学生对课文中的生词和短语掌握不牢固。为了解决这个问题，我与学生一起进行了课文阅读，以及对生词和短语的解释和示范。同时，在小组活动中，我鼓励学生使用所学的词汇和短语进行描述，以增加他们的语言输出和应用能力。

总的来说，这堂课的教学效果较好。学生在互动中积极主动地学习和参与，并取得了很好的语言表达能力和对话技巧。同时，通过反思，我也发现了自己教学上的不足之处，例如对学生困惑和错误的及时纠正不够，以及课后练习的设计不够充分等。在今后的教学中，我会更加注重这些方面，力求提高自己的教学水平，并更好地帮助学生提高英语能力。

八年级下册英语课件 篇8

Lesson 33 教学设计

Teaching content:

1. new words: living room, kitchen, bathroom

2. a dialogue about Li Ming’s arriving in Canada

3. let sb. do sth.

4. introduce sth./sb. to sb.

Lesson objectives

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know some important words for transportation

3. write something about means of transportation

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

Key points

1. the usage of let

2. introduce sth. to sb.

Difficult points: the usage of let

Teaching aids: a picture of living room/ kitchen/ bathroom, some cards, slide projector

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

Introduce the topic for Unit 5. Please read about introducing units in “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

There are two reading for this lesson. Teach the first reading. The second reading is for students to use independently.

The readings present new vocabulary and review vocabulary the students have learned in previous lessons.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

Can, on foot, take a plane/train

Can/could I/you…?

Of course.

Oral Vocabulary

Rapid, transportation, type (n.)

Before you begin the reading, introduce unit project 1. See “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide for general information about introducing unit projects. Also see the Unit 5 introductory page in this teacher’s guide. Instructions for unit project 1 are in the student book.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading. Here are some step-by step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson. Also see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide for general information about teaching readings.

Step l: Check to see if the students have previewed the text. Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Use your discretion to decide whether you want to spend some time on the new vocabulary. You may want to ask students to explain the meaning of some sentences containing key words. What strategies did they use to puzzle out the meanings? Remember to give lots of praise for a good try, even if it's wrong. It may be helpful to write the following phrases on a large piece of paper or on the blackboard, as a review. This will be helpful for students to refer to in the next step.

(to go) on foot

take a bus/taxi/car

ride a bike/the train

(to go to someplace) in a car

If you wish, you may say something about the word type in comparison with' the word kind, which the students learned in the last unit.

Step 3: Divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to talk about their usual means of transportation in moving around the city and travelling around the country. Encourage students to use the phrases that you have listed as well as to borrow phrases and sentence patterns from the text.

Step 4:Ask for three volunteers to act out the text.

They can choose to read aloud their lines from the reading. They can also improvise and create lines of their own.

Unit project 1: History of a type of transportation (15 minutes)

Begin unit project 1. This project covers three lessons. Working in groups,' students will complete a project to present to the class.

Divide the class into small groups of three or four students. Each group chooses a type of transportation for the project. Instruct students to begin collecting information about that type of transportation. They will prepare a comic strip or timeline of important dates in its development.

Teaching tip

Set up a contest for good group work.

Here's a way to encourage good group work among your students.

Tell the class that each group starts with a score of ten in each of these categories: project plan, cooperation, use of English, quietness, progress, final product. Write these across the top of the blackboard. Along the left side Of the blackboard, write a list of the groups names.

Add or subtract scores according to each group's performance. For example, if a group is trying to use a lot of English, give it two points (so now it has twelve points in that category). If a group is working with too much noise, subtract a point from that group in that category.

Keep track of the scores each day over the course of a project. What group has the highest score?

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Fill in the blanks:

Write the words you hear.

Dinosaur Fun Park

Hi, this is Danny: I will tell you a story about my trip to Dinosaur Fun Park!

Dinosaur Fun Park is a fun place for dinosaurs. There is lots of dinosaur food there. Dinosaur food is very good for dinosaurs. It is like people food, but it is bigger. Dinosaur cookies are as big as kitchen tables. There are lots of dinosaur games, too. Many dinosaurs play dinosaur ping-pong. It is like people ping-pong, but the ball is bigger. Dinosaur ping-pong uses a basketball!

I loved Dinosaur Fun Park, but I am too small to live there. If I grow bigger, maybe I will visit again!

Class closing (5 minutes)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson. Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much. reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the first reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 34 教学设计

Teaching content

1． new words: refrigerator, inside, wash, juice, pass, knife, mine

2． a dialogue about having breakfast

3． the usage of would like

4． introduce sth.

Lesson objectives

At the end of this lesson, the students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know something about the development of the airplane

3. write something about airplanes

Key points

1． Time for sth. =It’s time for sth. =It is time to do sth.

2． What would you like? I would like…

Difficult points: would like to do sth.

Teaching aids: a picture of stove/ refrigerator, sink, some real things or some pictures of food, audiotape

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading presents new vocabulary and reviews the vocabulary students have learned in previous lessons.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

airport, passenger, station, railway, fly

Oral Vocabulary

runway

For general suggestions about teaching immersion reading, please see “Teaching Techniques” in the back of this guide. Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text. Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. Ask if they know anything about airplanes beyond what is said in the reading.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow the audiotape while looking at the text. You can decide whether you think it is necessary to spend some time on the new vocabulary.

Step 3: Ask the students to work individually to summarize the main ideas of the reading in five or six sentences.

Stop 4: Ask for one or two volunteers to read their summaries aloud to the class. Do other students agree with what has been presented as the main ideas? Discuss as a class. Use as much English as possible.

Unit project 1: History of a type of transportation (continued) (15 minutes)

Continue unit project 1. Students continue to work on their projects. Advise students that they should finish the projects during this lesson. They will present their projects during the next lesson.

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Follow 'the instructions.

a. Fill in the blanks. Write the words you hear.

Hi. Do you remember me? My name is Chad! I invented the dog-waterer. Do you have one yet? Thanks to me, there are no more thirsty dogs!

My family went on a trip this summer. We went on a ship. Passengers on the ship could sleep or play games. There were swimming pools and movie theatres on the ship! Our rooms were very big.

My mum and dad liked the ship. They did not have to cook or clean. My dad Cried when our trip was over!

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson.

Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the second reading in the reader

the remaining activity, book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 35 教学设计

Teaching content

1． new words: mitten, usually, sometimes, ride, always

2． a dialogue about Li Ming’s going to school in Canada

3． usage of sometimes, usually

Lesson objectives

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know something about the development of the bicycle

3. write something about bicycles

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

Key points: usage of usually and sometimes

Difficult points: usually and sometimes

Preparations: pictures, audiotape, slide projector

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading presents new vocabulary and reviews the vocabulary students have learned in previous lessons.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

all right, get off, get on, ride, seat (n.)

Oral Vocabulary

pedal (n.). wheel

There are many ways to teach immersion reading.

Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text.

Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. Ask if they know anything about bicycles, beyond what is said in the reading.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow the audiotape while looking at the text. You can decide whether you want to spend some time on the vocabulary listed above.

Step 3: Ask the students to work individually to summarize the main ideas of the reading in five or six sentences.

Step 4: ASk for one or two volunteers to read their summaries aloud to the class. Do other students agree with what has been presented as the main ideas? Discuss as a class. Use as much English as possible.

Unit project 1: History of a type of transportation (Continued 15 minutes)

Conclude unit project 1. Groups present their work to the class. Depending on class size and the length of presentations, you may wish to divide up the class.

Groups would then present their projects to one portion of the class.

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Fill in the blanks.

Write the words you hear.

Babo's Bike, Part One

Have you heard the story of Babo? No?

Then I will tell you about Babo.

Babo lived a long time ago. He did not work hard. He had a big basket. Every morning,

Babo filled the basket with apples. Then he walked along the street. People bought Babo's apples. Babo's basket was always empty when the evening came. But Babo was very poor.

One day, Babo saw a man riding a bicycle:

But it wasn't a bicycle! It had only one wheel! People were watching the man. They were singing, “Ron the Rider! Ron the Rider!” Some of them gave money to Ron.

Class closing (5 minutes)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson. Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students progress.

the third reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

LESSON 36 教学设计

Teaching content

1. new words；year, same, glad, classmate

2. a dialogue about Li Ming’s meeting Jenny’s class

3. meet and introduce each other

4. usage of speak and same

Lesson objectives

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the song and sing the ong well

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary

3. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

Key points:

1. introduce to each other

2. speak and same

Difficult points: usage of word same

Teaching aids: audiotape, recorder, pictures

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

The reading for this lesson is a song. The audiotape presents the song; the words to the song are in the student book.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

drive, get in

No Parking!

Yes/Certainly.

You'd better not.

Oral Vocabulary

highway

See “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher's guide for suggestions on teaching songs.

Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the song in this lesson.

Step 1 Have the class read the lyrics aloud as a poem. You may divide the class into two groups. Each group will read one line at a time. Make sure students can read rhythmically with a good sense of the rhymes!

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow in their books.

Step 3: Practice singing the song repeatedly until the students can sing it well.

Class activity How to get from here to there (15 minutes)

In this activity, students can have fun discussing transportation. Write several false statements about transportation on the blackboard. For example:

I will drive my car across the Pacific Ocean to get to Canada.

At the airport, I will take the train to Beijing.

I will fly my bicycle to school.

Ask for volunteers to correct these statements. Then ask each student to make up three false sentences about transportation. Have students choose partners. The students exchange their sentences with their partner. Each partner works to correct the other's sentences. Then students compare their corrections. Do partners agree on how to correct the sentences?

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Fill in the blanks. Write the words you hear.

Babo's Bike, Part Two

Later, Babo saw Ron the Rider walking along the sidewalk. He had his one-wheeled bicycle. “Do you like riding your one-wheeled bicycle?” Babo said to Ron.

“No. It is hard work,” said the man. “And I am poor. 1 work hard and I make little money.”

“I make little money, too,”said Babo. “But I do not work hard. I fill this basket with apples. People come and buy them from me.”

Ron the Rider laughed. “I will give you my one-wheeled bicycle if you give me your basket” he said.

Class closing (5 minutes)

There is no specific reading from the reader to assign as homework for this lesson.

This is a chance for students to catch up if they are behind.

Suggested homework for this lesson includes:

the remaining exercises in the activity book

the next lesson in the student book

diary-writing and ,group verb-tense Studies

Lesson 37 教学设计

Teaching content

1. new words: temperature, outside, cup, shape, circle, line, pizza

2. a dialogue L Ming and his friends

3. how to ask and answer about the temperature

Lesson objectives

1. After this, students should be able to understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know some words that can help one imagine future transporttation

3. write something about transportation in the future

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts.

Key points: express weather

Difficult points: how to express weather

Type: dialogue

Preparations: pictures of different shapes, audiotape, recorder, slide projector

Class opening

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at back of this teacher’s guide. You may wish to have the class sing “Let’s Take a Drive.”

Student book( fifteen minutes)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading presents new vocabulary and reviews the vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

round (adj)

Oral Vocabulary

invent, present (v. ), presentation

Before you begin the reading, introduce unit projects 2. see “ Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide for general information about introductory page in this teacher’s guide, Instructions for unit project 2 are in the student book.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading. Here is some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the reading as required. Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text.

Encourage other students to try to answer the questions.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow the audiotape while looking at the text. At this point, you may wish to ask the students to explain the meaning of some sentences containing key words or phrases. What strategies did they use to puzzle out the meanings? Remember to give lots of praise for a good try, even if it's wrong.

Step3: Divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to use their imagination and talk about their ideas for new types of transportation. They should try to use what they have learned in this unit to talk about their inventions.

Step 4: Have some groups volunteer to tell the rest of the class about their inventions.

Step 5: If you have time, ask three volunteers to act out the reading in any way they choose.

UNIT PROJECT 2: FUTURE TYPE OFTRANSPORTATION （15 MINUTES)

Begin unit project 2. This project covers two lessons. Divide the class into small groups. Each group thinks up a new type of transportation for the future and begins to prepare a presentation about it for the class. They should include a drawing.

ACTIVITY BOOK (5 MINUTES)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Follow the instructions.

a. Listen. Fill in the blanks. Write the words you hear.

Babo's Bike, Part Three

Babo learned how to ride Ron's bicycle. It was very hard work to ride the one-wheeled bike. So Babo thought of a new way to make his money.

One day, there was a rope in the air above the street. Babo was on the rope. He was on his one-wheeled bicycle! Babo rode his bike across the rope. Many people stopped to watch. They were very interested. They gave Babo lots of money! Babo was rich!

CLASS CLOSING (5 MINUTES)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson.

Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the fourth reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 38 教学设计

TEACHINGCONTENT

1. new words: dry, bike, bear

2. a dialogue between Li Ming and his teacher

3. usage of some words: always, usually, sometimes, never

KEY AND DIFFICULT POINTS: usage of some adverbs: always, usually, sometimes, never

TYPE: dialogue

TEACHING AIDS: some different tapes, audiotape, recorder, slide projector

LESSON OBJECTIVES

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know some words that can help one imagine new types of transportation

3. write something about future transportation

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

CLASS OPENING (5 MINUTES)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher's guide .You may wish to have the class sing “Let's Take a Drive,”

STUDENT BOOK (15 MINUTES)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading reviews the vocabulary students have learned in previous lessons. There is no new vocabulary for this lesson.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading.

Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text as required. Ask if they have any questions. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. To check how well students understand this reading, you may find it helpful to ask questions such as:

Who is Sam? When and where did you meet him?

What new type of transportation would Sam like to invent'?

Step 2: Play the audiotape.

Step 3: Discuss the reading with students. Use as much English as possible. Ask questions to make it easier for students to participate in the discussion. Ask questions such as:

What is space?

What is a spaceship?

Do you have an idea for a future type of transportation?

Is Sam's idea for a future type of transportation the same as yours?

Step 4: Divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to continue to talk about their ideas of inventions by using words, expressions and sentence patterns they have learned in this unit. Instruct the groups to write five to six sentences describing their inventions. If there is time, have some groups share what they have written with the rest of the class.

UNIT PROJECT 2: FUTURE TYPE OF TRANSPORTATION (CONTINUED) (15 MINUTES)

Conclude unit project 2. The groups present their future type of transportation to the class. Depending on class size and the length of presentations, you may wish to divide up the class. Groups would then present their projects to one portion of the class.

ACTIVITY BOOK (5 MINUTES)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Look at these questions.

Can you choose the correct answers? Please try.

1. Tom says, “I like this TV show very much.”

2. Li Ming says, “It is October 1. It is China's National Day.”

3. Li Ming Says, “1 would like brown shoes, please?

4. Li Ming says, ”Where are you getting off?“ Wang Mei says, ”At the next stop. Where are you getting off?“

Li Ming says, ”The stop after next.“

CLASS CLOSING (5 MINUTES)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson. Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the fourth reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 39 教学设计

TEACHING CONTENT

1. mastery words; watch, toilet

2. a dialogue and a short text

3. the Present Continuous Tense

LESSON OBJECTIVES

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. memorize what is reviewed in this lesson and talk/write something about a fun project for inventions

3. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

KEY POINTS

1. the Present Continuous Tense

2. look, watch and see

DIFFICULT POINTS: the Present Continuous Tense

TYPE: a dialogue and a short text

TEACHING AIDS: some food, some pictures of furniture, audiotape, recordeer

CLASS OPENING (5 MINUTES)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see ”Teaching Techniques“ at the back of this teacher's guide. You may wish to have the class sing ”Let's Take a Drive.“

STUDENT BOOK (10 MINUTES)

There is one reading for this lesson. It reviews the vocabulary for this unit. There is no new vocabulary in this lesson.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading. Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson. Also see ”Teaching Techniques“ at the back of this teacher's guide for more general information about teaching readings.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text as required. Ask if they have any questions. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. As a quick review, ask students to name the words they know for different kinds of vehicles.

Step 2: Play the audiotape.

Step 3: Depending upon how much time you have you may divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to think about, discuss and then write an e-mail in response to Jenny's e-mail to Li Ming. if there is time, ask some groups to share their writings with the rest of the class.

VERBS (20 MINUTES)

Review the irregular verbs in this unit: drive, ride and sly. See ”Teaching Techniques“ at the back of this teacher's guide for recommended methods of teaching verbs.

Review the verb can, which is also in this unit.

This is a special verb, like might. The students learned the verb ”might' in Level 1 of junior school.

Do they remember what might means? Write this list on the blackboard:

I go. I might go.

He goes. He might go.

We go. We might go.

I run. I might run.

He runs. He might run.

We run. We might run.

Now ask for volunteers to write the same phrases with the word “can.”

I can go.

He can go.

We can go.

I can run.

He can run.

We can run.

What do the phrases mean? “I (verb)” describes what you are doing now. “I might ” expresses uncertainty. You might do something, but you might not. “1 can” expresses an ability. If you can do something, you are able to do it.

Sometimes “can” expresses permission. For example, you might ask your parents: “Can I go to the cinema?” If they permit you to go, they might say: “Yes, you can.”

ACTIVITY BOOK (5 MINUTES)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Look at these questions. Can you choose the correct answers? Please try.

1. Li Ming says, “It is cold, isn't it?”

Wang Mei says, “Yes it is. It might get colder. It might snow.”

2. Mrs. Brown says, “There will be a good program on TV. It is about making movies. Don't forget to watch it. ?'

3. Brian says, ”I saw Tim today. He is my good friend. I haven't seen him for many weeks. He looks great. I saw him at a restaurant.“

4. Danny says, ”I'm looking for Brian. I can't find him. Have you seen him?“

Jenny says, ”Yes. I saw him in the library.

He was looking up some words in the dictionary."

CLASS CLOSING (5 MINUTES

There is no specific reading from the reader to assign as homework for this lesson. This is a chance for students to catch up if they are behind.

Suggested homework for this lesson includes:

the remaining exercises in the activity book

八年级下册英语课件 篇9

难点讲评

1.What time do you get up?

What time +助动词do/does +主语+动词原形，询问某人做某事的具体时间。

what time do you begin class in the morning?

注：What’s the time=What time is it?也是用来询问时间，意为“几点了”。用it作答。

What’s the time? It’s 7:30.

2.I usually get up at five o’clock.

1)句中usually与often 一样都是频度副词，常用于动词be 之后，行为动词之前。always 意思是“总是”、“永远”，表示动作重复，状态继续，中间没有间断。

We always get up before six o'clock.

He is always thinking of others.

always>usually>often>sometimes>seldom>never

2)介词 at 常用于具体时刻之前，意义为 在…… ，如：at 5：00 在5：00钟。

介词at 除了指时间以外，还可指

(1)人物的所在之处，如：at my uncle’s home 在我姑姑家, at the station 在火车站.

(2)朝向，如：look at me!看我!

(3)指速度或价格.如：she buys the book at a good price 她以优惠的价格买了这本书。

on，at，in这三个常用介词都可以表示时间和地点，但具体用法不同.

①on用在日期、星期几、节日前，也表示在具体某一天及具体某一天的上午、下午和晚上。

on November 1st on Monday on Children’s Day on Tuesday evening

②in用于月份、季节、年份前，当early，late用于句首修饰介词短语时，尽管表示具体某一天的上午、下午、晚上，都要用in，泛指一般的上、下午，晚上也用in 。

Early in the morning of National Day，I got up to catch the first bus to the zoo.

③将来时态表“过一段时间后” 及“在...期间” 和“在某个季节，某年、某月” 都用in。

Xiao Ming was born in December of .

3. What a funny time to eat breakfast!

(1)What a/an +形容词+单数名词+主语+谓语!

what a good girl she is!

(2)What+形容词+可数名词复数+主语+谓语!

What good girls they are!

(3)What +形容词+不可为名词+主语+谓语!

What terrible weather it is!

4、He works at a radio station.

work:人们日常工作和生活中从事的体力和脑力劳动，各类工作。不可数名词

job:指具体的职业或工作。可数名词

5、take a walk

take a walk=have a work=go for a walk 散步

6、either...or...

“要么、、、要么、、、”，连接句子中两个并列的成分，表示两者之一。

当连接两个主语时，谓语动词应该与最近的一个主语在人称和数上保持一致，即就近原则。

7.People love to listen to him.

love to do sth.=like to do sth.very much.喜欢做某事，强调具体活动。

而love doing sth.=like doing sth. very much则强调习惯。

Do you come out to play with me?你喜欢出来和我玩吗?

I like watching TV.我喜欢看电视。

8.hear与listen to

hear 意为“听见”，表示听的结果，而listen to则表示“听”，强调的是“听”的动作。

Let’s listen to the music.

We listen but don’t hear.

9. He gets home at 7：00，and he watches morning news on TV.

1)句中get 意为 “到达 ”，后接地点名词时，要加介词to，后接副词时，不能加to.

She gets to school at six o’clock.

注： home 是一个副词，所以其前不能加介词to，但home也可作名词，这时其前有物主代词时，可以加to，

She gets to her home at eight o’clock .

a piece of news 一条新闻 ，two pieces of news 两条新闻 。

Watch……On TV 表示 通过电视看……节目

We often watch football game on TV.

10、lots of=a lot of 既可以修饰可数名词复数形式，也可以修饰不可数名词。

11.What time is it?-几点了?-It’s eight thirty. 八点三十分。

本句是就具体时刻进行提问的，what time 意为“几点”，这是特殊问句，它的同义句为：

What’s the time? /What time is it by your watch? 在回答这个句子时,要用It’s +钟点。

注：英语时刻的表达法：顺读法和逆读法。

顺读法：钟点数+分钟数。

4：25→four twenty-five，6：58→six fifty-eight，7：→seven o clock

说明：这种表达不论分钟数是多少，均可使用。

逆读法：分钟为+介词to/past+钟点数，可分两种情况：

1)分钟为不超过半小时，用分钟数+past(/pa：st/过)+钟点数。

4：23→twenty-three past four，5：19→nineteen past five.

2)分钟数超过了半小时，用(所差的)分钟的+to+(下一个)钟点为。

7：31→twenty-nine to eight，10：58→two to eleven

在逆读法中分钟数逢 “五”逢 “十”可省略minute(s)。否则应加上。当然，英语习惯上把十五分钟(fifteen)称作一刻a quarter，三十分钟(thirty)称为half/half，因此10：30，可以用两种表达方式，half past ten，ten thirty。

12.Thanks for your letter.

Thanks for your help.

Thanks for telling me the good news.

13. Do you want to know about my morning?

1)该句中 want to do…句型。表示“想要做某事”，该短语中want为及物动词，后面的to do

是不定式

I want to play the drum.

I want to see my old teacher next week.

3)know about 知道有关…，了解有关…，句中about 意为“关于，有关”的意思。

17.Please write and tell me about your morning.请写信告诉我你的早晨。

释：1)tell sb. about sth.告诉某人有关某事的情况。

My father often tells me about China.

2)write sb. a letter=write a letter to sb.给某人写信。

She often writes me a letter=She often writes a letter to me.

三.重点短语

1.what time 几点

2.go to school 去上学

3.get up 起床

4.take a shower 洗淋浴

5.brush tooth 刷牙

6.get to 到达

7.do homework 做家庭作业

8.go to work 去上班

9.go home 回家

10.eat breakfast 吃早餐

11.get dressed 穿上衣服

12.get home 到家

13.either...or... 要么、、、要么

14.go to bed 上床睡觉

15.in the morning/afternoon/evening 在上午/下午/晚上

16.take a walk 散步

17.lots of 许多

18.radio station 广播电视

19.at night 在晚上

20.be late for 迟到

四.语法知识点

1. what time与when

what time翻译为“几点”问的是具体的时间，一般回答要具体到小时。

What time do you go to school?

I go to school at half past seven o’clock.

回答具体到点钟，且注意在几点前边的介词用at。

when也是对时间的提问，但与what time的区别是：用when提问，回答既可以是具体的时间，也可以是不具体的时间，如：in the morning，last year，in 等范围大的时间。

向对方询问具体时间时，即几点几分，只能用what time，不能用when。

询问年份、月份、日期时，只能用when，不能用what time。

2. 英语时间的表达

(1)整点时间可表示为“钟点数+o’clock”或直接读钟点数，省去o’clock。如：

It’s ten o’clock a. m. 现在是上午十点整。

(2)非整点时间可直接采取读数法。如：

It’s eight-thirty. 是八点三十分。

注意时间的表达方式：用数词。点与分钟之间用连字如：

eleven-thirty 十一点三十分

nine-twenty-five 九点二十五分

6:10 →six-ten 8:50→eight-fifty

9:30→nine-thirty 10:15→ten-fifteen

7:45→seven forty-five 11:05→eleven-five

(3)非整点时间的分钟数不超过30分钟，也可用介词“past”。如：

6:10→ten past six

11:05→five past eleven

10:15→ a quarter past ten或fifteen past ten

8:15→a quarter past eight或fifteen past eight

9:30→half past nine或thirty past nine

(4)非整点时间的分钟数超过30分钟，用介词to。如：

11:50→ten to twelve

7:31→twenty-nine to eight

9:45→a quarter to ten或fifteen to ten

12:59→one to thirteen

此句话还有几种表达方式。如：

What is the time? 几点了?

What time is it by your watch? 你的手表几点了?

( )1.--What's the time? --______one-thirty.

A. Its B.It's C.This is D.They're

( )2.I usually _______ at nine-thirty at night.

A. get to school B.get up C.go to bedD.go home

( )3.He likes ______ the radio. wwW.x kB 1.c Om

A.listens B.to listen to C. listens to D.to listen

( )4.I _______ at seven.

A. go to the school B.go to a school C.go to school D.go school

( )5.We only have _______ shower.

A. some B.an C.the D.one

( )6.My sister _______ home at 5:00 every day.

A. gets B.gets toC.get D.get to

( )7.We can watch Beijing Opera _____ TV.

A. in B.at C.on D.from

( )8.Let's ________.

A. take a shower B.have a shower C.take the shower D.A and B

( )9.My brother ____ the morning TV every day.

A. watches B.watch C.watches D.see

( )10.--______ do you usually go to bed?

--At six.

A. What time B.How time C.When D.A and C

( )11. Zhang Min usually gets up _______.

A. at six thirty B.at thirty six C.on six thirty D.on thirty six

( )12.Rick often does ______ homework at 6:00.

A.her B.his C.my D.your

( )13.--______ do people have dinner?

--At home. A.What B.When C.WhereD.B and C

( )14.In our school, school _____ at 7:30.

A.is B.start C.starts D.does

One day , an old man was selling a big elephant . A young man came up to the elephant and began to look at it slowly . The old man went up to him and said in his ear . “Don’t say anything about the elephant before I sell it . Then I will give you some meat .” “All right .”said the young man . After the old man sold the elephant , he gave the young man some met and said : “Now, can you tell me how you see the bad ears of the elephant ?” “I didn’t find the bad ears .”said the young man . “Then why do you look at it slowly ?”asked the old man . The young man said : “I never see an elephant before, and I want to know what it looks like.”

( )1________ the elephant.

A. The young man bought B. The old man sold

C. The two men sold D. The young man sold

( )2. The young man looked at the elephant . He wanted to find _____.

A. its bad ears B. some meat C. a good elephant D. what it looks like

( )3. The young man ________.

A.knew the elephant wasn’t good B. found the bad ears but didn’t tell it .

C. looked after the elephant D. got some meat

( )4.We know that ________.

A. the two men were not honest B. the young man wasn't a bad man

C. the old man was a good man D. the elephant was a very good one

( )5. The young man looked at the elephant slowly because he _______.

A. liked elephant B. wanted to buy it

C. didn’t see any elephant before D. wanted to help the old man

八年级下册英语课件 篇10

《人教版八年级下册英语课件》篇章主题范文

篇章一：My Summer Vacation（我的暑假）

My summer vacation was really enjoyable. First, I visited my grandma's house in the countryside. There, I helped her plant some vegetables and played with my cousins. We rode bikes and went swimming in the nearby lake. It was a lot of fun.

After that, I went to the beach with my family. We rented a cottage and spent a week there. We swam in the ocean and built sandcastles. We also had a bonfire and made s'mores. It was a great time with my family.

Finally, I went to a summer camp with my friends. We did a lot of outdoor activities like hiking, canoeing, and zip-lining. We also had campfires and shared stories. It was a great bonding experience with my friends.

Overall, my summer vacation was a great mix of relaxation and adventure. I can't wait to do it all again next year.

篇章二：The Benefits of Exercise（运动的好处）

Exercise is important for maintaining a healthy body and mind. Firstly, it can prevent a lot of health problems such as heart disease, high blood pressure, and obesity. Regular exercise also helps improve sleep and reduces stress and anxiety. It can even help prevent depression.

Exercise also has many benefits for the brain. It can improve cognitive function, including memory and thinking skills. It increases blood flow to the brain, which is important for maintaining brain health. Exercise also helps release endorphins, which are natural mood boosters.

Finally, exercise is a great way to socialize and make new friends. Joining a sports team or fitness group is a fun way to meet people who share your interests. It's also a great way to stay motivated and accountable.

In conclusion, exercise is essential for overall health and well-being. It has many physical and mental benefits and should be included in everyone's daily routine.

八年级下册英语课件 篇11

新教材（冀教版）八年级英语（下册）

Lesson 25 Let’s Do An Experiment!

LESSON PRERATATION

Words and phrases:

science, experiment, fill, prove, theory, jar, upside, observe, right side up, upside down.

LESSON STRUCTURE

CLASS OPENING:               Greed each other.

KEY STEPS:

STEP 1: Ask the class to discuss the questions in the “Think About It”.                                  STEP 2: Let the students listen to the tape carefully with the following           question:” Why does Danny say they should do this experiment outside?” ; “ What’s Brain’s theory? ”; “ What will Brain do?”; “Does Danny have the same theory as Brain’s?”

STEP3: listen to the tape again. The student’s better read the dialogue at the same time. After reading and listening, let the students fill in the chart by themselves.

What do we need when we do the experiment?

Water,  a jar, A piece of cardboard

How do we do it?(steps)

1.   fill…in…;

2.   cover…with…;

3.   turn…upside down.

What are Brain’s and Jenny’s theories?

1.   The floor gets wet.

2.   The floor won’t get wet.

Reason

discuss

Step 4: after filling it, ask the students to describe the experiment. Then, write it in the exercise-book.

Step 5. read the dialogue and act it out by the students.

Step 6. homework. Be ready to give us a morning report of tomorrow.

Language Notes:

Explain some sentences and phrases.

1.I fill a jar with water.

fill…with…

On hearing the news. Her eyes filled with tears.

2.I turn the jar upside down.

upside down

That picture is upside down.

3.I think the floor will get wet.

The days gets longer in spring.

4.I’m sure that the floor won’t get wet.

Tom ia sure that he will win the game.

5.We can prove who’s right.

My theory will prove (to be) right some day.

6.We’ll do the experiment and observe what will happen.

I observed her dance.

CLASS CLOSING:

Say good-bye to the students.

[1]

jk251.coM小编推荐

人教版八年级英语课件

在校园里，我们阅读过许多范文，一篇好的范文会让我们学到东西，阅读范文可以让我们更容易渡过独处的时间。阅读范文还能够让自己加深对写作的了解，那么，您看过哪些值得借鉴的教师相关优秀范文吗？以下是小编为大家收集的“人教版八年级英语课件”仅供参考，希望能为您提供参考！

人教版八年级英语课件 篇1

1.学生能够通过复习频率词汇，来运用how often询问活动的频率。

2.通过谈论课余时间的各项活动，学生能够培养自己的逻辑表达能力。

3.学生能通过完成各项任务，养成合理安排时间的好习惯。

【学习重点】

用所学的功能语言，表达自己做某事的频率。

【学习难点】

能够流利谈论课余时间的各项活动

Learning action tips: Revise the sentences learned “How often…?”last lesson.

Task 1

Learning action tips：

1.Preview the words on Page11 in the word list. Students read the wordsby phonetic symbols, then underline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning.

2.Students read and translate the sentences in Grammar Focus on Page11.

【Method coach】

sometimes有时;不时，多用于一般现在时。

口诀记忆辨析：sometimes 的“四胞胎”分开是“一段”，sometime

相连为“某时”，sometime

分开加“s”是倍次，some times

相连加“s”是有时，sometimes

▲短语

at least至少，不少于

at most至多，不超过

Task 2

Learning action tips：

采访时，要求一个学生当主持人，做开场介绍。

We are reporters from English Learning.We want to know how you learnEnglish，so we have an interview.

其余同学根据讨论总结的句型提问，没有回答问题的同学做好相应记录。采访完后，点将请同学完成教材P11：3c的表格。情景导入　生成问题

1.T：Whatdo you usually do on weekends?

S：________________________________________________________________________

2.T：Howoften do you exercise?

S：________________________________________________________________________

3.T：Howoften does she/he exercise?

S：________________________________________________________________________

自学互研　生成能力

Task1Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

least，at least

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语和句子。

(1)熬夜stay__up__late

(2)吃健康的早饭eat__a__healthy__breakfast

(3)早点睡觉go__to__bed__early

(4)—他多久踢一次足球?—他最少一周两次。—How__often__does__he__play__soccer?—He__plays__it__at__least__twice__a__week.

(5)—你多久去看一次电影?—我大概一个月看一次电影。—How__often__do__you__go__to__the__movies?—I__go__to__the__movies__maybe__once__a__month.

3.I can use.(我会用)

辨析maybe与may be

maybe意为“大概;或许;可能”，是副词，常位于句首或句中。may be是情态动词may与动词原形be一起构成句子的谓语动词，意为“可能是”。

(D)—Whereis Mike?

—________he is in the classroom.

A.may beB.maybeC.MayD.Maybe

Task2Makeconversations and interview.

1.I can practice.(我会练)

完成3a后，朗读下列对话并背诵。

A：What does your__sisterdo on Saturday，Jane?

B：She often helps__with__housework.

A：How often does she go__to__the__movies?

B：Maybe once__a__month.

A：Do you take__a__walkevery day?

B：No，we__never__take__a__walk.

2.I can make conversations.(我会编对话)

你能结合所学句型及3b的内容编写对话吗?

A：What do you usually do on weekends?

B：I usually help with housework.

A：How often do you help with house work?

B：Twice a week. Do you help with housework?

A：No, I never help with housework.Ialways exercise.

B：Do you exercise every day?

A：Yes, I do every day.

【备注】

3.I can interview.(我会采访)

组内议论提高英语学习成绩的方法，完成3c。并结合课文内容总结采访中能用到的句型，然后以小记者的身份进行采访，向同学了解他或她是如何提高英语成绩的，看看谁的方法最好。

A：What__can__you__do__to__improve__your__English?

B：I__read__some__English__books.

A：How__often__do__you__read__English__books?

B：I__read__English__books__every__day.

…

交流展示　生成新知

Preshow：Show in groups. (Time：six minutes)

Task1：First read the words andphrases in groups，then read together andsum up the usage of the words in groups，markthe difficult words in pronunciation and understanding(students can ask teacherfor help).At last，write them on the blackboard.

Task2：First discuss and checkthe answers of Task 2 in groups, then discuss and set scenes to perform the dialogues，use the phrases we learnt to talkabout the frequency of part­time activities and makea survey about the frequency of all kinds of activities.At last，write them on the blackboard.

Promotionshow：Class show. (Time：sixteen minutes)

Task1：Ican read.(1)Readtogether, pay attention to the pronunciation of “least”;(2)Consolidate the words by word games.

2.I can write.(1)Translate the phrasesinto English or Chinese by answering quickly;(2)Readtogether;(3)Spot test：consolidate the usage of the phrasesby making sentences.

3.I can use.(1) Sum up the usage ofkey words according to the phrases in“I can write”;(2)Spot test: consolidate the usageof “maybe ”and “may be” with exercises，checkthe answers by answering quickly and explain .

Task2: 1.I can practice.(1)Choosestudents to act out the dialogues in role ;(2)Readtogether.

2.I can makeconversations.(1)Makedialogues according to the sentences in Grammar Focus and 3a;(2)Students make dialogues according to their own actual situation，discuss their dialogue in groups,then show them in class.

3.I can interview.(1)Interview among studentsaccording to 3b and show them on the blackboard in diagrams;(2)Show them in dialogues.

当堂演练　达成目标

用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。

1.Mary knows little Chinese so she hardly(hard)speaks Chinese.

2.I go to the movies maybe twice(two)a month.

3.How often does (do)Lily watchTV?

4.You must eat more vegetables and keephealthy(health).

5.Some boys play football two or threetimes(time)a week.

课后反思　

查漏补缺收获：________________________________________________________________________

存在困惑：________________________________________________________________________

人教版八年级英语课件 篇2

师： 春节俗称过大年。同学们为什么喜欢春节呢？

师： 刚才同学们有的谈到过年的风俗；有的讲述的是过年时开心快乐的事情，一年之计在于春，新年是及喜庆的字眼。每到这一天，人们都会准备些来年幸福美满的东西，如春糕、春馍、春酒等。这节课我们就共同去感受琦君儿时过年的自由和快乐，可以说甜甜的一杯春酒，是节日的珍品，是母亲的骄傲，更是作者最美好的回忆。让我们与作者一起，品味那尘封多年的春酒，在这被甘甜的“春酒”中尽情的陶醉吧！

1、学习文章富有情趣的细节描写，体会其作用。

2、理解文章表现的思乡的这一主旨。

二、在端饮这杯春酒前，请同学们带着大屏幕上的问题，用你最喜欢的读书方式整体感知课文，初识春酒：。

师：你在读课文时，有读不准的字音吗？检测一下同学们的预习情况（陈晓丽板书后齐读

家醅--家醅，挑剔--挑剔，如法炮制--如法炮制。

师：形容领先带头，你们知道意思，大家理解了，怎么不愿意表现一下呢？

生：文章写了过新年、喝春酒和喝会酒三件事，主要写的是过新年、喝春酒（2-4）和喝会酒（5-7）这两件事。

师：作者怀念的仅仅是家乡的春酒吗？下面请同学四人小组讨论交流一下。

（生讨论交流）并以“从-------------看出“我”还在怀念的句式说一句话”

生：我从作者写了自己家乡过新年的习俗，新年迎神拜佛，有许多规矩,元宵节后，换下的供品堆得满满的一大缸，孩子们的兴奋、快乐，家乡的紧张和繁忙。我怀念故乡的风俗美

生：还写了家家户户轮流邀喝春酒，我一马当先地作为母亲的代表前往家家户户喝春酒，乡亲们之间互相“起会”置办“会酒”的融洽。我怀念故乡的风俗美人情之美自己对故乡亲友的怀念

生：作者还写母亲做的八宝酒的做法，母亲的善良和大方，例如“到了喝春酒时，就开出来请大家尝尝，……母亲总是乐意把花厅供客人请客” 我对母亲的怀念

师：作者通过春酒写故乡的风俗之美、人情之美，写自己对故乡亲友的怀念，对母亲的追思，其间流淌着的是浓浓的思乡之情。

师：甜甜的一杯春酒，是节日的珍品，是母亲的骄傲，更是作者最美好的回忆。让我们与作者一起，尽情地陶醉在这杯甘醇的“春酒”之中！（点击大屏幕）请同学们看大屏幕，用圈点批注法找出你最喜欢的语句或词语，看谁找的语句最吸引人！（20分钟）

（文中的人物是通过许多很有情趣的描写来体现的，那同学们想想看，在吃春酒和喝会酒的时候小小的我获得了哪些快乐呢？我的哪个小小的举动、小小的情状、小小心思惹得你莞尔一笑？找出你最喜欢的语句或词语，找出来读一读，并说明原因。）

生7：我是母亲的代表，总是一马当先，不请自到，肚子吃得鼓鼓的跟蜜蜂似的，手里还捧一大包回家。

师：不是程度不一样，是鼓鼓的写出了吃的那种形态。为了写出这种形态，作者用了“像小蜜蜂似的”。鼓鼓的就非的像小蜜蜂似的吗，鼓鼓的不应该像小皮球似的吗？小企鹅似的，不也很可爱吗？为什么要像小蜜蜂似的？

师：因为蜜蜂很小，所以很可爱。很好，形体把握。还有呢？

师：太有想象力了，蜜蜂采完花蜜也是鼓鼓的。蜜蜂采完蜜除了鼓鼓的，还有什么？

师：喜悦，那种甜甜的喜悦和我喝完春酒之后甜甜的喜悦是一样的。非常好，还有吗?

师：她总是这样，一马当先，对不对啊?她就像只小蜜蜂一样频繁地穿梭在人群之中，还有吗？

生12：生：我最喜欢的是“其实我没等她说完，早已偷偷的把手指头在杯子里好几回，已经不知舔了多少个指甲缝的八宝酒了”，

师：哦，看出很淘气，还有呢?她偷偷地是在干嘛？

师：一个舔字把哪个馋猫的形象勾画出来了。作者在品尝八宝酒的时候那迫不及待的模样，小孩的活泼天真和顽皮，写的栩栩如生从母亲那浓郁可口的八宝酒中，我们也似乎嗅到亲情的芬芳与乡情的馥郁。还有吗？

生13：我呢，就在每个人怀里靠一下，用筷子点一下酒，舔一舔，才过瘾这些都是小孩子特有的动作与神态，在作者笔下，只有这么寥寥几笔，一个活泼可爱的小女孩立刻在纸上活动起来，还微微歪着脑袋冲着我们笑呢真是惟妙惟肖，语言虽然质朴简练，但字里行间充满了浓郁的人情味，读来也像是尝到了春酒一般怀了妙不可言的温暖。

师：是的，过春节的时候我们喜欢在这个伯伯面前蹭蹭，在那个叔叔面前靠靠。那他们就会拿筷子让我们添一添，这样我就会张开我们的小嘴叭咋叭咋。是吧，很可爱，

生14：抱着小花猫时，它直舔，舔完了就呼呼地睡觉。原来我的小花猫也是个酒仙呢

师：这是一个多么灵动的想象，小花猫都变成小酒仙了，连它也喜欢妈妈酿制的八宝酒。只有是个孩子才有这么灵气的想象。那我很舍得让我的小花猫吃吗？

师：其实我是蛮羡慕那只小花猫的，那是因为什么？那是因为我在喝八宝酒的时候，大家一齐读

生齐读：母亲给我在小酒杯底里只倒一点点，我端着、闻着，走来走去，有一次一不小心，跨门槛时跌了一跤，杯子捏在手里，酒却全洒在衣襟上了。抱着小花猫时，它直舔，舔完了就呼呼地睡觉。原来我的小花猫也是个酒仙呢！

师：当时是怎么样的啊？摔倒了杯子还捏在手里，很珍惜的。端着闻着。

从我们刚才回忆的这些童年往事中，我们看到了作者的快乐，看到了一个多么孩子气的绮君啊，那是谁制造了我这样的童年呢，是谁包容了我这样的孩子气呢？

师：是母亲，给我制造了这样一个梦幻般的童年。那文中母亲的哪个动作，哪些话语，哪些情态触动了你的内心，让你砰然心动，会发出这样的感慨：这个人就是娘啊。

生：我喜欢写母亲的细节，如“到了喝春酒时，就开出来请大家尝尝……”“母亲得意的说了一遍又一遍，高兴得两颊红红的，跟喝过酒似，其实母亲是滴酒不沾唇的”母亲因别人的赞美高兴得两颊红红，一位宽容，善良大度、充满美德的慈爱温柔的母亲真是历历在目。

生：她又转向我说：“但是你呀，就只能舔一指甲缝，小孩子喝多了会流鼻血，太补了。”

师：你只能添一指甲缝，对于我偷偷的行为，母亲没有大声地呵斥，而是温柔地提醒。还有吗

生：大家喝了甜美的八宝酒，都问母亲里面泡的是什么宝贝。母亲得意地说了一遍又一遍

过渡：春酒的确美不胜收，琦君笔下一切所有美好已成了琦君的心灵寄托，在现实中难以企及。如此至纯至美的心灵家园在琦君的绝大多数作品曾出现，这与她的经历有关（出示：19生于浙江永嘉，1949年赴台湾，26年后定居美国。）那么，如今客居美国，人近老年的琦君还能品尝到这美得醉人的春酒吗？还能喝到那种家醅吗？还能品出童年的快乐吗，童年早已逝去，历尽沧桑的绮君，如果还有幸回到故乡，那也已经是物是人非了。家醅已然不在，故乡却依然是水天一角，海阔山遥。家醅只存在于琦君的记忆里了，家乡味只能回味在心里了。

一位青年诗人这样说到：他对故乡的思念就是东方飘逸的童年，总爱把故乡思念成母亲的模样。一杯荡漾着孩子气的春酒，一杯浸渗着母爱的春酒，实质上是一杯浓浓的家乡酒，这是绮君对故乡的最深沉的、最刻骨铭心的眷念。路从今夜白，月是故乡明，对家乡的思念总是人们难以挥去的情愫。常年漂泊的琦君曾这样深情地说过：“像树木花草一样，谁能没有一个根呢？我若能忘掉故乡，忘掉亲人师友，忘掉童年，我宁愿搁下笔，此生永不再写。”（出示）可以看出，这个超凡脱俗的心灵永远走不出对家乡人、事诸物的怀念。教师范读同学们可能未曾远离过自己的故乡，很难体会到对故乡刻骨铭心的怀念，我们利用文字再来体会一下那种感伤。将课文最后一句话带着感伤的情怀再读一下。生齐读

师：叫我到哪儿去找真正的家醅呢？这句话于我们可能是悠悠的感伤，对于海外游子们却足以让他们潸然泪下。海外游子离开家乡的这种情怀，在历来的文章中常有渗透，可以说历经坎坷的诗人，忧国忧民的诗人、多愁善感的诗人，见他们漂泊一地的惆怅和思念家乡亲人的愁苦寄予与明月，于是他们的诗篇和月光一样光耀千古拨动着后人的心弦，我们再来结合他们的诗句来品位这杯春酒和这份家乡的情怀。能不能找出在其它诗句中诗人所传递出的那种思乡情怀。

师：非常好，正如我们同学们所说的其实对故乡的思念正如李白的“举头望明月，低头思故乡”的沉静；是崔颢的“日暮乡关何处是，烟波江上使人愁”的忧郁；是贺知章的“少小离家老大回,乡音无改鬓毛衰”的沧桑；其实它还是现代诗人余光中隔着海峡传来的“大陆在那头，我在这头”；它也是席慕容心中那颗“永不老去的，惟有绵绵的爱意”。孩子们，借着文人们这些笔墨，我们再来看看绮君在《春酒》中渗透的浓浓的故乡情怀，对于这一杯春酒我们再到余光中的乡愁中，去深深体会。（教师范读）38

六、教师小结结束语：一路走来，风景无限；一路品来，春酒醇香无比。其实，春酒的美还有很多很多，我们课堂40分钟无法穷尽，有待于我们同学课后再去领略。最后，送上我的一段话，这是我在读完《春酒》后，在一个寂静的深夜写下的文字：“在行色匆匆、只争朝夕的日子里，我们几多疲累，几多迷茫。或许真的该为流浪的心灵和漂泊的灵魂安个家了，她或许是琦君魂牵梦绕的春酒，她或许是鲁迅没看真切的社戏，亦或是令佩弦潸然泪下的背影……年年岁岁，花开花落，任世间万象纷繁变迁，唯一不变的是我们这方脚下

[《春酒》教学设计(人教版八年级下册)]

人教版八年级英语课件 篇3

【学习目标】

1.学生学会形容词或副词比较级形式的构成及两者进行比较的一些常用词汇与句型。

2.通过听对人物的外表进行描绘、个性进行比较的对话，学生学会怎样就两者进行比较。

3.学生学会用比较级进行信息交流，增强自信心，多交益友，快乐生活，快乐学习。

【学习重点】

用所学的功能语言交流如何运用比较级描绘人物的外貌与个性。

【学习难点】

学习形容词和副词比较级的用法

Learning action tips：Accordingto the actual situation of the students in class, create scene to lead in the new course by the way of teacher and student\'squestion and answer：

—Which one is more hard­working at their lessons? —Lisa is.

And revise the adjectives about describing the appearance and personalityof a person.

Learning action tips: Preview the words on Page17-18 in the word list. Students read the words by phonetic symbols, thenunderline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning. At last finish thetask in 1a.

【知识链接】

clearly adv.清楚地;清晰地;明白地

【拓展】

形容词后加上­ly常构成副词。eg：loud→loudly;quiet→quietly;serious→seriously;usual→usually;different→differently;real→really

friendly adj.友好的

(1)friendly的比较级是more friendly。

(2)be friendly to sb.对某人友好的。

【拓展】

某些名词后加上­ly可构成形容词。eg：month→monthly;mother→motherly;week→weekly;day→daily情景导入　生成问题

1.T：Whatdo you think of your best friend?

S：________________________________________________________________________

2.T：Isshe taller than you?

S：________________________________________________________________________

自学互研　生成能力

Task1　Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

outgoing，better，loudly，quietly，hard­working，competition，fantastic，which，clearly，win，though

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语：

(1)敲鼓play__the__drums　(2)长(短)头发long(short)__hair

(3)更外向more__outgoing　(4)和……一样努力work__as__hard__as

(5)起得早get__up__early　(6)跑得快run__fast

(7)歌咏比赛the__singing__competition

(8)最主要的事情the__most__important__thing

(9)学到新东西learn__something__new　(10)玩得高兴have__fun

3.I can summarize.(我会总结)

形容词和副词比较级的变化规则：

(1)一般的在词尾加er

(2)以不发音的字母e结尾的词尾加r

(3)以一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节，先双写这个辅音字母再加er

(4)以辅音字母加y结尾先改y为i再加er

(5)多音节和部分双音节词在该词前面加more

(6)不规则的变化需要我们用心记忆

写出下列形容词或副词的比较级。

(1)long longer (2)short shorter 　(3)nice nicer (4)early earlier

(5)big bigger (6)hot hotter (7)thin thinner (8)easy easier

(9)quietly more__quietly(10)beautiful more__beautiful(11)good better

Task2　Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.

Task3　Makeconversations an interview.

1.I can practice.(我会练)

A：Peter，(1)is__that__Paul?

B：No, that\'s Tom. Paul is thinner thanTom.

And he also (2)has__longer__hair(更长的头发)than Tom.

A：Oh，(3)can__they__sing?

B：Yes, they can sing well.

A：(4)Who__can__sing__better，Paul or Tom?

B：Tom sings better than Paul…

win

v.获胜;赢;赢得

n.winner 获胜者

【辨析】

win与beat

两者均可作动词，意为“赢”，但用法不同：

(1)win(won，won)后接比赛、竞赛、战斗、奖品、钱等名词。

(2)beat(beat，beaten)后接竞争对手。

【导练】

(1)我们的队赢得了篮球比赛。Our team won the basketball match.

(2)昨天乒乓球比赛我打败了内莉。I beat Nelly at ping­pong yesterday.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇4

课前准备：

教师：录音机，所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练及相关的学习用具

Teaching procedures(教学步骤):

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1.Greetings and free-talk .

2.Check the Homework(家庭作业) .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)SB Page 24 , Groupwork .

1.Arrange the Ss in small groups .Ask them to look at the pictures and talk

about the events .Encourage students to say how historical events affected their

lives .

2.Tell the Ss to help each other with vocabulary they might need and don’t

know .

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)

1.Reading strategy :The title can be helpful for you to understand a text

.It is also a good idea to read the first sentence of each paragraph before

reading .

2.Read the title ,which gives an indication of the content of the reading

.Think of one question they think might be answered in the reading .

3.Play the recording , Ss listen . 4.Ask Ss to read the story out to the

class .

5.Ask Ss to comment on whether their questions in the previewing stage were

answered .

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)SB Page 25 , 3a .

Read the four events and match them to the correct dates .When finished

,ask Ss to swap their book with a partner for correction .

Homework(家庭作业) :

Write about an event that you remember well .Give dates and say why you

remember it ,and what you were doing at the time when you heard the news .

教学后记:

第六课时：测试课

一、单项选择。

( )1. What ____ you ____ when she came in?

A. did, do B. are, doing C. do, do D. were, doing

( )2. The girl is ill. She’s ______.

A. in hosp

人教版八年级英语课件 篇5

课前准备：

教师：录音机，所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练及相关的学习用具

Teaching procedures(教学步骤) :

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1. Greeting and free talk .

2. Check the Homework(家庭作业) .Collect the students’ advice .Write it down on the Bb .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)

1.Review the differences between “could /should” .

2. Learn the new words in Page 12 .

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)SB Page 12 , 3a .

1. Read the instructions .

2. Read the conversations by Ss or listen to the tape .Then write “good idea” “okay idea” or “bad idea” .

3. Talk about the students’ answers .

4. Make sure the students understand the dialogue.Practice reading

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)SB Page 12 , 3b .

1. Read the instructions .Point out the example conversation and ask two students to read it to the class .

2. Use your head .Find some other ways to get money that aren’t in the book .

3. Ask Ss to work with partner as they ask for and give advice .

4.Pairwork .

5. Act out the conversations to the class .

Step 5 While-task(任务中活动)SB Page 12 , Part 4 .

1. Read the instructions .Make sure the Ss understand what they should do .

2. To students read the dialogue .

3. Practice reading .

4. Ask another pair to give their advice on another topic .

5. Pairwork .(互助活动)

Homework(家庭作业) :

将下列短语或句型译为汉语

1. keep out 2. out of style 3. What’s wrong ?

4. call sb up 5. pay for 6. ask for something

7. summer camp 8. stay at home

教学后记:

人教版八年级英语课件 篇6

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案6篇

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇1

在这一学期中，我们九年级英语备课组教师在学校行政的领导下，教导处的指导下，按照英语教研组的计划扎扎实实地进行工作，尽力做到既教书又育人，各项工作齐头并进，圆满完成本学期的各项工作，下面从几个方面总结一下：

一、树立竟争意识，关爱每一位学生

面向全体学生，提高学生的道德素养，我们英语组每位老师敬业奉献，树立竞争意识，提高自身素质。在以人为本，以爱育人的教育理念指导下，把育人放在第一位，关爱后进生。树立新的教育理念，确实抓好教学。在教学中，我们把落实新课改，推进课程改革放在首位，因为新的课程标准颁布是基础教育的重大改革，对此，我组全体老师积极响应付诸实施。我们认真思考，积极讨论，制定出课改具体计划。我们通过相互观摩课、看录像等形式加强“课改”理论学习，提高自身的素质。

二、规范教学管理，进一步提高教学质量

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，备学生，又要备教法。备课不充分或者备得不好，会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性，一堂准备充分的课，会令学生和老师都获益不浅。教学难度比较大的课，如果照本宣科地讲授，学生会感到困难和沉闷。为了上好每堂课，我们每位老师认真研究探讨，找出了重点，难点。

三、关爱每个学生，缩小两极分化

因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我们制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。

四、按照教学常规五个环节开展教学工作

备课：课前认真地备好每一节课，写好教案。既备教材，又备学生，针对学生分析、概括、表达能力差的特点，设计好教学方法。上课：每天都保持饱满的精神，让学生感受到一种自然气氛，认真做好组织教学，尽可能保证上课内容丰富，现实，教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，并且充分调动学生的学习积极性，设法令学生投入，不让其分心，让学生多动手，多动口、，多动脑，让课堂气氛活跃起来，充分调动学生的主观

能动性，力图让学生学有所得，学有所乐。作业和辅导：作业的布置适量，有针对性，重点放在遣词造句、阅读理解等;批改作业时多用赞美式、鼓励性的语言予以评价。对学生的辅导方面，做到有耐心，有方法，因材施教，个别无心思学的学生，经过一个学期的耐心教育，学习兴趣明显提高，成绩也有较大的进步。考试：本学期进行了多次阶段性的考试。每次的考试，都能做到考试前进行有系统的复习，考试后进行学科总结，及时查漏补缺，从中改正教学方法，也让学生调整学习方法，争取更大的进步。

五、其他方面

1、把握教学进度，合理安排时间，统一教学进度，顺利完成了本学期的教学任务。

2、认真辅导、组织学生参加了本学期举行的英语竞赛活动，并且取得了优异成绩。王梦涵同学和张宇熠同学在区英语口语比赛中获得一等奖。

3、为了加强自身的业务水平，积极对各种教育理论进行学习，给自己充电，以便在工作中以坚实的理论作为指导，更好地进行教育教学;努力提高英语专业水平，以适应当前教育的形式，为更好地进行素质教育夯实基础，撰写出较有质量的教育教学论文并进行各种课题的研究。

六、今后采取的措施

从今年网上阅卷的情况来看，可以检测老师的水平，也能了解学生在各方面的不足之处。在以后的教学中，加强学生们的书写，审题把握中心，并且在写作运用上加大力度。

#380450

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇2

本学期我担任初三级(1)班、(2)班的英语教学。由于教学经验颇浅，我对教学工作不敢怠慢，认真学习，深入研究教法，虚心学习。经过一个学期的努力，获取了很多宝贵的教学经验。以下是我在本学期的教学情况。

一、备好课，备好学生，上好课

教学就是教与学，两者是相互联系，不可分割的，有教者就必然有学者。学生是被教的主体。因此，了解和分析学生情况，有针对地教对教学成功与否至关重要。不懂得了解学生对教学的重要性，只是专心研究书本，教材，想方设法令课堂生动，学生易接受，这是很容易碰钉子的。在上课前要了解清楚学生的实际情况：

一方面，农村的学生英语听，说的能力相对较弱，授课采用较深的全英教学，同学们较难适应。另一方面，(1)班的同学比较沉静，中等生占较大多数，尖子生相对较少。因此，讲得太深，就照顾不到整体，而(2)班的同学比较活跃，上课气氛积极，虽然优生比例大，但中等生也有一小部分，我备课时也注意到这点，因此教学效果比较理想。从此可以看出，了解及分析学生实际情况，实事求是，具体问题具体分析，做到因材施教，对授课效果有直接影响。这就是教育学中提到的“备教法的同时要备学生”。这一理论在我的教学实践中得到了验证。

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，备学生，又要备教法。备课不充分或者备得不好，会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性，因此，每天我都花费大量的时间在备课之上，认认真真钻研教材和教法，不满意就不收工。虽然辛苦，但事实证明是值得的。

一堂准备充分的课，会令学生和老师都获益不浅。我认真研究了课文，找出了重点，难点，准备有针对性地讲。为使教学生动，不沉闷，我还为此准备了大量的教具，授课时就胸有成竹了。相反，我没有认真备课的时候，课堂气氛沉闷，教学效果不好，与此相比可见，认真备课对教学十分重要。特别是对英语这门学生不甚熟悉并感到困难的外语来说至关重要。

备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。但同时又要有驾驭课堂的能力，因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学。因此上课一定要设法令学生投入，不让其分心，这就很讲究方法了。上课内容丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。所以，老师每天都要有充足的精神，让学生感受到一种自然气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。

二、激发学生学习兴趣

英语是一门外语，对学生而言，既生疏又困难，在这样一种大环境之下，要教好英语，就要让学生喜爱英语，让他们对英语产生兴趣。否则学生对这门学科产生畏难情绪，不愿学，也无法学下去。为此，我采取了一些方法，就是尽量多讲一些关于英美国家的文化，生活故事，让他们更了解英语，更喜欢学习英语。因为只有英语水平提高，他们才能达到交异国笔友的目的，同时也可以提高同学们的英语写作能力，对成绩优秀的同学很有好处。因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。

三、注重听、说、读、写全面发展

英语是语言。因此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持下班了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强硬背诵等方式，提高他们的能力。期中考和期末考是考察每位同学在本学期的学习成果，因此应该予以重视。考试前进行有系统的复习，考试后进行学科总结。在中段考后的时间里，我把力量主要集中在两班的差生辅导上，特别是(4)班，以缩短差距。另外，还发现学生的综合能力不够强，所以以后的教学中要加强这方面的训练。让学生轻松学，容易掌握。而期考结果证明，适当辅导后进生对班的整体发展有很大帮助。

经过一个学期的努力，期末考就是一种考验。无论成绩高低，都体现了我在这学期的教学成果。我明白到这并不是最重要的，重要的是在本学期后如何自我提高，如何共同提高两班的英语水平。因此，无论怎样辛苦，我都会继续努力，多问，多想，多向别人学习，争取进步。

#380976

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇3

今年我担任毕业班两个班的英语，感到压力沉重。因为这两个班的学生素质相对较低，而且英语底子参差不齐，而九年级是整个初中阶段最重要一年，为使学生在英语这门学科上取得更大的进步，取得优异的成绩，我在教学中尝试了一些教学方法，现总结如下：

一、备课

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，既要备教材、备学生，又要备教法。备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。

二、培养学生良好的英语学习习惯

我校的学生来源全是农村的，学生家长以及周围的环境对学习英语都不是很关注，而且大多是留守学生，学生的学习自觉性也较差，主要表现在以下几个方面：

1、不把背的作业当回事。学过的单词，句型，短文，老师要求背出，学生总是借口其他作业太多，没时间背等，往后一拖再拖，即便能背出来，也是临时死记强记出来的。等过不了多久又忘了。

2、针对性习题跟不上上过的新课，相应的配套练习，不能自觉去独立完成，总需要老师再三强调，但仍有部分学生拖拖拉拉不做。死记硬背的东西多，联系的东西少，因此表面上看感觉还可以，但真正一考起来，问题出来很多，而且差距很大。经过几次考试下来，问题也出来了，我任教的两个班：尖子生只有几个，中等生断层，差生面特大。

针对以上情况，改变这种局面，我从下面几个方面着手：

首先，培养学生良好的学习习惯，课前多预习，课堂45分钟让学生集中注意力听讲，把老师讲的内容真正听懂。不能似懂非懂。课后认真完成配套的巩固练习，不懂的地方，多向老师或成绩稍好的学生请教。

其次，学生学习要主次分明，主要学科课后时间分配相应的因当多一些，特别是对英语学科，因为他毕竟不是母语。基础不打好，以后想提高也难。

第三，灵活掌握学过的知识点，学习要讲究方法，举一反三，融会贯通，只有这样，学生才能把所学的知识串联起来，不容易忘记。要让学生明白，学习英语不是一天两天的事，是要靠平时慢慢积累起来的。

三、建设高效的课堂，努力提高驾驭课堂的能力

因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学，所以上课一定要设法吸引学生，不让其分心，上课内容力求丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。另外，我每天都坚持保持充足的精神，让学生感受到一种积极上进的气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。为了让学生真正参入到课堂中来，凡是学生自己能讲清楚的问题，都让学生自己解决，老师决不越俎代庖，课堂上尽量精讲、少讲把时间都留给学生。

四、加强课外辅导

英语学习是语言的学习。困此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持认真了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强制背诵等方式，帮助他们养成良好习惯，提高他们的英语学习能力。

以上就是我在本学期的教学工作总结，有成绩也有不足。今后我将继续努力，取得更好成绩.

#380975

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇4

时光飞逝，短暂而又愉快的假期生活已经结束了。接下来我所面临的是紧张而又愉快的新学期的教育教学生活。为把新学期的教育教学工作做好，特此作如下教学计划：

一.指导思想。

“减负”的内在，并以此指导自己的教育教学工作，遵循教育教学规律，紧扣大纲，把我教学层次，不断提高自己的业务水平。

二.基本情况。

这一学期，我继续担任初一(1，2)班的英语教学工作。这两个班级，每班各有学生三十五人左右，但是，基础却不尽人意。初一.1班的学生基础还可以，但是2班的基础却相差很远，学生基础参差不齐，两极分化严重，没有学习的兴趣。因此，教学工作开展的相当困难。

三.教材特点。

初中英语第一册(下)主要介绍了日常生活的交际用语以及一些西方国家的文化背景和风俗习惯，教材通俗易懂，旨在使初一级学生基本能用英语进行简单的交流。

四.教学目标。

力争在期末考试中优秀率打到30%左右，及格率达到60%左右。缩小学生间的差距。为下一学期的英语教育教学工作打下以良好的基础。

五.具体措施。

1.每天背诵课文中的对话。目的：要求学生背诵并默写，培养语感。

2.每天记5个生词，2个常用句子或习语。实施：利用“互测及教师抽查”及时检查，保证效果并坚持下去。

3.认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

4.坚持日测、周测、月测的形成性评价制度：对英语学习实行量化制度，每日、每周、每月都要给学生检验自己努力成果的机会，让进步的同学体会到成就感，让落后的同学找出差距，感受压力。由此在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

5.对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自信，尽快成长起来。

6.关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7.实施任务型的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力。

8.在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

9.加强对学生学习策略的指导，为他们终身学习奠定基础。

10.认真钻研教材，备好，上好每一节课，向45分钟要质量。

总之，新的学期已经开始了，我要以上一学期的基础为起点，树立信心，全身心的投入到新学期的教育教学工作中去。争取在新的一年里，把教育教学工作推向一新的层次。

#277306

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇5

本学期我担任初三级(10)班、(13)班的英语教学。本学期以来,本人遵守学校各项制度，按时上课、组织学生早读，积极参加学校组织的各种教学活动，从各方面更加严格要求自己，结合本校的实际条件和学生的实际情况，认真备课、听课，深入研究教法，虚心向老教师请教，及时反思教学，使教学有计划、有组织、有步骤地开展虚心学习。现对本学期以来的教学教育工作做以下总结，希望不断发扬优点，克服缺点，总结经验，吸取教训，使自己的教学工作更上一层楼。

一、认真制定教学计划，使教学有序地进行。在新课程改革精神和新的教学理念的灌溉下，我依照教学大纲、教材、学生实际和教育教学规律，制定了学期教学计划，规划好阶段计划，课时计划。在此基础上，设计好每一堂课。

二、认真备课。作为一名年轻教师，我的体会是，上好一堂课难，但备好一堂课更难。在备课之前，必须对所有内容进行熟悉，参考多方面的资料，认真深入钻研教材，确定重点难点，同时，备课不仅要备教材，而且要备教法，备教学手段，因此，本人在自身努力钻研教材和教法的基础上，积极配合搞好同年级老师的小组集体备课。

三、认真组织课堂教学。一堂课的四十五分钟，就是一个教师表演技能的阶段。上课时，本着“传道、授业、解惑”的原则，努力提高教学质量，使讲解有条理、清晰、准确、生动。使每堂课学生有所获，努力使学生打好基础，培养能力，发展智慧，培养学生的正确思维方式，养成良好的学习习惯。坚持做到以学生为主体，教师为主导，训练为主线。在课堂上，特别注意调动学生的积极性，加强师生交流，充分体现学生的主体作用，让学生学得容易，学得轻松，学得愉快。在课堂上，根据不同学生设计不同层次的问题，树立学生的自信心，让各层次的学生都得到提高。

四、虚心请教其他教师。教师的教学过程即是一个学习的过程。因此，在此过程中，一旦心中有疑，必会请教于同行。由于自己是一个教坛新手，缺乏经验，所以有许许多多的东西都须向其他教师学习。认真做到每月听课两节，做好听课记录，取之所长，克服所短。并常常与其他教师交流，改进教学方法。

五、认真批改作业。坚持布置适量的作业，使学生所学知识得到巩固和提高。布置作业时，坚持做到有针对性，有层次性，形式多样化。以此同时，提倡学生写英语周记，坚持每两周检查一次。每周布置听写任务，对所学新单词、新短语、好句子进行听写。认真及时地批改作业、作文、周记及听写。并针对学生的作业作文情况，认真透彻地进行讲评，根据其情况不断改进教法。

六、认真反思教学。教学这一活动，没有反思的伴随就不会有进步。坚持每次授课后，认真回想，进行反思。记录其教法、做法及操作不大理想的地方，虚心请教前来听课的领导及教师，及时做改进。并根据班级情况，分组教学，使组与组之间进行竞争学习。正所谓“有竞争才有动力”，坚持长期性评价原则，使学生在组中相互帮助，相互学习，培养团结互助的学习精神。

七、做好课后辅导工作。在课后，对不同的学生进行相应的辅导。从平时的课堂反应，课后交流，周记记录中掌握各个学生的心理状况，抓住他们的特点和个性，有的放矢地与其进行交流，做到按层次、按情况进行辅导。及时给予关怀和关爱。善于发现学生的优点，并给予表扬;积极发现后进生的闪光点，及时给予鼓励，树立他们的自信心。充分结合课本知识，给学生讲相关的英语故事，了解外国文化，扩大知识面。引导他们对学习萌发兴趣，从而自觉地把身心投入到学习中去。

总之，在这一学期的教学过程中，我尽力地做好每项工作。其中学到的东西固然不少，但不足之处也很多。在以后的教学工作中，我将不断总结经验，发扬优点，改进缺点，不断探索新的教学方法和教学手段，激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性，提高自己的教学质量，做一位合格的人民教师，让我这颗教坛上的新星更加耀眼!

#380977

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇6

以“英语课程标准”为宗旨，适应新课程改革的需要，面向全体学生，提高学生的人文素养，增强实践能力和创新精神。正确把握英语学科特点，积极倡导合作探究的学习方式。培养学生积极地情感态度和正确的人生价值观，提高学生综合素质为学生全面发展和终身发展奠定基础。具体如下：

1、要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心,培养创新精神;

2、整体设计目标，体现灵活开放，目标设计以学生技能，语言知识，情感态度，学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础;

3、突出学生主体，尊重个体差异;

4、采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，即采用任务型的教学模式，让学生在老师的指导下通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式，实现任务的目标，感受成功;

5、注重过程评价，促进学生发展，建立能激励学生学习兴趣和自主学习能力发展的评价体系。

总之，让学生在使用英语中学习英语，让学生成为GoodUser而不仅仅是Learner。让英语成为学生学习生活中最实用的工具而非累赘，让他们在使用和学习英语的过程中，体味到轻松和成功的快乐，而不是无尽的担忧和恐惧。

二、全期教学总目标

学生应有较明确的英语学习动机和积极主动的学习态度。能听懂教师对有关熟悉话题的陈述并能参与讨论。能读供七至八年级学生阅读的简单读物和报纸杂志，克服生词障碍，理解大意。能根据阅读目的运用适当的阅读策略。能与他人合作，解决问题并报告结果，共同完成学习任务。能在学习中互相帮助，克服困难。能合理计划和安排学习任务，积极探索适合自己的学习方法。在学习和日常交际中能注意到中外文化的差异。

三.教材简要分析

《新课标英语》(冀教版)八年级(下册)，全书共有八个单元。本教材各单元话题灵活，贴近生活实际。本册书将学习的一些语法知识点有：一般将来时、过去进行时、现在完成时、间接引语、时间状语从句、条件状语从句、反意疑问句等。同时每个单元后都提供了一篇阅读文章，用以训练学生的阅读能力，扩大学生的阅读量。

四、学情简要分析

初二年级

5、6班，共有学生人数 人，其中男生人，女生人。通过初一年半的英语学习，大多数学生已能听懂有关熟悉话题的语段和简短的故事。能与教师或同学就熟悉的话题交换信息。能读懂短篇故事，能写便条和简单的书信。但由于各种因素的影响，学生发展参差不齐。有少数学生因为基础不够好，学习很吃力而自暴自弃，有的因此扰乱课堂次序，这给教学带来不少困难。

五、提高教学质量可行措施及教改措施：

(一)、面向全体学生，注重素质教育。

(二)、以学生为主体，尊重学生个体差异。

(三)、采用活动途径，倡导体验与参与。

(四)、开发课程资源，拓展学用渠道。

具体来说：

1.认真专研教材和课标，精心备课，认真上好每一堂课。确定每堂课的基础内容，预备内容和拓展内容，满足不同层次学生的不同需求。

2.充分利用现有的现代化教学设备，加强直观教学，提高课堂效率。

3.多与学生沟通，了解学生学习状况和需求，及时改进教学中存在的问题和不足。

4.积极开展丰富多彩的英语活动，提高学生兴趣。如英语演讲比赛、单词听写比赛、朗读 比赛、英语手抄报比赛、学唱英文歌曲，课前五分钟活动等。

5.注重个别辅导，在面向全体学生的基础上，培优补差。

6.不断学习，加强自身素质和业务能力的提高。

对于学生具体要求：

1. 每天背诵课文中的对话。目的：要求学生背诵并默写，培养语感。

2. 每天记5个生词，2个常用句子或习语。实施：利用“互测及教师抽查”及时检查，保证效果并坚持下去。

3. 认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

4.坚持日测、周测、月测的形成性评价制度：对英语学习实行量化制度，每日、每周、每月都要给学生检验自己努力成果的机会，让进步的同学体会到成就感，让落后的同学找出差距，感受压力。由此在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

5. 对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自 信，尽快成长起来。

6. 关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7. 实施"任务型"的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力

8.在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

#277307

人教版八年级英语课件 篇7

U1.fix one’s attention/ eyes on集中注意力于

3.at first sight; lose one’s sight; at the sight of ;catch sight of;

out of one’s sight/beyond one’s sight/ in one’s sight

景色，景象（可数，常用复数）The sunrise is a beautiful sight.

4. have an appetite for (knowledge) 求知欲

7.on purpose故意地; for the purpose of 为了…的目的

9. supply sth to/for sb; supply sb with sth

provide sth for sb; provide sb with sth

10.look out! = watch out!

11.be involved in (trouble) 卷入,忙于

12. the private/ state enterprise (私营/国营)企业

a spirit of enterprise 进取精神, 事业心

13. abandoned practice抛弃了的，废弃了的做法

14.a large amount of/ amounts of +u.n

15.experiment with/ on (animals)用…做实验

16.You deserve punishment/ punishing/ to be punished.

18.be designed to do / for sth/sb专为…设计的，打算

19.在脑海中出现某种想法A good idea occurred to me.

It occurred to me that…

22.lead a cosy life; a cosy little house

人教版八年级英语课件 篇8

《三峡》是人教版语文教材八年级（上）第六单元的第一篇文章。八年级上册一共安排了两个文言单元。基本上是篇幅短小，内容浅显的古代散文和诗歌。旨在通过对它们的学习，让学生逐步接触、了解我国古代的优秀文化，引起学生学习古代散文和诗歌的兴趣；让学生感受到古代文学作品的美。本文在第二个文言单元，是北魏郦道元《水经注》中关于三峡的一段注释，同时也是一篇很好的写景散文。课文通过对三峡的山水和一年四季三峡景色的描写，向我们展现了三峡的美丽风光。文章写景生动，用词精准，有着一种特殊的艺术魅力，尤其是作者的正面侧面、动静相结合的描写手法，更是令人赞叹。

学生通过七年级和八年级上一个单元的学习，已经有了一定的文言词汇的积累，掌握了简单的学习文言文的方法。在利用工具书和课下注释来疏通文意已能很好完成，但八年级学生的特点和知识结构，要赏析文章，尤其是写景散文，还是有一定难度的。对于本节课的学习学生可能遇到的障碍是：在欣赏“语言之美”环节。为了较好的达到教学目的，我通过从赏析内容到写法再到意境，逐步深入，并在“语言之美”环节时举例，学生能够做到举一反三。

1、领会课文内容，体会三峡风光自然美。

2、学习本文抓住特点描写三峡自然景物的方法，学习正面、侧面相结合和动静相结合等描写方法。

3、通过抓住关键词语，体会文章语言的精妙。

1、能在深入学习文本后，概括出各段的景物特点，提高概括能力。

2、通过示例，能举一反三，培养学生分析、欣赏美文的能力；

3、使学生进一步了解讨论、合作活动过程，培养学生共同协作能力；

1、有与他人交流和合作的精神、敢于提出自己不同的见解；

2、逐步领略文本的美妙，激发学生热爱祖国大好河山的感情。

3、多媒体课件和丰富的网上资料，培养学生热爱语文、热爱阅读古代优秀散文的情感。

四、教学重点和难点：

1、教学重点：体会三峡风光自然美。掌握作品景物描写的方法。

多媒体展示三峡的风光图片。

导入：上节课我们走进了《三峡》，疏通了文意，了解了课文内容。现在请大家一起来背诵课文。

一、在大家的背诵中，再一次把我们带入了三峡美景，回顾上节课我们概括的四幅图景，说说作者写出了三峡景物的什么特征，共同来体会文章的内容之美。

学生分组讨论交流，每组负责一个语段，然后选四位同学全班交流。

1、学生明确：第1段重点写山，“两岸连山，略无阙处”，两岸都是连绵的高山，几乎没有中断的地方，突出群山连绵的特点。“重岩叠嶂，隐天蔽日，自非亭午夜分，不见曦月”是说一层层的悬崖，一排排的峭壁，把天空和太阳都遮蔽了，如果不是在正午、半夜的时候，连太阳和月亮都看不见。说明江面狭窄，两岸雄峰相连，峭壁对峙，只看见一线天。突出峰峦重迭，雄峻险拔的山势。突出三峡群山连绵，高耸入云的雄壮美。

教师根据学生讲述板书：

2、学生明确：第2、3、4段写水，描绘不同季节的不同景象。

第2段写夏季三峡情景。“夏水襄陵，沿溯阻绝”是说夏天水涨，江水淹了山陵，上行和下航的船只都被阻绝，不能通航，突出大水猛涨。“或王命急宣，有时朝发白帝，暮到江陵，其间千二百里，虽乘奔御风，不以疾也。”是说有时皇帝的命令要急速传达，才会有航船，只要清早坐船从白帝城出发，傍晚便可到江陵。中间相距一千二百里，即使骑着骏马，驾着疾风，也不如它快。以船行之快突出江流湍急的特点。突出江水浩荡、日行千里的奔放美

教师根据学生讲述板书：

3、学生明确：第3段写三峡春冬之景。“素湍绿潭，回清倒影”是说在春冬两个季节，雪白的急流，回旋着清波；碧绿的深潭，倒映着各种景物的影子。波光粼粼，景物重重，一派秀丽风光。“绝 多生怪柏，悬泉瀑布，飞漱其间”是说在极高的山峰上，生长着许多奇形怪状的柏树，在山峰之间，常有悬泉瀑布飞流冲荡，山静、泉飞、柏怪、水奇，构成一幅挺拔超脱的画面。“清荣峻茂，良多趣味”，水清，树荣，山高，草盛，趣味无穷。用极为精练的四个字状写四种景物，总结全段，突出春冬之时三峡秀美、挺拔的清幽美。

教师根据学生讲述，板书：

4．学生明确：第4段写三峡秋景。“每至清初霜旦，林寒涧肃”是说每到初晴的时候或下霜的早晨，树林和山涧显出一片清凉和寂静，充满凄清肃杀的气氛。“常有高猿长啸，属引凄异，空谷传响，哀转久绝”是说高处的猿猴拉长声音鸣叫，声音连续不断，非常凄凉怪异。空旷的山谷传来猿啼的回声，悲哀婉转，很久很久才消失。写秋峡以代表性事物猿来表现，山猿哀鸣，渲染了秋天的萧瑟气氛。感受秋峡萧瑟冷清的凄婉美。

教师根据学生讲述板书：

二、三峡如此的险峻峭拔，全文仅150多字，可谓精致短小，然而作者竟在这极短的篇幅之内，浓缩了万千气象，展现了无限风光，可谓内容丰富，笔力雄健。下面我们就来欣赏作者的笔法之美吧。

描绘景物的方法很多，可从正面描写、侧面烘托；可从动、静方面写；可从声、色、形、味方面写；可从视、听、嗅、味、触方面写；还可从高、低、远、近方面写。请以第一、三段为例，分析作者是从哪些方面来写三峡的？

学生思考后，请同学说说：

1、正面写山“连”的特点，粗笔勾勒，轮廓分明。“隐天蔽日”，山隐于天空，遮住太阳，侧面烘托山“高”。正面描写和侧面烘托相结合，写出了山高岭连的特点。

2、既有俯察近物，又有仰观远景。“素湍绿潭，回清倒影”属俯视江中所见，动静相杂，色彩各异，相映成趣。“绝 多生怪柏，悬泉瀑布，飞漱其间”属仰观远景，以“绝”状山，以“怪”写柏，绘形写貌，形神兼备。“怪柏”显示着旺盛的生命力和坚强的意志，给山水之间注入一股生命的活力，使人顿觉生意盎然。

三、本文的作者郦道元是地理学家。一位地理学家却用文学的语言，独特的视角，把三峡描绘的如此出神入化，其用词的精妙，实在不能不令人惊叹。那么我们以第三、四段为例，来体会本文语言的精妙吧。

学生讨论后回答：第三段中“素湍绿潭”，一“素”一“绿”，两种色彩、两种情态，动静交织，对比鲜明；“怪柏、悬泉、瀑”，也是有静有动、有声有色，山水树木交汇其中，蔚为奇观。“清荣峻茂”一句话四字写四物，一字一景，字字珠玑，惊人赞叹。“良多趣味”中一“趣”字又掺入了作者的审美意趣，使得诗情画意融为一体。

第四段中“林寒涧肃”，一“寒”一“肃”已经是够凄清的了，“空谷传响”的“高猿长啸”已经够凄异了，然而啼声的“哀转久绝”更让闻者倍感寒意了。而且最后的“巴东三峡巫峡长，猿鸣三声泪沾裳”顿然将这凄寒之境进行升华，它唱出了哀婉的猿声中旅人的悲凉心境，更加烘托出秋景的凄凉。在尽写了山光水色之后将笔触转向“猿”与“人”，从而深化文章意境，这就是作者的妙笔所在。

教师小结并板书：作者在炼字选词、情景韵味方面，实在精妙。所以余秋雨曾在自己的《三峡》中有这样的评价：他还用最省俭的字句刻画过三峡春冬之时的“清荣峻茂”，晴初霜旦的“林寒涧肃”，使后人再难调动描述的词章。

学完本文，你觉得作者的哪些写作技巧值得我们借鉴、学习的？

1、抓住特点描写景物。

2、用不同的描写方法。

《三峡》向我们展示的是一轴三峡四季景色的山水长卷，读来令人神往。作者以凝练生动的笔墨写出了三峡的奇险、清秀，我们仿佛置身于那险拔清幽的三峡盛地。作者的描写手法因时而变，因景而异，显得变化多端，摇曳生姿，同时作者的语言精练美妙且情感也蕴含其中。

夏水图   浩大湍急  奔放美                      热爱

水 ｛  春冬图  清荣峻茂  清幽美  动 静  俯 仰 --趣

深秋图   凄清寂静  凄婉美--凄                同情

通过观看三峡美丽的风光图片，使学生在感受美丽风光的同时激发他们课堂学习的主动性和积极性。

[《三峡》教学设计(人教版八年级上册)]

人教版八年级英语课件 篇9

短语归纳

stay at home待在家里

take the bus乘公共汽车

tomorrow night明天晚上

have a class party进行班级聚会

half the class一半的同学

make some food做些食物

order food订购食物

have a class meeting开班会

at the party在聚会上

potatochips炸土豆片，炸薯条

in the end最后

make mistakes犯错误

go to the party去参加聚会

have a great/good 玩得开心

give sb.some advice给某人提一些建议

go to college上大学

make(a lot of)money赚(许多)钱

travel aroundthe world环游世界

work hard努力工作

a soccer player一名足球运动员

keep…to oneself保守秘密

talk with sb.与某人交谈

in life 在生活中

be angry at/about sth.因某事生气

be angry with sb.生某人的气

in the future在将来

run away逃避;逃跑

the first step第一步

in half分成两半

solve a problem解决问题

school clean-up学校大扫除

ask sb.to do sth.要求某人做某事

give sb.sth.给某人某物

tell sb.to do sth.告诉某人做某事

too…to do sth.太……而不能做某事

be afraid to do sth.害怕做某事

advise sb.to do sth.劝告某人做某事

It’s best (not) to do sth.最好(不)做某事

need to do sth.需要做某事

语法讲解

由 if 引导的条件状语从句 (主将从现)

if 用做连词时，可以表示“如果;假如”，用来引导一个条件状语从句。如：

I will go if he asks me.

If you eat bad food, you may be ill.

注意：在主句和条件状语从句中的动词都表示将来的动作时，主句中常用一般将来时，含有情态动词的句子或祈使句，也可以是谓语含有want, hope,wish等动词的句子，但从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。如：

We will come to see you if we have time.

You won’t be able to pass the exam if you don’t work hard.

I hope to visit her if I am free.

1、I

分析：

be going to do sth.将要、打算做某事。如：

I am going to do some shopping with my mother.

辨析：be going to and will.

be going to and will 两者都可以表示将来，其区别如下：

be going to 常用于事先经过的打算、计划或意图，也可用于根据某种迹象将要发生的动作。如：

Why are you taking down all the pictures?

I am going to repaint the wall.

L ook at the dark clouds in the sky.I t ’ s going to rain.

will 常用于不受人的主观意愿影响的单纯将来，也可用于条件状语从句中，还可以表趋向或习惯的动作。如：

Tomorrow will be Teacher ’ s Day.

I f it doesn ’ t rain tomorrow, we will go to the zoo.

W e will die without air or water.

2、Half

分析：

① half, adj and n.一半(的)。 h alf 常用于名词或修饰名词的冠词前面，即half a/an/the/one ’ s +n.还可以用于a half +n.这中结构。如：

P lease cut the cake into halves.

T he little boy drank half a bottle of water.== the little boy drank a halfbottle of water.

H alf of the children are from Chinese .

注意：half 短语作主语时，谓语动词与half后的名词保持一致

短语归纳

on Saturdayafternoon在周六下午

prepare for为……做准备

go to the doctor去看医生

have the flu患感冒

help my parents帮助我的父母

come to the party来参加聚会

another time其他时间

last fall去年秋天

go to the party去聚会

hang out常去某处;泡在某处

the day after tomorrow后天

the day before yesterday前天

have a pianolesson上钢琴课

look after照看;照顾

accept an invitaton接受邀请

turn down aninvitation拒绝邀请

take a trip去旅行

at the end of this month这个月末

look forward to盼望;期待

the opening of… ……的开幕式/落成典礼

reply in writing书面回复

go to the concert去听音乐会

not…until直到……才

meet my friend会见我的朋友

visit grandparents拜访祖父母

study for a test为考试学习

have to不得不

too much homework太多作业

do homework做家庭作业

go to the movies去看电影

after school放学后

on the weekend在周末

invite sb.to do sth.邀请某人做某事

what引导的感叹句结构：What+a/an+adj.+可数名词单数(+主语+谓语)!

What+adj.+名词复数/不可数名词(+主语+谓语)!

help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事

be sad to do sth.做某事很悲伤

see sb.do sth.see sb.doingsth.

the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方式

have a surprise party for sb.为某人举办一个惊喜派对

look forward to doing sth.期盼做某事

reply to sth./sb.答复某事/某人

What’s today?今天是什么日子?

What’s the date today? What day is it today?

语法讲解

1、prepare意为“准备”，强调准备的动作与过程。

prepare 强调准备的动作与过程。宾语是这一动作的承受者。其后也可接双宾语，还可接不定式。

get/be ready意为“准备好”，强调准备的结果。常见结构有：①beready(for sth.)②getsth.ready ③beready(for sth)④be get ready to do(准备干某事，乐于干某事)

We _____ the mid-term examination.Miss Li said, “Everyone should______beforeclass.

2.have

3.hang

4.catch

catch up with =keep up with 赶上，跟上 ,catch hold of=take hold of 抓住

5.accept

(1) turn down = refuse 拒绝 turn up 放大调高 turn over 翻身 take turns 依次，轮流

(2) help sb.(to) do sth 帮助某人做某事 helpsb.with sth 在某方面帮助人 help oneself tosth 随便吃

(3)at the end of 在…末尾，在…尽头， bythe end of 到…末为止 in the end of 终于

6.surprised

surprising 形容词，令人惊讶的，主语是物 Thenews was surpring.surprise 名词，惊奇、惊讶 to one’ssurprise使某人吃惊，动词，使惊奇，使感到意外 It surprise sb to do sth.

7.look

hear from sb.收到某人的来信 = receive a letter from sb.

hear of = hear about 听说

8.make

商量确定的时间，表示将来某项计划的安排，后接时间状语。 Let’s make it at seven o’clock on Tuesday.

成功办成某事 = succeed After yearsof hard work, he finally made it.

9.reply

作及物动词，意为回答，回答说。作名词，意为：答道，回信，答复，后跟介词 to .

answer 是最普通的用语，包括口头，书面或行动的回答，可作及物和不及物动词。

短语归纳

milk shake奶昔

turn on接通(电流、煤气、水等);打开

pour…into…把……倒入……

a cup of yogurt一杯酸奶

a good idea好主意

on Saturday在星期六

cut up切碎

put…into…把……放入……

one more thing还有一件事

a piece of一片/张/段/首……

at this time在这时

a few一些;几个

fill… with…用……把……装满

cover…with…用……覆盖……

one by one一个接一个;逐个;依次

a long time很长时间

how many+可数名词复数 多少……

how much+不可数名词 多少……

It’s time (for sb.)+to do sth.到(某人)做某事的时间了

First…Next…Then…Finally 首先……接下来……然后…….最后……

want + to do sth.想要做某事

forget+to do sth.忘记去做某事

how + to do sth.如何做某事

need+to do sth.需要做某事

make+宾语+形容词 使……怎样

let sb.+do sth.让某人做某事

短语归纳

1.on

6.in

8.play

10space station太空站 puter programmer电脑编程员

12.look

14thesame…as…与……一样 15.getbored感到厌烦的

16.over

18.will+动词原形

19.fewer/more+可数名词复数

20.less/more+不可数名词

21.have

22.agree

23.such+名词(词组)

24.play

25.There

26.There

27.make

28.try

29.It’s+

短语归纳

1.grow

3.be

5.send…to…把……送到……

7.the

9.different

11.have

12.ta

13.too…to…太……而不能……

14.be

15.practice

16.keep

17.learn

18.finishdoing

mise

20.help

21.remember

22.agree

24.want

人教版八年级英语课件 篇10

Teaching Procedures

Pre-task

A. Greetings

Hello, everyone. I’m an English teacher from No. 4 Middle School. My name is Han Guili. You can call me Miss Han. Today I’m going to be your English teacher. We are going to learn Unit 10 Section B together. Now let’s begin our class. Stand up, please. Good morning, class. How are you today? I’m OK. Thank you. Sit down, please.

B. Explain “resolution” by listening to a song.

We all know New Year is coming. Today I have a gift for all of you.Do you like music? Great. Let’s enjoy it together. If you can sing it, you can follow it.(在听歌时教师板书课题Unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player. Section B )

Do you like the gift ? I’m happy to hear that . I’m going to learn it next year and then I’m going to sing it for you. Do you like listening to me? This is my New Year’s resolution. “resolution” Are you clear? Follow me ,please. “resolution” From group 1to 6. “New Year’s Resolutions” From group 1to 6.(同时板书resolution New Year’s Resolutions)

（设计意图：通过新年礼物--周杰伦的歌曲“稻香”引出主题。歌曲具有时代气息，内容激励学生心存梦想并努力去实现它。）

Now let’s look at some New Year’s Resolutions. What are the meanings of the resolutions.

Discuss in groups. First translate and then read them. The others follow him or her.Go! Are you ready? Volunteer. （叫几名学生回答，学生领读时教师写板书instrument最后教师领读生词instrument）Now we have known the meanings of the resolutions. Please match the pictures with the resolutions. Answer it together. Let’s check the answer.

（设计意图：通过讨论翻译短语并由学生领读。这一环节可以培养学生们的自学能力和小组探究能力。同时也能提高学生的自信心。通过图片与短语的搭配有助于学生对短语的理解和记忆。）

C. Now let’s guess some famous people’s resolutions. Look! Who is it? What’s his resolution? Guess.（几名学生回答）Are they right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, they are right. Who can right it on the blackboard. Volunteer. (学生写板书时教师问)What is he going to do ? Answer it together.（这一步骤共五幅图片采用相同的方式训练学生）

（设计意图：这一环节趣味性强，对学生有吸引力。通过对名人决心的猜测，一方面增强了学生的好奇心和求知欲；另一方面也巩固了所学知识。同时也练习了对第三人称一般将来时的提问与回答。）

While-task

A. Now let’s use the resolutions to make conversations in pairs. For example, (Ask one student)What are you going to be when you grow up? What are you going to do next year ? Sounds interesting. I’m going to learn a foreign language.Are you clear? Go! Are you ready? The more pairs the better in a group. Volunteer. The last pair. Which group has the most pairs?（给获胜组贴一个笑脸） Come on boys and girls . Let’s learn from them.

（设计意图：通过这一对话练习，使学生能更熟练的掌握一般将来时的问与答，而且对话内容贴近实际生活。给获胜组贴一个笑脸，既鼓励了获胜组又激励了其他组。）

B. Let’s use the resolutions to make up a play. Look at some festivals here. Please choose one of them and then make up a play in groups.The group leader should say your choice. Go! Ready? Volunter. Which group is the best? I think you are all great.（给每一组贴一个笑脸）

（设计意图：小组合作编剧并表演出来。给每个学生展示的机会，使学生真正成为课堂的主体。给每组一个笑脸，既是对他们积极参与的表扬，又是对他们成绩的肯定。）

Let’s do some listening practice.Activity 2a. Let’s answer it together.Are you right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, you are great. Activity 2b. How are they going to do it ? Who can answer it? （叫几名学生回答）Are they right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, they are right. Who is right? Put up your hands. OK. Put down your hands. If you are not good at listening, please practice it after class.

（设计意图：通过听力练习可以考察学生对所学短语和句型的理解。2a听力部分较简单，适合总体检查。2b听力部分较难，可对学生答案进行抽查，再总体核对并进一步说明。）

Post-task

A. Now let’s have a PK in groups .Ask and answer one by one like this .(Ask one student )What are you going to do next year? This student answer it and ask the next one and go on .The fastest group is the winner. Go! Ready?Which group wants to be the first one? （用记时器为每一组记时）Which group is the fastest ?（给获胜组一个笑脸）Let’s learn from them.

（设计意图：这一活动可以锻炼学生的口语表达能力和提高说的流利程度，并增强集体合作意识和荣誉感。有竞争有趣味，学生都乐于参与。）

B. Discuss in groups. How to improve your English in the new year? The group leaders write down your answers and then report it for us.Go!Ready? Volunteer.（每组组长到前面来报告）

Great! I hope your resolutions can come true in the new year. A good plan is a good start to success. And where there is a will , there is a way. Let’s work hard togther, and get good grades. Come on , boys and girls.

（设计意图：通过对怎样提高英语的讨论，同学们之间都了解了各自的决心，并为之而努力。最后教师用恰当的谚语来鼓励学生并对学生进行情感教育。）

C. Sum up . What have you learned today?（先由学生总结最后教师总结）

（设计意图：锻炼学生的总结能力。）

D. Homework :Clean and Green

Imagine you work for your city . It’s your-job to make it cleaner. What are you going to do ? Think of a six-point plan.

（设计意图：使学生会运用所学知识。）

Unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player.

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Students learn to talk about future intentions.

Ⅱ.Teaching key and difficult points:

A.Vocabulary

puter programmer, professional, engineer, pilot

puter science, dream job, grow up, move to, fashion show, retire, save

3.resolution, get good grades, get a part-time job, make more friends

B.Target language

1. What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.This unit is divided into five periods.

Period 1 Listen and speak

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Students learn to talk about future intentions.

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

fessional, acting, take lessons, every day

puter programmer, engineer, baseball player, pilot, actor, actress, artist

B. Target language

1.What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

2.How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Warming up

Task 1 Ask students to think about ways they already know to talk about future events. For example:

☆Where are you going next week?

I’m going to my grandmother’s house next week.

☆How long are you staying?

I’m staying for a week.

☆What are you doing on Saturday?

I’m playing tennis all day.

Task 2 Circle the –ing in each sentence. Say, We use ing words to talk about things that are going to happen in future. We are sure these things will happen.

Step 2 Key vocabulary

Task 1 Read each words to the class. Ask the students to point to the jobs that appear in the picture.

Task 2 Read the instructions and say, put a 1 after the most interesting job, put a 2 after the second most interesting job, and so on.

Task 3 Check to say which things are the most interesting in the class. Ask students to write the six jobs on the blackboard. Ask: How many students made engineer number 1?

Step 3 Target language

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Learn the target language:

What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

Task 2 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to draw lines connecting the jobs and the activities.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 4 Pair work

Task 1 Ask students to look at the pictures in activity 1a. Then ask students to read the sample conversations in activity 1c.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs and make their own conversations.

Task 4 Ask some pairs to present one or more of their conversations to the class.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Remember the vocabulary and the target language.

2.Review the simple future tense.

Period 2 Listen , speak and Grammar Focus

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

1. Revise the target language, and complete the listening practice;

2. Learn Grammar Focus.

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

take acting lessons, move

B. Target language

1.What are you going to be when you grow up?

I'm going to be an actor.

2.How are you going to do that?

I'm going to take acting lessons.

C.Structures

Future with going to

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Task 1 Ask questions beginning with “What are you going to be when…” “How are you going to do…

Task 2 Practice the conversations using the target language students have already studied.

Step 2 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Ask some students to say what they say.

Task 3 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 4 Play again. Ask students to check the pictures of the things Cheng Han is going to do.

Task 5 Check the answers.

Step 3 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions and point out the sample answer.

Task 2 Ask a student to read the sample questions and sample answers to the class.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to fill the chart.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 4 Pair work

Task 1 Read the instructions for the activity.

Task 2 Ask students to read the dialogue to the class.

Task 3 Ask students to work in pairs, ask and answer,

Task 4 Check the answers by asking different pairs to do one question and answer each.

Step 5 Grammar Focus

Task 1 Read Grammar Focus

Task 2.Explain the two different ways of saying the same things.

I'm going to take acting lessons.

﹦ I'm taking acting lessons.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Revise the target language.

2.Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 3 Read and speak

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

1 Revise the target language, and complete the reading practice;

2 Go on learning the simple future tense: be going to

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

Somewhere, Paris, sound like, fashion show, part-time, save, at the same time, hold, rich, retire, yet

B. Target language

1. What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be an actor.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to take acting lessons.

3.Where are you going to work?

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense: be going to

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; Control reading

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Review the simple future tense: be going to.

Step 2 Reading

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Ask students to read the diary on their own, and circle the words and phrases they don’t understand.

Task 3 Ask students to read the words and phrases they don’t understand, ask other students to explain.

Task 4 Ask students to underline the things that Tian Tian is going to do.

Task 5 Correct the answers.

Step 3 Writing and speaking

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Have students write down answers about themselves, and tell their plans to their partner.

Task 3 Ask students to answer these questions. Have them work in pairs to ask and answer, then change the roles.

What …? Where…?How…?

Task 4 Ask some students to say their dialogues to the class .

Step 4 Group work

Task 1 Read the instructions and point to the picture. Write the year on the blackboard. Ask the class why that is an important date for Beijing and China.

Task 2 Write going to on the board. Ask :What are you going to do to help make the Olympics a success?

Task 3 Divide the class into groups of four or five students. Ask them to make their own conversations.

Task 4Ask each group to present its conversation to the class .

Ⅵ Homework

1 Revise the target language.

2 Revise the simple future tense: be going to.

3 Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 4 Section B

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Learn some new language, and complete the listening practice;

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. New language

fax, few, food, resolution, grade, healthier, instrument, part-time job, harder, learn, letter, lots of, resolutions, money, New Year, next year, make the soccer team

B. Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

C. Grammar

The simple future tense: be going to

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Discussion

Get the students discussion the New Year’s resolutions in group of four by asking the questions like the following:

What are you going to do next year?

Why are you going to do so?... ..

Step 2 New words

Task 1 Ask students to tell when New Year’s Day is. Ask students what they do on New Year’s Eve.

Task 2 Ask students to explain the resolutions in their own words.

Task 3 Ask students to match the phrases and pictures on their own.

Step 3 Pair work

Task 1 Read the instructions and read the conversations to the class.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs to discuss what things they are going to do.

Task 3 Ask several pairs to present their conversations to the class.

Step 4 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions and the phrases in activity 1a.

Task 2 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to circle the resolutions in activity 1a that they hear.

Task 5 Check the answers.

Step 5 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Play again. Ask students to fill the chart.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 6 Group work

Task 1 Read the instructions for the activity. And read the sample conversations.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs.

Task 4 Ask some students to present their dialogues to the class.

Ⅵ Homework

1 Revise the target language.

2 Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 5 Self check

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Revise the content taught and complete the writing practice;

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

Writing practice

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Communicative Approach; Control reading and writing

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Review the simple future: be going to.

Step 2 Reading

Task 1 Read the magazine article to the class.

Task 2 Read the instructions to the class.

Task 3 Ask students to finish the activity on their own.

Task 4 Ask students to make a list of the New Year’s resolutions that the article mentions.

Step 3 Reading and Writing

Task 1 Read the instructions to the class.

Task 2 Have students writing a magazine article.

Task 3 Ask students to read their articles to the class.

Step 4 Writing

Task 1 Ask students to make a list of their resolutions.

Task 2 Ask students to write about their resolutions using the language learned in this unit.

Task 3 Ask some students to read their resolutions.

Step 5 Group work: Clean and Green

Task 1 Ask a student to read the instructions and the example answer for the class.

Task 2 Ask Ss to work in groups and write the group plans.

Step 6 Self check

Task 1 Fill in the blanks.

Task 2 Write a list about your plans what the American exchange students and you are going to do.

Task 3 Just for fun: read and act out.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Finish the writing practice.

2.Revise the words and target language of this unit.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇11

一．教材分析：

本单元是七年级下册第三单元的教学内容，是以How do you get to school?为中心话题。围绕交通方式展开，谈论某人如何到达某地，路程有多远，需要花多长时间。第一课时学生需要掌握基本三个句型，即How do you get to school?（How does …get to school?） How long does it take ？How far is it from … to …? 和交通方式的两种表达形式，即take the/a…to…与 go…by …，这与学生的日常生活密切相关，学生熟悉，乐于学习，易于学习。

二．学情分析：

七年级的学生在六年级学过交通方式的表达及一般现在时的三单形式，相当一部分知识对学生而言是知识再现，但学生的基础参差不齐。需要引导学生课前预习单词，复习交通方式的表达，为完成本节课的教学任务做好准备。

(1)掌握重要的词汇短语：train, bus, subway, bike, take the subway/train/bus, ride a/the bike, by train/bus/subway.

(2)学会谈论如何到达某地的交通方式，路程即需要的时间。

掌握基本的句型,

How do you get to school? I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …? He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

2. 语言技能目标：

（1）能根据录音判断交通方式。

（2）能以不同的人称询问他人到达某地的方式，距离，需要花费的时间。

（3）能简单地描述自己上学的方式，距离及需要花费的时间。

（4）能简单地描述自己上学的方式，距离及需要花费的时间。

3.情感态度目标：

通过完成各项交际任务，让学生养成良好的学习习惯，包括听讲，与他人合作学习，相互帮助。让学生积累学习经验，能够大胆地有条理地发表个人的观点。

How do you get to school? I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …? He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

2.设置各项小任务，让学生体验成功。适时评价激励学生。

3.通过运用多媒体课件，给学生创造良好的语境，让学生有话可说。

1. Greeting.

2. Freetalk: How do you go to school? (using two ways)

I go to school by…or I take the/a…to school.

students the pictures and practice.

How do you get to school? I take the bus to school or I get to school by bus.

How do you get to school? I take the bus to school or I get to school by bus.

How does she get to school? She takes the train to school or She gets to school by train.

I get to school by …

3,Summary.

Step3. 1a. Match the words with the pictures.

Step4. Listen to the tape, finish 1b.

Step5. Presentation.

1. Read the numbers.

2.Listen and write the numbers.

3.Introduce new drills: How long does it take? It takes …

Step6. Practice.

1.How long does it take? It takes …

2. A: How do you get to school?

B: I take the …to school.

A:How long does it take ？

B: It takes about…minutes.

3. Pair work.

Step7. Presentation.

New drills : How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

Step8. Practice.

(1) A: How far is it from … to …?

B: It’s about …kilometers.

(2)A: How do you get to school?

A: How long does it take?

B: It takes about forty minutes.

A: How far is it from your home to the park?

B: It’s about 5 kilometers.

Step9. Listen to the tape, finish 2b.

Step10. Pair work.

Translate and write them down.

1，你怎么去学校呢？How do you get to school?,

2，我经常步行，但有时候坐公共汽车。

I usually walk but sometimes I take a bus.

3，要用多长时间呢？How long does it take?

4，步行大约25分钟，坐公共汽车十分钟。

It takes about 25 minutes to walk and 10 minutes by bus.

1. --通常你怎样去上学。

我通常骑车去上学。

_____ ___ you usually go to school?

I usually go to school _____ ______.

2. 地铁站离汽车站大约有300米远。

The subway station is _______ 300_______ _____ ______ the bus stop.

3. 他通常每天用一小时做作业。

It usually ___________half an hour _____ _____his homework every day.

Key words：

train, bus, subway, bike, take the subway/train/bus,

ride a/the bike, by train/bus/subway.

Target languages：

How do you get to school?

I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …?

He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇12

Textbook：Go for it!(2B) Teacher:Zheng Jinshen

Content：Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived ?

Analysis of the Teaching Material：

The topic of this unit is about interesting events. It deals with something interesting about the UFO and aliens , so it can arouse the students’ special attention easily . In this unit , students will learn to talk about the past events and tell a story with the Simple Past Continuous Tense , so it is very important to grasp the structures and usages of these two tenses. Students will also learn the Adverbial Clause led by when and while , and mastering their differences is very important . In the Reading , students will know something about some important and interesting events which happened in the history . They will be taught to be good at looking back the days in the past and cherish the good time at present by recalling and describing the past events .

Teaching Aims：

1、Knowledge and skills

In this unit students learn to talk about past events and tell a story ; learn and master the ways to express the Adverbial Clause led by when/while ; learn and understand the differences between the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense. Improve their abilities of listening , speaking , reading and writing ; improve their abilities of communication and integrating skills .

2、Processes and methods

With the studying strategies of Using context and Role playing , get the students to do pairwork to learn to talk about past events and tells a story by using the teaching courseware , pictures , flashcards or objects . At the same time , enable the students to tell a story and master the use of the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense by writing sentences according to the pictures , drilling sentence patterns, describing real events and role playing conversations .

3、Emotion , attitudes and value

The content of this unit is close to the students’ life and the topic is about talking about past events and telling a story , so it can arouse the students’ special attention easily and inspire the students’ enthusiasm and exert their potential. At the same time , get the students to look back the days in the past and cherish the good time at present by recalling and describing the past events , enable the students to cooperate with others , help each other and complete the tasks together by going all kinds of activities .

Difficulties and Focuses:

1、Learn to talk about the past events and tell a story with the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tenes;

2、Learn the Adverbial Clause led by when/while；

3、Tell the differences between the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense ;

4、Train students to use the target language correctly in speaking and writing.

Teaching Periods: 6 periods

The first period: Section A la-1c and Section A 2c

The second period: Section A 2a-2b 含 Grammar Focus and SectionA 4 Section B 4 b

The third period: SectionA 3a-3b and Section B 1 and Self check 2-3

The fourth period: Section B 2a-2c and Self check 1 含 Just for Fun!

The fifth period: SectionB 3-4a and Reading Section 1

The sixth period: Reading Section2-4

Teaching Plans

The First Period

Teaching content: Section A la-1c and Section A 2c

Teaching objectives: Talk about the past events

Target language:

Words: UFO barber barber shop bathroom bedroom kitchen get out take off while land alien

Sentences：

What were you doing when the teacher came in?

I was talking/reading/looking out of the window.

What was he doing when the UFO arrived/took off？

He was sleeping when it arrived.

He was riding his bike when it took off.

Language skills:

a、To get the information from the pictures and listening materials, and quickly deal with the information.

b、To learn the structures and the usage of the Past Continuous Tense by answering the reporter’s questions.

c、To get the Ss to learn how to express the statements with the Past Continuous Tense.

Self-learning ability:

To learn how to express the Past Continuous Tense.

Teaching methods

Task-based Language Teaching

Teaching by listening and practicing

Teaching aids: small pictures, a small blackboard and a recorder

Teaching procedures:

Step l. Leading in

1.1 Greetings and duty report.

(Organize the beginning of this class and have a student on duty to report.)

1.2 Ask and answer.

T: What were you doing when I came in?

S1:….

(Help the student to answer the question and then write the answer on the Bb.)

T:What about you?

S2:….

T:And you?

S3:….

(Ask the same question and have the Ss answer it. Of course the answers are various .While the students answer the question , write the real answers on the Bb.)

1.3 Look and learn.

Show some pictures and introduce the UFO and aliens , teaching new words UFO and alien. After that ask the Ss if they have heard of the UFOs.

(Get the Ss to look at the picture and tell them that the UFO is a strange object that some people think they have seen in the sky and that may come from another planet. The UFO is short for“unidentified flying object”. As for alien , it is a person or an animal that comes from another planet in space. )

1.4 Have the Ss read a passage about the UFO ,showing a small blackboard.

Step 2.Look and match (Section A 1a )

2.1 Show another picture and talk about it with the Ss.

T: What can you see in the picture?

S1:….

T: Can you see the UFO?

S2:….

T: Who is in the UFO?

S3:….

T: What else can you see? etc

S4:….

2.2 Books open at page 18. Look through the picture in activity la.

(Discuss the picture with the Ss .Point out the experience of each person when the UFO arrived , teaching new words.)

2.3 Match the statements with the people in the picture.

Step 3. Listen and circle (Section A 1b)

3.1 Read the instruction to the class .(Writing the title of this unit on the Bb.)

3.2 Talk about the people’s actions in the picture.

T: What was A doing when the UFO arrived?

S1: He was standing in front of the library.

T: What was B doing when the UFO arrived?

S2: He was sleeping in his bedroom.

……

(Help the Ss answer the questions. Pay attention to the structure and the usage of the Past Continuous Tense , writing the structure on the Bb.)

3.3 Listen to the reporter’s questions and circle the correct responses.

(Play the recording the first time .Students only listen. For a second time , ask the Ss to circle the correct phrases.)

3.4 Books open at page 88. Listen and repeat the conversation.

Step 4 . Practice (Section A 1c)

4.1 Ask and answer in pairs.

eg T: What was D doing when the UFO arrived?

Ss: He was getting out of the shower.

Have the Ss do like this.

4.2 Ask and answer according to the real actions.

T: What were you doing when they talked?

S1: I was listening to them.

T: What was A doing when B answered my question?

S2: He was looking out of the window. etc

4.3 Make a survey.

Get the students to do pairwork like activity 1c to talk about :What were you doing when they talked?

(As the Ss talk , move around the room and check their work .Offer language assistance as needed.)

Step5 Grammar Focus (Section A 2c)

5.1 Talk about the picture in activity 2c .Ask Ss to say what each person is doing.

5.2 Ask and answer.

eg. What was the girl doing when the UFO took off?

She was walking down the street.

5.3 Present two more ways of saying.

The girl was walking down the street when the UFO took off .

(a) When the UFO took off , the girl was walking down the street.

(b) While the girl was walking down the street , the UFO took off.

5.4 Point out the Adverbial Clause led by when/ while.

5.5 Ask the Ss to work in small groups like the sample dialogue in activity 2c.

(Move around the room checking the progress of the groups and offering assistance as needed)

Step6. Homework

Make some sentences including the Past Continuouse Tense and when or while.

Writing on the Bb

Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived?

What were you doing when I came in? UFO alien bathroom kitchen

I was doing my homework/reading/resting. get out of the shower cut hair take off /land

What was A doing when the UFO arrived? be (was/were)+V.ing

He was standing in front of the library.

The girl was walking down the street when the UFO took off.

(a)When the UFO took off ,the girl was walking down the street.

(b)While the girl was walking down the street, the UFO took off.

Teaching Backthoughts

本单元的教学目标有三个，谈论过去发生的事情，其一；学会讲故事，其二；热爱科学、探索科学，其三。作为本单元的第一课时，教学内容直截了当地点击本单元的教学目标，特别是引入过去进行时这种新时态，结合When和While的使用，在谈论过去发生的事或讲故事时，得体地使用这种新时态，重点表达在过去一时刻或某一段时间内正在进行的动作，适合描述过去某一动作的实际需要。

语法教学，不是老师生硬地灌输，而是启发学生通过大量的语言练习，在运用中让学生自我总结，自我归纳，悟出语言规律，是一种自我习得语言的过程。本节课笔者通过听、说、读、写等方式，设置具体的语境，如询问学生当老师走进教室时在干什么（What were you doing when I came in ?），图文并茂，看图说话（What was A doing when the UFO arrived?），听音选词等等，都是用感知的方式让学生接触过去进行时，通过具体的语言情境，让他们在有意义的交流中感悟语言规则（What were you doing when they talked?），通过实践去领悟，通过观察去总结规则（如比较when与while 的使用），最后指出过去进行时的构成be（was / were ）+V.ing 可以说是画龙点睛之举。

因时间关系，本节课没有很好地把握时机，利用UFO知识对学生进行热爱科学、探索科学的相关教育，在以后的课时必须补充。

附：小黑板阅读材料

Do you know about the UFO?

Today many people enjoy reading stories about the UFO .Many people in different countries are studying the UFO .But what is the UFO?

The UFO is a kind of objects.It seems to fly much faster than the plane on the earth . It often carries visitors coming from other stars.

UFO scientists and many people believed there are UFOs. Some people said they saw some strange visitors coming out of the UFOs. Some even said they were carried away in the UFOs, and then they were sent back by the strange visitors.

Maybe these people made mistakes. Perhaps they saw a weather balloon (气球)or an uncommon plane. Sometimes they saw the light from the ground or the moon.

But there are a lot of things we can’t understand. Now people still can’t understand the UFO clearly. It may take many years to find a clear answer, and then people will give UFO another name.

八年级下册英语课件(合集5篇)

教师在教授新的课程时，通常都会准备教案和课件。在编写教案和课件时，教师需要投入大量精力。在设计教案时，必须考虑学生的文化特点和背景差异。为了给您提供全面的介绍，我介绍" 八年级下册英语课件"，请继续阅读，了解更多相关信息，请持续关注本网站！

八年级下册英语课件 篇1

1 . 青草芦苇和红的白的紫的野花，被高悬在天空的一轮火热的太阳蒸晒着，空气里充满了甜醉的气息。

2 . 人生是美好的，因为我们可以从中悟出很多道理。我的人生，我自己走，我的命运，我自己掌握，我一定会通过自己让我的人生更加精彩，更加美好!

3 . 寒冷的冬天过去了，温暖的春风吹遍了每一个角落，春天装着满袋的音乐种子来到人间。她把种子撒向林间，林间飞着百灵鸟动听的欢歌;她把种子撒向溪流，溪流荡着青蛙呱呱的鸣唱;她把种子撒向草地，草地飘着蟋蟀轻盈的歌唱。

4 . Theypaidfamousartiststopaintpicturesofthemselves，theirhousesandotherpossessions，aswellastheiractivitiesandachievements

5 . 人们的注意力更多地集中在人类本身，而对宗教的注意力减少了

6 . convincesbofsth使某人确信/明白某事

7 . consideritadj/n＋todosth

8 . 春天的阳光格外明媚，春姑娘展开了笑脸，太阳，红红的光束射过来，那温柔地抚摸你，像年轻的母亲的手。

9 . 在这个世界上，无论别人怎么看你，其实并不重要。因为好多时候，你没有必要看别人的脸色生活，那样做只会让你徒增压力。

10 . 人们憎恨那种在共同劳动中不肯出力的行为，却不一定为自己谋私利。

八年级下册英语课件 篇2

1 . 在小麦和黑麦地里，在岸边的芦苇丛中，发出微弱而嘈杂的鸣声。

2 . 沿河两岸连山皆深碧一色，山头常戴了点白雪，河水则清明如玉。在这样一条河水里旅行，望着水光山色，体会水手们在工作上与饮食上的勇敢处，使我在寂寞里不由得不常作微笑!

3 . 古代的人想腾云驾雾，没能实现，只能幻想，而现在我们可以腾云驾雾了。你只要坐上飞机就可以了。

4 . 母亲河长多公里，宽多米。河水是蔚蓝色的，远远望去母亲河就像一张蓝色的地毯。树木非常茂盛。很多喜欢钓鱼的人常常在树阴下垂钓母亲河的中央有一条长长的小桥，桥的俩旁雕刻着各种各样的图案，如：双龙戏珠，神龙摆尾。母亲河两岸有花，有草，还有不同叶的树。

5 . ononehand……ontheotherhand……一方面…另一方面…

6 . 古时候的“顺风耳”，成了现在的电话，它可以让两个相距很远的人很快听到对方的声音。还有手机录音机都是神话中的“顺风耳”。

7 . Artisinfluencedbythewayoflifeandbeliefsofthepeople

8 . abstractsthfromsth从…中提取…

9 . (“我越来越体会到我当初是多么幸运。”

10 . Whatcolourisit?It’sblackandwhite它是什么颜色的?它是黑白相间的。 MyschoolbagisheavyWhat’sinit?我的书包很重。里面有什么？

八年级下册英语课件 篇3

一、教学设计思路

为学生设置情境，帮助学生在不同情况下做出正确的选择和回答，使学生在应用中掌握知识。

二、教学目标

(一)知识

1. 掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Can you come to my party? Yes, I'd love to. / Sorry, I can't. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

2. 掌握如何谈论自己或别人必须做的事情：Ihave to ...

(二)能力

能够根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动。

(三)情感

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。

三、教学重点

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I'd love to. / Sorry, I can't. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

四、教学难点

根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。

五、教学媒体

电脑、投影仪、邀请卡片

六、教学过程

1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：

教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。

2.完成任务，合作学习：

教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的.过程中掌握所学的知识。

任务一：Planning abirthday party.

让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。

任务二：Writing aninvitation card.

学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。

任务三：统计聚会人数。

学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。

group member

Yes / No

reasons

完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：

We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?

When is it going tostart?

I'm sorry. I haveto....

3. 拓展学习：

学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。

七、评价方法

可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。

①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。

②合作学习情况：与小组成员共同努力，很好地完成学习任务。

③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。

八年级下册英语课件 篇4

作为一位无私奉献的人民教师，总不可避免地需要编写说课稿，借助说课稿可以让教学工作更科学化。怎么样才能写出优秀的说课稿呢？以下是小编为大家整理的八年级英语下册第三单元优秀说课稿，欢迎阅读与收藏。

一、教材分析:

本单元是人教版初中英语八年级下册 Unit３，主题是“家务和许可”，其功能项目是“礼貌地请求”和“征求许可”。语言目标是要求学生学会用情态动词could来礼貌地进行请求或者征求他人的许可。本节我要讲的是本单元的Section A的第一节。

二、教学目标:

根据以上我对本单元教材内容的分析，我确定以下教学目标：

知识与能力：学会表示家务的短语；学会用could表示礼貌的请求以及征求许可，并能作出相应的回答。

过程与方法：本课采用问题导入方法，教师提问学生在家中是如何帮助父母的，大部分学生都会回答做家务，由此过渡到关于家务和许可的话题，然后教授与家务相关的短语和表达。多采用对话的形式，让学生练习用could表示礼貌的请求和征求许可，让学生学会灵活运用这一结构来进行表达。

情感、态度与价值观：教会学生在日常生活中礼貌、得体地表达自己的请求和意见。引导学生养成良好的生活习惯和劳动习惯，让学生意识到帮助父母减轻负担的重要性，让学生乐于在生活中多做自己力所能及的事情来帮助父母。

三、教学的重、难点:

基于上述对教材的分析，我确定本节的教学重点为一些动词短语和could表示礼貌的请求和征求许可的用法。

教学难点为could表示礼貌的请求和征求许可的用法。

四、教学方法:

通过形式多样的课堂活动和丰富的.练习，让学生能够轻松地掌握本单元的知识要点，提高英语听说读写的能力。

五、教学过程设计

Unit 3

The First Period (Section A)

Step 1 Lead-in

("良好的开端是成功的一半", 因此，我认为能以一种新颖的问候方式或复习方式进入一节课，就能唤起学生的兴趣，使学生保持一种积极的学习状态，或循序渐进地导入所学的内容，那么可为这节课的成功打下基础。)

T: Do you often help your parents to do some housework at home? What do you usually do ?

学生们纷纷站起来说说自己在家做的事情，过渡到本节的内容。

Step 2 Speaking

教师出示几张做家务的图片，引导学生学习一些有关做家务的动词短语。由1a部分的图片引出本节的目标语言，然后要求学生两两对话多多练习目标语言，达到能脱口而出的目的。

Step 3 Listening

接下来的听力要求学生自主完成1b的内容。通过听来巩固目标语言的用法。

Step4 Tips

帮助学生总结本节的语言结构，同时归纳一下英语中表示请求的句型。并要示学生在小组内合作的形式举出相应的例子，然后板书到黑板上让全班来分享。不妥的地方教师可以学生修正。

Step 5 Practice

要求学生自主完成5个单选题来检测学生的学习情况。先独立完成，再小组讨论，最后全班交流。

Step 7 Summary

回顾本节课所学内容，同时能意识到要在生活中多帮助父母做一些力所能及的事情。

八年级下册英语课件 篇5

难 点： 在多项式与多项式的乘法中适当添括号达到应用公式的目的.

三、合作学习

请同学们完成下列运算并回忆去括号法则.

(1)4+(5+2) (2)4-(5+2) (3)a+(b+c) (4)a-(b-c)

去括号法则：

去括号时，如果括号前是正号，去掉括号后，括号里的每一项都不变号;

如果括号前是负号，去掉括号后，括号里的各项都要变号。

(1)2a-b- =2a-(b- ) (2)m-3n+2a-b=m+(3n+2a-b)

(3)2x-3y+2=-(2x+3y-2) (4)a-2b-4c+5=(a-2b)-(4c+5)

添括号法则：添上一个正括号，扩到括号里的不变号，添上一个负括号，扩到括号里的要变号。

(3)(x+3)2-x2 (4)(x+5)2-(x-2)(x-3)

一、学习目标：让学生了解多项式公因式的意义，初步会用提公因式法分解因式

三、合作学习：

公因式与提公因式法分解因式的概念.

三个矩形的长分别为a、b、c，宽都是m，则这块场地的面积为ma+mb+mc,或m(a+b+c)

由上式可知，把多项式ma+mb+mc写成m与(a+b+c)的乘积的形式，相当于把公因式m从各项中提出来，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的一个因式，把m从多项式ma+mb+mc各项中提出后形成的多项式(a+b+c)，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的另一个因式，这种分解因式的方法叫做提公因式法。

例1、将下列各式分解因式：

(1)3x+6; (2)7x2-21x; (3)8a3b2-12ab3c+abc (4)-24x3-12x2+28x.

例2把下列各式分解因式:

(1)a(x-y)+b(y-x);(2)6(m-n)3-12(n-m)2.

首先找各项系数的____________________，如8和12的公约数是4.

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，如(3)中相同的字母有ab,相同字母的指数取次数最___________的.

1.写出下列多项式各项的公因式.

(1)ma+mb 2)4kx-8ky (3)5y3+20y2 (4)a2b-2ab2+ab

(5)(p-q)2+(q-p)3 (6)3m(x-y)-2(y-x)2

五、小结：

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，相同字母的指数取次数最小的.

2、已知2x-y=1/3 ，xy=2，求2x4y3-x3y4 3、(-2)+(-2)

4、已知a-2b=2，,4-5b=6，求3a(a-2b)2-5(2b-a)3

八年级上册英语课件

我们在闲暇时也会去看一些范文的，闲暇时看一些范文是对自己有好处的，通过阅读范文可以提高我们的表达能力。好的优秀范文更具有参考意义，你会借鉴优秀的优秀范文模板吗？下面的内容是小编为大家整理的八年级上册英语课件，相信您能找到对自己有用的内容。

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

东莞中学英语组

英语科： 谢永青

11月1日（汇总）

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit1 Great Scientist (Reading)

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to familiar with some famous scientists and their contributions.

2. Enable the Ss to learn how to organize a scientific research.

3. Let the Ss learn the reading skill of getting the main idea of each para./ part & each passage .

Difficult points

1. How to grasp the main idea of each paragraph / part & each passage.

2. How to help the Ss use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

1. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

2. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

3. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

4.

Teaching aids

The multi-media (see a short movie about how to treat burn from ppt.)

Teaching procedures

I. Warming up

1. Lead-in 1) Show a picture of AIDS logo to lead in the subject-AIDS ?

Are you familiar with this red ribbon?

What’s it related to? ? What doesn’t it mean? Do you know?

(Possible answer: Red ribbon is related to AIDS. It means that we should give AIDS patients love and care, understand and support.)

2) Show a picture of Pu Cunxin and other stars to show that AIDS is a worldwide problem. ? Do you know them?

What is their job besides acting?

Is it just the problem in China?

(Possible answer: It’s not just the problem in China. It’s a worldwide problem. And besides some famous stars, some ordinary people also work very hard to tell others the harm of this disease.)

2. Brain storming

Q1: While talking about AIDS, what other diseases can you think of? Individual work: Let students brainstorm the names of diseases, such as cold, headache, toothache, diarrhea, cut, coughing, scald, insomnia, heart attack, cancer, AIDS, etc.

(With the development of science and hi-tech, many diseases can be cured. But for now, AIDS is still incurable, so it’s a deadly disease.)

3. How much do you know about AIDS?

1) Pair work-questions for discussion ? What’s the full name of AIDS?

Can AIDS be transmitted? ? In what ways can it be transmitted?

What kinds of people are likely to get AIDS?

Do people with AIDS look healthy at first?

Is it safe or dangerous to stay or to be friends with them? Why? Students don't have to give the exact answers. These questions will help them think about this disease? AIDS.)

2) AIDS QUIZ (individual work)

1) AIDS quiz (p.49)?check students? knowledge about AIDS.

2) Picture quiz ?

Can the AIDS virus transmitted via the following routes?

Summary: Medical studies show that the AIDS virus cannot be transmitted via the following routes: cups, glasses, toilet seats, swimming pools, mosquitoes, other insects or giving blood. So it? safe to be friends with AIDS patients. II. Listening (WB)

1. Pre-listening: Go through EX1&2 in Part1 and guess ?What do the letters HIV and AIDS stand for?

2. While-listening: Listen to the tape and finish exercises in Part1&2. (Make good use of some pictures and a flash ?HIV-cycle? in the PowerPoint)

3. Post-listening: Suppose you are a publicist of AIDS, please give an oral report about it to the whole class.

III. Talking (Optional) Role play:

Work in groups. Imagine that the headmaster of a school has found out that one of the students has H

IV. The student’s family has kept it a secret until now and the headmaster only learnt the truth last week. He had called a meeting to decide what to do. (Opinions can be based on their knowledge of AIDS and also the characteristics of the roles.)

IV. Homework

1. Preview Speaking (p. 50) and find some information about AIDS, drugs, smoking or drinking to support your idea.

2. Learn the new words of this unit by heart.

The Second Period GOALS:

To practice supporting and challenging an opinion.

To practice listening comprehension.

TEACHING PROCEDURES

I. Revision

Do you still remember this logo? What can you learn from it?

Q1: Do you remember what it means?

Q2: In what ways is AIDS transmitted?

II. Speaking

1. Pre-speaking

1) Do you agree that getting AIDS is a personal problem? Why or why not? (Through these questions- ? Raise the idea of social problem and come to Speaking part. ? Introduce the useful expressions of supporting and challenging an opinion on p.50. And throughout the whole class, teachers should try to use these expressions as many as possible to raise students’ awareness.

2) As has just been talked about, AIDS is not only a personal problem, but also a social one. Because when we talk about social problems, we mean crimes such as drug use, murder, theft or robbery and broken families. These social problems cause sadness, unhappiness, harm, fear and even wars in the world or in society. Besides, there are quite a few other social problems. Can you tell some? Can you use your own sentence to describe one of these social problems? (Possible answer: crime, health, homelessness, poverty, gambling, family violence, divorce, unemployment)

3) Information input Give students some information about how serious these problems are and ask them to take notes. Then they can decide what is the most serious. (Refer to the PowerPoint Proper explanation is needed). ? About AIDS

1. How many AIDS patients all over the world? Where are they? And are they young or old?

2. What kinds of social problems can AIDS cause?

3. How about the situation in China? ? About drugs

1. Is the use of drugs such as heroin, serious? Why do you think so? 2. What should we do with it? ? About Smoking 1. Nearly everyone knows that smoking is harmful to our health. But why do people smoke?

2. What kinds of danger can it cause to our body?

3. Can you think of the other dangers of smoking? ? About drinking

1. Do your parents drink? Do you think drinking is good or not, or it depends? Give your reasons.

2. Can drinking cause some problem to our body? What are they?

3. Will drinking cause some social problems? Give some example.

T: These four are all social problems, as they all will cause sadness, unhappiness, harm, fear and even wars in the world or in society.

2. While-speaking If you were an expert on social problems, what is the most serious problem today, AIDS, drugs, smoking or drinking? Role play ? Group of four ? Each acts as the expert on AIDS, drug, smoking and drinking. ? Use the expressions to support your opinion or challenging other’s opinions. (p.50) Language input (Useful expressions) --Repeat it to strengthen students’ ability of use it. Supporting an opinion Challenging an opinion I think that ?, because ? Perhaps, but what if / about ?? First, ? Have you thought about ?? One reason is that ? What makes you think that ?? For example, ? Could you please explain ?? If we / they were to ?, we / they could ? If I were you, I would ? 3. Post-speaking Conclusion? Class discussion Q: Could these social problems be avoided? Or could we get rid of social problems in modern times? What can we do to deal with them? (Social problems are around us. They can’t disappear in modern society. But we can do something optimistic or positive to reduce the harm they cause. That’s why we youth are asked to get away from AIDS, drugs, etc. That’s why we youth should develop good habits. That’s why many people including famous stars are busy with telling others the harm. In this way, we can stay healthy both physically and mentally.) IV. Homework 1. Finish Listening (P.50) exercises 2. Read the passage ?FIGHTING THE VIRUS: HIV/AIDS IN AFRICA? (P127) and finish the Pre-reading exercises (p. 51).

The Third Period

GOALS:

? To learn more knowledge about AIDS.

? To help students understand the attitudes and spirits of living with disease ? To learn some useful language point

I. Pre-reading

Life is not always smooth, but with submerged rocks here and there, now and then. When faced with unexpected diseases or disasters or even death, what attitude to choose is a question. Q: For example, if you found out that you had an incurable disease, how do you think your life would change? And how would you act towards the change? -- Born dying with AIDS, Xiaohua says, ?My life may have to be short, but there’s no reason why it can’t be beautiful.? -- Diagnosed with cancer, ?I? also have something to say to you. Now let’s see what ?I? will say to you.

II. While-reading

Questions:

Q1: How did cancer change the writer’s life?

Q2: Compare the writer’s situation with that of Xiaohua. In what way are their experiences similar or different?

Q3: Do their experiences strike you?

Q4: What have you learnt from them? (Get the students to put emphasis on some language points, especially how the writer expresses what he thinks. e.g. ? I remember having an empty feeling in my stomach and thinking that my life was going to end. ? There were days when I wished that I were dead so that I would not have to feel so sick.)

III. Writing

Life is like a moon, sometimes round, sometimes not. We have happy times and also sad moments. If we draw a timeline, we will find it is not always straight. Take myself for instance… Steps to follow

Step one: think about your past days: what were some events that made you very happy? What made you very sad?

Step two: draw a timeline of your life and mark the best times (the highs) and the worst times (the lows).

Step three: talk about the happy and sad things to your partner, with reference to the timeline.

Step four: choose one event, either happy or sad, which impresses you most. Try to remember all the details of it, especially how it made you feel, what it made you think and why it is important in your life. Prepare for writing it down.

Step five: work out an outline of what you are going to write.

Step six: read an example

Step seven: begin to write.

IV. Homework

1. Write an essay about an important event in your life.

The Fifth Period

GOALS: ?

To learn about some antonyms ?

To practice using some useful words and phrases in the text

TEACHING PROCEDURES

I. Lead-in

Ask students some questions about Xiaohua. On one hand, they can review what they have learned. On the other hand, teacher can lead them to the learning of the useful words and phrases in this way

Q1. Do you still remember Xiaohua?

Q2. What has happened to her?

Q3. What is her attitude towards the disease? (She is a brave girl. She is not discouraged by AIDS, instead, she tries her best to encourage and help other AIDS patients.)

II. Learn and practice using some antonyms

1) Ask students to pay attention to the two words in bold and explain to them their meanings, pointing out that they have opposite meanings and this kind of words are called antonyms.

2) Let students have a competition. Try to find the antonyms of the following words. Let's see who can do it correctly and quickly. defenseless -- defensive infect with -- immune to protected -- unprotected incurable -- curable discourage -- encourage visible -- invisible

3) Practice using these antonyms through exercises. (Complete the sentences using the antonyms)

1. In February some people got ____ a strange disease and died within a month.

2. Although she met many difficulties, Helen was not _____. She continued struggling with the disease.

3. People think it a serious crime to attack _______ children.

4. AIDS can be transmitted by having ______ sex.

5. Having found out that the girl has got a disease which is ______ and will die soon, the boy decide to help her to make the last days of her life beautiful and meaningful.

III. Practice using some useful words and phrases in the text.

(Translate the following sentences with the help of Chinese or italic words.)

1. The doctor ______ (诊断)my illness as a rare skin disease.

2. He has _______ （恢复）from his bad cold and can go out tomorrow.

3. The disease makes her realize how _______ （宝贵）life is.

4. The doctor told him that the wound had been infected, and that the ___________ （受感染的伤口）become deadly if it is not properly treated.

5. They are certain that this virus has been transmitted through the air, yet they have not been able to identify the ___________（传播的病毒）

6. Bad news may discourage a patient, so it is very important that doctors try to cheer up the _______________（灰心丧气的病人）

7. First the doctor takes a blood sample and has it tested. Then he will use the ________ （经过测试的血样）to find out if it is a serious disease.

8. You cannot delay the treatment any longer. You must stop working unless you want to deal with the risks of ______________.（延误的治疗）

The Sixth Period

GOALS: ?

To learn the Subjunctive Mood?

To make students get familiar with the Subjunctive Mood and master it by using it in different situations

TEACHING PROCEDURES

I. Lead-in

1) Show students the picture of Xiaohua and ask them two questions:

Q1. You must be quite familiar with this girl now, right? (Right. She is a Xiaohua, a girl who has been infected with AIDS.)

Q2. How was she infected with AIDS? (She was infected by birth.)

2) Xiaohua was born dying and she has no choices. But many people who really have many choices don’t realize how precious life is and do a lot of harms to themselves.

1. Show students some pictures of people who smoke a lot, drink a lot or even have drugs, pointing out all these can lead to deadly disease.

2. Based on the above talking, teacher raise the following questions: If they go on doing this, what would happen? If you were Xiaohua, what would you like to tell them? If you were a doctor, what would you do? If you were one of them, what would you do?

3. Some people do not take Xiaohua or doctor's advices. Finally, they die. If they had not drunk so much wine, he would not have died at such an early age. If he had (not)..., he would (not) have... Ask students to make more similar sentences, using the Subjunctive Mood.

II. More Situations

1. The woman in the picture is Helen, who has been living with AIDS for many years. Now she is celebrating her birthday with her dog. If you were Helen, what kind of wishes would you make?

2. It is said that a falling star can let your dream come true. If you saw a falling star, what kind of wishes would you make?

3. Besides a falling star, a magic lamp can also let your dream com true. If you had a magic lamp, what would you ask it to do for you ?

III. Homework

1. Finish all the grammar exercises on SB and WB

2. Review the whole unit

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit2 The United Kingdom.

Teaching Goals:

1. Get the students to know the information about the United Kingdom.

2. Encourage the students to talk out what they know about the UK and Ireland.

3. Help the students learn to get information by listening.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

5. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

6. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

7. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Warming up

1.Lead-in

(1) What do you think of Dongguan? Which place impresses you most?

(2) A. There are not many visiting places in Dongguan as it is a newly-developed city. But what about our country? Think what words youll need to describe a country and then give a brief description of China.

B. There are many famous places in China. Think out one and describe it, letting others guess which place it is.

2. Show pictures of some famous places of China. Ask: Where are they taken?

3. Show pictures of some places of the British Isles and ask the students where they are taken. Then tell the students to say something they know about these places.

4. (1) Ask the following question: Do you know how many parts the UK is made up of? (Scotland/ England/ Wales-----Britain + Northern Ireland-----the UK + the Republic of Ireland---- the British Isles)

(2) Show the map of the British Isles to help the students to get a clear idea of some important cities in the UK and the names and the locations of different parts and counties and rivers.

(3) Then ask the students to look at some cities in the UK and to name them.

5. Group work:

(1) What is the UK famous for? Think about sport, art, architecture, literature, film, food and life. (Show some famous examples.)

(2) Talk about the geography, history, languages, culture, famous people, buildings and other things in the UK and Ireland.

Step 2 Listening

1. The teacher talks more about the languages in the UK and Ireland. Then ask the students to talk more about the education in the UK.

2. Ask: How are classes arranged in schools in the UK?

3. (1) Listen to the tape and tick the sentences which are true.

(2) Listen to the tape and fill in the timetable below.

(3) Listen to the tape and answer the following questions.

Step 3 Extension

1. Talk about our own timetable.

2. Have a discussion about the similarities of the timetables in our country and the UK and also tell the differences between them.

Step 4 Homework

Find more information in relation to the UK and Ireland on the Internet.

The second period Speaking

Teaching Goals

Train the students spoken English

Improve the students ability of imagination and debate

Practice expressing agreement and disagreement

Increase participation and learn from each other.

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Talking about hot topics

1. The students are asked to listen to the 28th Olympic theme song and talk about the host city of Athens

2. Talk about the 28th Olympic Games

3. Talk about their favorite athletes

Step2 Group theme debates

Of the talks about the country and Olympics above, lots of things are talked about like the opening ceremony, island, weather, language, geographic position, medals and so on.. The following three topics will be talked about . The students are divided into three groups and each will choose one of the topic boxes

1. Box 1 Xiangsheng performance by the Chinese and the westerners. Is Chinese easy to learn for the westerners?

2. Box 2 Learning different positions of England by moving different parts. Is it easier to learn geography by going there ?

3. Box 3 Enjoying pictures of island or small countries like Iceland and Japan. Do island nations have advantages over other countries?

Step3 Tips on how to express agreement and disagreement

Step5 Homework

Preview the reading passage

The third period Reading

Teaching goals

Get the students to know more about the British Isles and learn more new words and their usages.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Presentation

Show the students four pictures and ask them to guess a country name which is related to all of them. ( The answer is the United Kingdom. )

Ask the students: How much do you know about the united kingdom? Tell the students: Today we are going to read a passage about the British Isles.

Step 2 Fast reading

Get the students to skim the passage and match the paragraphs and the topics.

Then let the students take a look at the map of the British Isles and tell me the place names of the different numbers on the map.

Step 3 Careful reading

Ask the students to read the passage carefully and decide whether the following sentences are true or false.

( ) 1. Many people around the world study English, and they know a lot about British culture.

( ) 2. Great Britain is made up of four countries.

( ) 3. The island of Britain is separated from France by the English Channel.

( ) 4. Scotland is colder throughout the year, but receives less rain.

( ) 5. People from different parts of northern Europe settled in England, so the culture of the people of the British Isles was influenced by them.

( ) 6. The southern part of Ireland is now an independent republic.

( ) 7. In modern time, people throughout the British Isles only speak English.

Step 4 Discussion

Show the students some pictures of the three countries of the British Isles and then ask: If you have got the chance to visit one of the three countries of the British Isles, which country will you choose and why?

Imagine that you are going on a four-week trip through the UK. Make a travel plan in which you describe where you go, how long you will stay and why, and what clothes and things you will take.

Step 5 Homework

Write a short passage about the Dachen Isles.

The fourth period Grammar and Language study

Teaching goals

1. Learn about the appositive clause.

2. Identify noun clauses.

3. Enable students to use new words.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Review the vocabulary and complete the sentences.

a. Students work in pairs first.

b. The teacher check the answers.

Step 2 Brainstorming

a. Review the text and present the appositive clause by asking questions:

1.What impresses you most in the passage ?

The fact that impresses me most.

2.What have you already known before reading the passage ?

I have known the fact that

3.Did you hear any news about Britain recently ?

I heard the news that

b. Collect answers as many as possible ,reminding students

of sentence structure if find errors.

Step 3 Grammar Explanation

a. Get students to identify the clauses .

c. Try to make students tell the differences between appositive clause and attributive clause by comparing the sentences.

1.The news that the plane would take off on time made everybody happy.

2.The news that is spreading around the airport is that a heavy storm is coming.

3.The suggestion that students should learn something practical is worth considering.

4.The suggestion that they are considering is that students should learn something practical.

c. The teacher offers explanation if necessary.

Step 4 Tell the function of the following sentences.

1.The idea that Great Britain is made up of three countries Corner ,Big Ben and the Tower of London is past.

2.The fact that Great Britain is made up of three countries is still unknown to many.

3.The result of so much French influence was that the English language ended up with many French words such as table, animal and age.

4.Some people feel that Wales is an ancient fairy land.

5.That most of these are now threatened and may disappear is a serious matter to the people in Britain.

6.They realize that it is of great value to record and teach them to the younger generation.

Step 5 Consolidation

Consolidate what have been learned by doing further exercises.

The Fifth Period Integrative Skills

Teaching Goals:

1. Learn to describe the countryside, the cities, the people and their life by reading the passage.

2. Learn things about the city Salisbury.

3. Know more about Britain.

4. Cultivate the students’ abilities of concluding and reasoning.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1: Lead in

Teacher plays the video clip from Robinson Crusoe and asks the students Have you ever seen this film?

Who wrote the story?

Do you know something about Daniel Defoe?

Step 3 Extension

1. More to know about life in Britain: When talking about life in England, we just can’t miss one thing---pub. Pubs play an important part in people’s lives. It is a good place to meet friends and talk and drink beers. English villages are small and cozy. Lots of pubs can be found

with names like: the Red Lion, the Black Horse, the Rose and Crown, the King and Queen, and the George and Dragon. Lots of gorgeous food like pies, steaks, chips, big sandwiches, sausages and mash (potatoes!) and lots of different types of beer: bitter, lager (a light-colored beer), ale (a type of beer made from malt), etc!!!

(A video clip is presented about a pub.)

About football: Football is Britain’s national game. It was invented in Britain as far back as the 12th century, became an organized spectator sport in 19th century, and is now played in vast stadiums watched by tens of thousands of fervent supporters. Football is one of the few things that obsessed the British. And David Beckham is one of the most famous football stars. In the video we can see many college students playing football very early in the morning.

2. Let the students say something about the British Isles as far as they know.

Step 4 Homework:

Now you know how to describe a city’s landscape, the people and their lives after reading this passage. And today’s homework:

1. Choose any place you know or you like and write a short passage about it.

2. With the help of the Internet, try to collect as much information as possible and make a PowerPoint presentation in the next period.

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit3 Life in the Future

Teaching Goals:

1. Predicting the good and bad changes in the future.

2. imagine the alien creatures.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Revision

1 Check the homework exercises.

2 Ask the Ss a few random questions to revise future time and introduce the topic of the unit. For example: What lessons do you have this afternoon / tomorrow? Are you going to do anything special this evening? What do you think the weather will be like tomorrow? What are you going to do on Saturday evening? Are you planning to do anything on Sunday?

Step 2 Presentation

S. Ask questions about the picture (in PPT.), and get Ss to tell you what they think is happening. Teach the new words majority, goods, industry. Read the introduction aloud.

Step 3 Reading

Say Now read the dialogue silently and find out this information: What is being planned at this company? Allow the Ss a few moments to carry out the task. Check the answer. (A new factory may be built.) See if the Ss can guess the meaning of out of work.

Step 4 Dialogue

Play the tape of the dialogue for the Ss to listen and follow. Go through the dialogue briefly and make sure the Ss understand it. Ask questions like these: What are people at the company talking about? Who is going to make the decision? Why does the company need to build a new factory? What is the difficulty? Why do some people want the new factory to be built? Why are some people against the new factory? Explain that may have plans expresses uncertainty about the future. Play the tape again. This time the Ss listen and repeat. Then let the Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. You may wish to ask one pair to act the scene in front of the class.

Notes:

a People have been talking of it a lot recently.:

Note the Present Perfect Continuous Tense to express an activity which started in the past and is still continuing.

b I simply don‘t know. = I honestly don’t know.

c Right now = At this moment

d The problem is … it. = Finding land for building the new factory is a problem ( i.e. difficult).

e The majority of people = Most people

f a number of people = quite a lot of people

g out of work = do not have jobs

h But some people … built on. = Some people do not want them to build a factory on good farm land. Note the structure not want something to be done.

i I can see the problem. = I understand the problem.

j is likely to happen = will probably happen

k It‘s quite likely: Quite emphasizes likely and increases the possibility.

Step 5 Practice

Demonstrate how to make sentences from the table, and then get a few Ss to make example sentences. Then let the Ss do this exercise in pairs. At the end get Ss to write down 5 sentences from this table in their exercise books.

Step 6 Workbook

After Ex. 1 is done orally, get the Ss to write the answers in their exercise books.

Both Exx. 2 and 3 should be done in pairs first. Then check the answers with the class. Get Ss to translate the sentences into Chinese and ask them to think if they will be able to put them back into English. Pay attention to the sentence structures.

When doing Ex. 4, warn the Ss not to do word for word translation. Special attention should be paid to the sentence patterns and word order.

Step 7 Consolidation

With a good class you can give the Ss the following phrases and get them to make up a dialogue. Write these phrases on the Bb.

I believe you’re right.

What are the problems then?

What do you think is likely to happen?

Write them up on the Bb and demonstrate with a good S how it is possible to make up a dialogue.

A: I think the company will buy more land.

B: I believe you‘re right.

A: But it isn’t likely that the manager will make a decision soon.

B: What are the problems then?

With an ordinary class, just practice the dialogue in Part 1 again.

Homework

Finish off the Workbook exercises.

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit 4 Making the news

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to get some knowledge about basic procedures of making the news.

2. how to make newspapers of TV programmes.

3. Talk about news and the media.

4.. Practise expressing opinions.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

1. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

2. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

Teaching procedures

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn and master the following words and phrases: media, reliable, fire, face, difficulty, elect, go up, burn down, injure.

2. Practice expressing opinion using the following:

What do you think of…?

What's your opinion?

Why do you choose…?

Perhaps…is more important.

I would rather choose.…

I don't think we should choose…

Maybe it would be better to choose…

Our readers want to know about…

3. Talk about news and the media.

4. Train the students' listening and speaking abilities.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Master the useful words and expressions appearing in this period.

2. Train the students' listening and speaking abilities by talking about news and the media.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1. How to help the students understand the listening material exactly.

2. How to help the students finish the task of speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1. Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through the listening material.

2. Individual, pair or group work to make the students finish each task.

Step I Greetings and Lead-in

T: Good morning/afternoon, class.

Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss/ Mr. X.

T: Sit down, please. Being the members of the society, we all cares for/about what happens around us or even what happens at home and abroad. How can you do so?

Ss: By reading newspapers and magazines, watching TV programmes,

listening to the radio.

T: Are there any other ways? Think it over.

Ss: By a website.

T: Yes. It’s also a way to learn about the world. What do you call these things which help us know about to the world?

Ss:新闻媒体

T: In English, we call it news media. First, let's learn the new words in this period. Look at the screen.

(Teacher first asks some students to read the words on the screen. Correct the Ss' mistakes in pronunciation. Then teacher gives brief explanations. At last, let the Ss read and remember them for a while.)

Step Ⅱ Warming up

T: Well, now please open your books at Page 9. Warming up first. Look at each of the pictures and tell me which kind of news media it shows?

Ss: The first picture shows a website; the second one shows radio; the third one shows TV programmes; the fourth one shows magazines; the fifth one shows newspapers.

T: Quite right! Now, please work in groups of four and discuss the five questions below the pictures. A few minutes later, I’ll check your answers. OK?

Ss: OK.

T: You can begin now.

(A few minutes later. )

T: Are you ready now?

Ss: Yes.

T: Which group would like to talk about the first question? Choose one member of your group to answer the question.

S1: I think TV is the most reliable among the news media. TV consists of a series of lively consecutive pictures. For the people

who want to know what is exactly happening, a picture responds better to offer the truth of a fact than the mere words upon a page. It can offer an unique function of seemingly on-the-spot feeling, which is not available to the other media.

T: The second question?

S2. I think TV programmes are easy for most people to understand. Radio, can only be heard and sometimes can’t be picked up clearly. Newspapers and magazines are only useful for people who can read. Websites have many different pages, but you should be careful

to read some of the pages. who can read. Website have many different pages, but you should be careful to read some of the pages.

T: The third question?

S3 : I will check other sources.

T: The fourth question?

S4: Every morning, the newspaper chief editor and the journalists discuss the main events of the day. Reporters are then sent to cover the events. They usually do some interviews and then check the information. They must work very fast. Later in the day, everything is put together at the news desk. Then the editors read the stories and make any necessary changes and choose a good title for eachstory. At last, they print them quickly and deliver them. Making a magazine is more or less the same as making a newspaper. But the articles in a magazine are more like stories, which are writtenby all kinds of writers. Magazines are not published as quickly as newspapers.

T: The last question?

Ss: News broadcast, newspaper, magazine, radio programme, website,

report, reporter, editor, interview, write articles…

Step Ⅲ Listening

T: Next, let's come to the Listening. We are going to listen to two parts of conversations. The first part is an interview; the second part is a dialogue. Now, look at Exercise 1:

Listen carefully towhat is said and tick the information you hear in each part. If necessary, I'll play it twice. (Teacher begins to play the tape, and checks the answers after listening. Then ask the students to finish the rest of the tasks. )

T: OK. Now, please listen to each part once again and then work inpairs to talk about the questions in Exercises 2,3,4 and 5. Are youclear?

Ss: Yes.

(Teacher allows them enough time to talk about the questions. Thenask some students to say their answers.)

Step IV Speaking

T: Well, now it's time for us to be the editors of a newspaper. Here is a list of ten things that happened today. Look at the screen. (Teacher shows the screen and read through the list to the whole class.)

200 people died in an earthquake in Turkey.

China beat Brazil 5-1 in football.

France elected a new President.

Three children from your city were killed.

Someone robbed a bank in Shanghai.

Food prices are going up.

A house in your town burned down. Nobody was injured. 2 000 people in your city were happy today and moved into new buildings. A Chinese scientist has invented a new car engine that does not pollute the air. There is a rumor that a large company wants to build a factory in your town:

(Bb :go up, burn down)

T: Now, you've known the ten things, but you only need to report

five of them. So, first decide which events you are going to put in your newspaper. Then give reasons for your choices and compare with your classmates. Work in groups of four or five. And the following expressions on the screen can help you with your dialogue. After a while, I'll ask some of you to act out your dialogue.

(Teacher shows the screen. )

What do you think of'…?

I would rather choose.…

What's your opinion?

I don't think we should choose…

Why do you choose…

Maybe it would be better to choose…

Perhaps… is more important.

Our readers want to know about….

(Teacher goes around the Ss and checks their work. If necessary, teacher may join in them. )

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit5 First Aid for Burns (Reading)

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to get some first aid knowledge

2. Enable the Ss to learn how to use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

3. Let the Ss learn the reading skill of getting the main idea of each para./ part & each passage .

Key Teaching Points

How to improve the Ss’ reading ability.

Difficult points

1. How to grasp the main idea of each paragraph / part & each passage.

2. How to help the Ss use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

4. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

5. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

6. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

Teaching aids

The multi-media (see a short movie about how to treat burn from ppt.)

Teaching procedures

Step1. Lead-in

Lead-in by telling the Ss a story, meanwhile, teach them some new words: bandage, first-aid-kit, ambulance and then ask them to think of words about accidents and first aid

Step2. Pre-reading

Show the Ss the picture of Pre-reading on P33 and ask them the following questions:

What has happened?

What sort of injuries the child will have?

What kind of first aid would you perform?

Step3. Fast reading

Let the Ss read the passage fast and then find out the answers to the questions

1. What will the passage be about?

2. What do they tell you about the passage?

3. In which order are these topics covered in the text? Number them from 1 to 5.

____ the three types of burns

____ what to do if someone gets burned

____ the purpose of skin

____ the symptoms of burns

____ how we get burns

Step4. Detailed reading

1). Tell if the following statements are true or false:

1. Our skin has three layers.

2. We will never get burned by the sun.

3. Burns are divided into three degrees according to the degree of pain.

4. Third degree burns are the most serious and painful.

5. Put cool water on any burns to cool them.

6. Don’t rub the burns

7. It’s better that you put some butter or oil on burns.

2). Answer the questions

1.Why should you put cold water on a burn?

2.Why doesn’t a third degree burn hurt?

3.Why do you think clothes and jewellery near burns should be removed?

4.If someone has a third degree burn, why might you see tissue?

3). Read the text again and then find out how many parts there are and the main idea of each part:

Part1. The purpose / function of skin

Part2. Causes of burns hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation, the sun, electricity, chemicals

Part3. Types of burns: First degree burns, Second degree burns, Third degree burns

Part4. Characteristics of burns

Part5 First aid treatment

3). Finish off Comprehending Ex2&3

Step5. Words competition

Have a competition to check the Ss’ words spelling

Step6. Making a first-aid kit

An activity to let the Ss know what are included in a first-aid-kit

A well-stocked(存备得好的) first-aid kit, kept in easy reach, is necessary in every home. It should include: bandage, alcohol, flashlight, thermometer, soap, sharp scissors, plastic gloves (at least 2 pairs), your list of emergency phone numbers etc.

Step7. Role play

Work in pairs to act out how to place an emergency call for help

Step8. Summary

This passage doesn’t contain enough information for you to do first aid for others. Please learn more after class. Do remember: Life is precious, we should care about others and help people in an emergency and try our best to give them effective first aid if they are in danger.

Step9. Homework

Search as much information as you can about first aid

www. healthy. net/clinic/first aid/

kids health. org/parent/first aid_ safe/

八年级上册英语课件 篇2

Section A

一、主要词汇：

surprise, skill, message, suppose, graduate, volunteer, experience, knowledge, border

report, pass, suppose, send, love, copy, aid, complete, gain

simple, thin, average, nervous, disappointing, true, lucky, mad, hard-working, lazy

二、语言目标：

1. He said he was mad.

2. She told me she would call me tomorrow.

3. He said he could speak three languages.

4. He said he was having a party for Lana.

三、语言结构：

1．直接引语与间接引语之间的转换；

2．掌握情态动词can 表示“能力”的用法‘

3．学会运用各种时态。

四、学法向导

1． 学会将直接引语转换为间接引语；

2． 学会用间接引语转述他人的话；

3． 各种时态要分清楚；

4． 形容词的用法。

五、教学过程

I 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

1a

（教师）1. Points to the TV screens in the picture and have students read the words in those TV screens.

（教师）2. Point to the four questions in the box and red the questions to the class again. Then help students form small groups. Say, Now answer these questions and talk about some soap operas.

（教师）3. After five minutes, talk about the questions with the whole class. Ask students from different groups to tell what they talked about in their group. Focus on the ideas the students are talking about. But sometimes when a student starts to tell what another student said, you can help that student make a sentence such as: Anna said she didn’t watch soap operas. Bill said people get mad on soap operas.

1b

（教师）1. Point to the TV screens in activity 1a one by one. Ask different students to look at each picture and tell what is happening.

（教师）2. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

（教师）3. Play the tape a second time. This time say, Now, write the numbers 1 through 4 in front of the pictures. Put a number 1 in front of the picture you hear first on the recording, and so forth.

（答案）The TV screens should be numbered in this order:

1 3 4 2

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

Girl 1: What did Marcia say?

Girl 2: She said she was having a surprise party for Lana on Friday night.

Girl 1: What did Marcia say?

Girl 2: She said Lana thought she was coming to her house to study.

Girl 1: What did Lana say?

Girl 2: She said she was mad at Marcia.

Girl 1: What did Lana say?

Girl 2: She said she wasn’t going to Marcia’s house on Friday night.

1c

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, You will be talking with your partner as you do this activity.

（教师）2. Ask two students to read the example in the sample dialogue. Then say, Now work with your partner. Ask and answer questions abut each picture in activity 1a.

（教师）3. As students talk, move around the room offering help as needed.

（教师）4.Ask several pairs of students to say a question and answer to the class.

II 放完第二段视频后，

① 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

2a

（教师）1. Point to the five sentences and ask different students to read the sentences to the class.

（教师）2.Point to and read the instructions to the class. Say, You will hear a conversation between two people who are talking about a soap opera on TV. Circle true or false after each statement.

（教师）3. Point out the sample answer. Say, This is statement tells what Ben said on the soap opera. The statement is true.

（教师）4. Play the recording .

（答案）5 4 1 3 2.

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

A: Did you see “Young Lives” last night?

B: No, what happened?

A: Well, Ben told Lana that Marcia was going to have a surprise party for her.

B: Really? What did Lana say?

A: Well, Lana was very excited. Lana told Ben that she would go to Marcia’s hose on Friday night after all.

B: Oh. Then what?

A: Marcia called everyone and told them she wasn’t going to have the party.

B: Oh, no!

A: Yeah, then Lana called Marcia and told her that she could bring some drinks and snacks to her house on Friday night.

B: Oh, wow…and what did Marcia say?

A: She told Lana she would be glad…

2b

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, This time you are going to circle the actual words people in the soap opera said. Point to the sentence after number 1 and read it to the class. Then point to the speech bubble in picture 1 and say, These are the words the actor in the soap opera said. Point to the sample answer. Say, Circle the correct word here..

（教师）2. Play the recording.

（答案）1. is 2. am 3. will 4. am 5. will

2c

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2.Point out the pictures in activity 2b. Say, Use these words and pictures as you have your conversations.

（教师）3.Then have students work in pairs.

（教师）4.Check the answers by calling on different pairs to do one question and answer each..

② 全班讨论

Ask students to act out the situation shown in the pictures. Three students pretend to be Ben, Marcia, and Lana. Draw a large TV screen on the board and have these three students sit in front of it. Two other students pretend to be the two girls watching the soap opera on TV. They can sit on the floor. Ask the soap opera characters to read a line from activity 2b. Then have one of the girls report what that actor said. Repeat for all five pictures in activity 2b.

III 放完第三段视频后，

请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2. Read the article to the class, saying blank each time you come to a blank line.

（教师）3. Ask students to fill in the blanks on their own.

（答案）

1. was

2. thought

3. told

4. was

5. wasn’t

6. going

7. wasn’t

8. would

9. told

10. wasn’t

3b（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, You can write anything you want. What do you think Ben and Lana and Marcia will do next?

（教师）2. Ask some students to read their episodes to the class..

4

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Students work in groups of four students.

（教师）2.Ask the students to complete the role pays on their own.

（教师）3. Ask a few students to show their role plays to the class.

注：黑色的斜体字是老师在课上组织教学时所用到的语言。

八年级上册英语课件 篇3

教学目标: 1.学生能够理解对话大意,能够用正确的语音语调朗读对话,能够在情景中恰当运用句型what color is it? It’s ?问答颜色。 2.能够在情景中理解新词lost,toy,notebook的意思并能正确发音。

教学重点: 1.句型:what color is it? It’s ?问答颜色。 2.词汇:lost,toy,notebook

教学难点:对here it is和here you are的理解。

教学过程:

(一)热身/复习(Warm-up/Revision)复习What’s in the schoolbag?

1.教师带领学生看图:Sarah和Amy讨论丢失的笔记本的画面。教师指着图片说Sarah lost her notebook.板书新单词lost,并带读单词。

2.教师继续提问Is Sarah happy or sad?请学生注意Sarah说的话:I like it very much。学生回答She is sad教师继续问What can she do?

3.教师指着张鹏说Zhang Peng lost something,too。 Let’s go and have a look。

4.教师出示句子:Zhang Peng lost his English book。请学生完整听一遍对话录音,判断句子正误。学生听完后进行判断,并讲English book更正为schoolbag。

5.教师提问What color is Zhang Peng’s schoolbag?板书核心句型:What color is it?学生跟读并听录找答案。听音之前教师给出答案的选项: A. It’s black and white. B. It’s blue and white.学生听完后选择正确的答案。

6.学生同桌之间互相询问对方书包的颜色,运用句型What colour is it? It’s......

7.学生做Let’s play板块的活动。

8.教师提问What’s in Zhang Peng’s schoolbag?请学生在对话中找出答案: An English book,two toys and a notebook。教师利用单词卡片和实物教学单词toy notebook。

1.教师出示对话板块的板书,播放录音,请学生看图听音后填充句子:Zhang Peng’s schoolbag isXXXXXXXandXXXXXXXX.

2.学生自由朗读对话,教师提醒学生注意按照意群朗读。

作业布置:

八年级上册英语课件 篇4

第三单元教学要点   教学要点： 一、本单元是一个说明文单元，《中国石拱桥》和《苏州园林》，《故宫博物院》是比较规范的说明文，其余则有一定的说明文性的小品。 二、本单元教学，要学生了解什么是说明文。 三、学习本单元，要理清说明文的顺序，了解常用的说明方法。 四、学习本单元后，要学生学习写作说明文。 教学时间：23课时  11 中国石拱桥  教学目的： 1．引导学生抓住中国石拱桥的特点。 2．列出文章结构，领会文章的内容。 3．激发学生热爱社会主义制度。 教学重难点： 1．重点：抓住中国石拱桥的特点，理清文章结构。 2．难点：课后思考练习题三，以形象的语言介绍一种事物。 学法指导：引导自读合作探究 教具准备： 小黑板 课时安排：3课时 教学过程： 第一 课 时 一．导入新课：  我们常常用桥梁来比喻友谊，因为是友谊就像桥一样把两个人连了起来。可见桥是在没有路的地方搭起来的路。根据史料和考察，在原始社会，我国就有了独木桥和数根圆木排拼而成的木梁桥。河北赵县的赵州桥是世界上第一座采用弓形拱的敞肩拱桥，欧洲在赵州桥建成七百年后才采用弓形拱的。我们的祖先的聪明才智值得我们每一位同学学习。 二．简介作者  茅以升是我国著名的桥梁专家、教育家、社会活动有。他主持设计的钱塘江大桥，是我国第一座由中国人自己设计的铁路公路两用桥；他还参加了新中国第一座现代化的大桥――武汉长江大桥的建造。本文最早以表于是1962年3月4 日《人民日报》，文笔通俗易懂，为读者介绍了中国石拱桥的特点，历史上的辉煌成就，及新中国成立后的发展，赞扬了我国劳动人民的聪明才智和社会主义制度的优越。 三．检查预习 1． 查字典，给加点的字注音。  弧形 拱桥 陡坡 匀称 惟妙惟肖  2． 读了本文，你了解中国石拱桥的特点以及赵州桥和卢沟桥的不同之处？ 四． 初读课文，看看作者写出了石拱桥的什么特点。  1． 提示：请同学们找出哪些段落是写赵州桥的，哪些段落是写卢光沟桥的？联系课后思考练习题一，填空。  2． 学生读，填空，教师巡视指导。  3． 总结：  名称 位置 修建年月 结构特征  赵州桥 横跨在河上 修建于公元6左右。 1全桥只有一个大拱，长达37。4米。 2大拱的两肩上，各有两面三刀个小拱。3大拱由28道拱圈拼成。4全桥结构均匀。  卢沟桥 位于永定河上 修建于公元1189到1192年间 由11个半圆形石拱组成，每个石拱长度不一，自16米到21。6米，桥宽约8米，路面平坦，几乎与河面平行。每两个石拱之间有石砌桥墩，把11个石拱联成一个整体，是一座联拱石桥。  中国石拱桥的特点是形式优美，结构坚固，历史悠久。 第 二 课 时 一． 复习上节课学过的内容 1． 听写 2． 说说中国石拱桥的特点。 二． 细读全文，理解作者是怎样说明石拱桥的特点的。  1． 为了说明中国石拱桥的特点，作者举了两个例子，一个赵州桥，一个卢沟桥，这种说明方法叫做――举例子。  2． 在写赵州桥和卢沟桥时，作者列举了许多精确的数字，这种用数字来说明事物的方法叫做――列数字。  3． 为了让人们更清楚的认识中国石拱桥的特点，作者的语言很具有逻辑性，例如课文第五自然段，在写赵州桥时，先介绍了桥的长度、宽度、设计施工的精巧。再分四点用数字分别说明。层次性很强。  4． 作者在介绍两座桥时，既抓住了它们之间的共同点，又注意到了它们之间的不同点，请同学们找出来。（共同点是都介绍了地点，修建年代，及它们的结构特点。不同点是在介绍赵州桥时顺便说明了桥的设计者，介绍卢沟桥时作马可波罗的话来赞扬其高度的技术成就和艺术价值，还介绍了卢沟桥的的特殊历史价值。这不但使行文有所变化，而且增强了文章的可读性。） 三． 引导学生学习课文的最后两段。  1． 第九段写什么，怎样写？（文章又分三点解释了到得如此辉煌的建筑成就的原因。先写……再写……最后写……）  2． 最后一段写什么，怎样写？（介绍了解放后我国石拱桥的修建情况，列举了我国修建的世界最长的独拱石桥――“长虹大桥”、我国劳动人民独创的钢筋混凝土拱桥――（双曲拱桥等，说明了我国桥梁事业取得的巨大成绩。 四． 引导学生体会说明文行文简洁、用词准确的语言特点。（联系课后思考练习题二） 五． 联系课后思考练习题三，引导学生用打比方的方法，把要说明的事理解释清楚。（我们常说用白纸写黑字，黑板其实就是一张黑色的纸，用白色的笔来写。我们把一张黑色的纸放大，再挂起来，就是一张黑板。）  第 三 课 时 一、完成课后习题。 二、拓展延伸:形象的语言介绍一种事物 板书设计： 中国石拱桥 概括说明 一般：形式优美，结构坚固 中国：历史悠久，形式多样 具体说明（举例） 赵州桥：现存最古老 独拱---37.4米（当时最长） 设计科学，施工巧妙 卢沟桥：联拱---265米 石狮千态万状，惟妙惟肖 具有纪念意义 教学后记：学生对中国石拱桥的构造等的认识把握得较好，对文中的说明方法也掌握得不错； 但对说明文的多种顺序出现在同一篇文章中的形式认识有难度。    12 桥 之 美  教学目的： 流利、有感情地朗读课文，理解作者喜爱桥的原因。 品味本文优美而又富有意蕴的语言。 学习从某一角度欣赏艺术作品的方法。 教学重点难点 品味本文优美而又富有意蕴的语言。 课时安排 3课时。 课前准备 布置学生预习课文，会写生字、准确注音，排除字词障碍。 课前学生借助网络或图书，查阅一些有关的图片资料，或依据课文内容绘制几幅 图画。(体现桥与周围环境的和谐统一)准备录音带、录音机、微机或投影仪。 教学步骤  第 一 课 时 导人新课。  马致远的“小桥流水人家”让人联想到家的温馨；徐志摩的《再别康桥》使人产生无限的惆怅……在诗人的眼中“桥”是人性化的，是情感的载体；在画家的眼中，桥则别有一番 韵味。今天就让我们跟随当代画家吴冠中去感受“桥之美”。(板书课题，“美”字写大，突出一下) 教师配乐范读课文。 (要求：注意语气、语速、语调及重音的把握) 学生自由朗读课文，思考以下问题： (多媒体或投影显示问题组) 问题．a．在作者的眼中桥美在何处?  b．为了说明桥之美作者主要举了哪些例子?  c．联系课文说说怎样欣赏一幅画? 四人小组讨论明确：  a．并不着眼于桥自身的结构美，而是缘于桥在不同环境中的多种多样的形式作用。  b．举了四个例子：乌镇苇丛上的石桥；江南乡间细柳下的石桥；水天间的长桥――颐和园的仿卢沟桥、苏州的宝带桥；形式独特的广西、云南、贵州山区的风雨桥。  c．画面的构成是否有块、线、面的搭配；画中的形象是否都能和周围的景物既形成对照又不失和谐。 ■研读与赏析  (过渡)通过阅读文章，我们不难看出作为画家，作者看桥淡化其结构、种类、功用，更重其美学价值。那么你能用优美的语言描绘文中你最欣赏的一幅画面吗7 重点研读第④小节。  (出示学生绘制的四幅图画) 四人小组讨论：  a．说说四幅图中你最喜欢哪一幅，用生动的语言描绘画面并说说为什么喜欢?  b．请有绘画天赋的同学点评。  c．我们应从哪些角度欣赏一幅艺术作品? 明确：  a．◆厚厚实实的平面铺开的苇丛使空间显得狭窄拥挤，令人产生憋闷感；间或出现的石桥轮廓简单鲜明，能使空间陡然显得疏朗开阔，令人觉得神清气爽。  ◆细弱的`柳枝拂着桥身厚重坚硬的石块，这里有形体上的强弱、轻重、动静之分，有颜色上的对比，还有变(柳枝年年发新芽)与不变(桥能历久不变)之别，种种不同，归结起来，其实是阳刚与阴柔这两种美的类型的不同，因桥的轮廓精心设计而和谐统一。  ◆长桥一般建筑在比较宽阔的水面上，打破了背景的单调感。桥是人们劳动的成果，出现在苍茫水面上的长桥，是人类创造力的体现。整个环境似乎有了灵气和生命。  ◆桥面上盖有廊和亭的桥，给人安闲、自在的感觉，这种感觉恰好与险峻的山峰、桥下的急流给人的感觉形成对照。  b．点评语言、欣赏的角度。  c．从色彩的搭配、画面构成(块、线、面)、景物的选择(强弱、明暗、动静等)是否对立统一……角度来判断。 美句赏析。  (过渡)吴冠中以他画家的真知灼见，不但告知了我们如何用“美学”的眼光来重新审视事物，而且他还用蕴涵丰富的语言引起我们强烈的感情上的共鸣。  a．找出意蕴丰富的语句，体味句子的情昧。  b．先四人小组讨论，再让小组派代表发言。 重点赏析以下语句： ◆茅盾故乡乌镇的小河两岸都是密密的芦苇，真是密不透风，每当其间显现一座石桥时，仿佛发闷的苇丛做了一次深呼吸，透了一口舒畅的气。 ◆早春天气，江南乡间石桥头细柳飘丝，那纤细的游丝拂着桥身坚硬的石块，即使碰不见晓风残月，也令画家销魂! ◆无论是木桥还是石桥，其身段的纵横与桥下的水波协同谱成形与色的乐曲。． ◆田野无声，画家们爱于无声处静听桥之歌唱，他们寻桥，仿佛孩子们寻找热闹。 (过渡)我们从《桥之美》中，体会到了桥的美感，真是赏心悦目。同是写桥的文章，《中国石拱桥》与之有什么不同之处呢? 课堂小结  同学们，今天我们在画家吴冠中的带领下，一起领略了桥的风采，生活中有多少美不胜收的景致，或纤弱或雄壮或含蓄……让我们练就一双慧眼去发现、去鉴赏这大干世界吧!  第 二 课 时 一、完成课后习题。 二、拓展延伸 比较本文与《中国石拱桥》在内容和写法上有何不同? 明确：本文是一篇带有说明性质的小品文。它的说明性体现在文中先点明在画家眼里桥美在何处，随后举了一些具体的例子。但是与《中国石拱桥》这种较为规范的说明文不同的是，在举例时，作者并不是用科学、平实的语言向读者解说，而是或描写景物，或抒发感情，文字极富表现力和感染力。 板书设

八年级上册英语课件 篇5

1.掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Canyou come to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。

1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：

教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。

2.完成任务，合作学习：

教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握所学的知识。

任务一：Planning abirthday party.

让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。

任务二：Writing aninvitation card.

学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。

学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。

完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：

We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?

When is it going tostart?

I’m sorry. I haveto....

3.拓展学习：

学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。

可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。

①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。

③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。

have a rest play there bebe busy practice be free listen to

1. Can they XXXXXXXXXXthe music in the classroom?

2. I’m sorry. TomorrowI’m XXXXXXXXXX soccer and having a math lesson.

3. He has got a badheadache. Let himXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

人教版八年级下册英语课件9篇

通常老师在上课之前会带上教案课件，而现在又到了写课件的时候了。教师要针对学生的实际需求优化教案的编写，写一篇教案课件要具备哪些步骤？想获取“人教版八年级下册英语课件”的具体资料可以参考以下提供的资源，欢迎本文为大家提供参考！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇1

主题：我的偶像

My Idol

My idol is a person who inspires me to be a better version of myself. She is none other than Emma Watson. She is an actress, a model, a feminist and an activist. Emma Watson became famous around the world for her role as Hermione Granger in the Harry Potter film series. However, the reason why I admire her has nothing to do with her acting career.

Emma Watson is an articulate feminist and has been advocating for gender equality for years. She is a UN Women Goodwill Ambassador, and she helped launch the HeForShe campaign in 2014. This campaign aims to involve men and boys in the struggle for gender equality. Emma Watson made a powerful speech in the United Nations, which went viral and sparked a global conversation about feminism.

Not only is Emma Watson an advocate for gender equality, but she is also an environmentalist. She launched a sustainable fashion initiative called "The Press Tour" in 2017. This initiative showed how fashion can be a powerful tool for social and environmental change. Emma Watson only wore sustainable and ethically made clothes during her press tour for Beauty and the Beast, and she used social media to raise awareness about the importance of ethical fashion.

Emma Watson's activism inspires me to take action myself. She proves that celebrities can use their platform for good, and I hope to follow in her footsteps. She is not only beautiful on the outside, but she is also beautiful on the inside. She is intelligent, confident, and compassionate. She is everything I aspire to be, and I am lucky to have her as my idol.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇2

Unfortunately, as an AI language model, I am not able to provide you with a pre-written essay or essay templates, but I can give you some guidance on how to write a theme-based essay on the 8th-grade English textbook.

First, determine the theme of the lesson or chapter. For example, suppose the topic is about environmental protection. Your job is to write about the importance of protecting the environment. Start by conducting research on the topic, gather valuable information from reliable sources, define your thesis statement, and create an outline.

You can start your essay by introducing the topic, highlighting the current environmental issues, and explaining why environmental protection is crucial. You may share some exciting facts or statistics to grab your reader's attention. Then, develop your thesis statement, explaining what you learned about environmental protection from the lesson or chapter.

Next, you can divide your essay into sections, such as the causes and effects of environmental degradation, the role of people in environmental protection, and the steps that individuals can take to contribute to environmental protection.

In the first section, you can discuss the causes of environmental degradation, such as overpopulation, pollution, deforestation, and climate change. You can explain their negative impacts on the environment, such as the extinction of species, global warming, and increase in natural disasters.

In the second section, discuss the role of individuals in environmental protection. Talk about how people can use their daily activities to reduce their carbon footprints, such as conserving energy, using green technologies, and avoiding single-use plastics. You can also touch on the importance of governments, non-governmental organizations, and international coalitions on environmental protection.

In the final section, provide some steps that individuals can take to contribute to environmental protection, such as reducing their waste, conserving water, planting trees, and advocating for environmental policies.

Lastly, you should conclude your essay by summarizing your main points and restating your thesis statement. You can also provide some key takeaways and encourage your readers to take action towards environmental protection.

In summary, writing a theme-based essay on an English textbook requires you to conduct thorough research, establish a clear thesis, develop an outline, and organize your ideas effectively. With the right approach, you can create an informative and insightful essay that demonstrates your understanding of the subject matter.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇3

Possible writing:

Topic: My Experience of Studying English in Junior High School

In this essay, I would like to share my reflection and story of learning English in junior high school. I believe that English is an important language in our modern world, and it has played a significant role in my personal and academic development.

Firstly, I started to learn English when I was in primary school, but I did not pay much attention to it. I thought it was just another subject that I had to study and memorize. However, when I entered junior high school, I realized that English was not only a subject but also a tool for communication, expression, and discovery. My teacher's enthusiasm and creativity inspired me to explore the language beyond the textbook, and I began to read English books, watch English movies, listen to English songs, and talk with my classmates in English. Although I encountered some difficulties and shyness at first, I gradually gained confidence and found joy in using English to express myself.

Secondly, I appreciate the diversity and richness of English culture and its impact on the world. Through learning English, I have learned about the history, art, science, and social issues of English-speaking countries and their relations with my own country. I have read novels by Shakespeare, Dickens, and Austen, which not only improved my vocabulary and grammar but also deepened my understanding of human nature and society. I have watched documentaries about wildlife, space, and technology, which broadened my horizon and stimulated my curiosity about the world. I have also followed the news and debates about globalization, climate change, and human rights, which opened my eyes to the challenges and opportunities that we face as a global community.

Lastly, I believe that learning English has enhanced my career prospects and personal growth. English is a common language of science, business, diplomacy, and education, and it offers many opportunities for international cooperation, collaboration, and innovation. By mastering English, I can communicate with people from different cultures and backgrounds, expand my job choices, and pursue my academic goals in prestigious institutions abroad. Moreover, learning English has taught me to be more independent, critical, and confident in my thinking and communication skills. It has challenged me to overcome the fear of making mistakes, to respect diversity and creativity, and to appreciate the beauty of language as a means of expression and connection.

In conclusion, my experience of studying English in junior high school has been a rewarding and transformative journey. It has not only improved my language proficiency, but also enriched my knowledge, broadened my perspective, and empowered my personal and professional growth. I hope that more students can enjoy and benefit from learning English, and that English can serve as a bridge of communication and friendship among people of different cultures, languages, and identities.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇4

注意：此文章由AI自动生成

Unit 1 How do you study for a test?

As a student, it is essential to adopt effective methods to study for a test. In this unit, we learn about the different strategies that can be used to improve our test-taking skills. From creating a study schedule to active reading and note-taking, these tips can help us achieve better outcomes in exams.

One of the most effective ways to study is by breaking down the study material into small, manageable chunks. It helps to focus on one topic at a time, and try to master it before moving on to the next. Additionally, it is important to create a study schedule that includes both revision and practice tests.

Another effective technique is to take active notes while reading. By using abbreviations, diagrams, and summaries, we can retain information better. Additionally, asking questions and discussing ideas with classmates can also help improve our understanding of the material.

Unit 2 What’s the matter?

This unit focuses on health-related issues and common illnesses. We learn about different body parts, medical equipment, and basic first aid. Additionally, we learn about strategies to stay healthy, such as eating a balanced diet, getting enough exercise, and sleeping well.

It is important to take care of our physical and mental health. We can do this by staying active and eating a nutritious diet. Additionally, it is essential to get enough sleep and manage stress effectively.

If we do fall sick, it is essential to seek medical attention. We should never ignore symptoms or delay seeking treatment. Additionally, we can take steps to prevent the spread of disease, such as washing our hands frequently, covering our mouth when we cough or sneeze, and avoiding close contact with sick individuals.

Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?

In this unit, we learn about expressing different degrees of politeness in English. We learn about the proper use of phrases like "could you please" and "would you mind" to effectively communicate our needs and desires.

Additionally, we learn about social norms and customs in different countries. By understanding these differences, we can avoid cultural misunderstandings and connect more effectively with people from different backgrounds.

Politeness is an essential component of effective communication. It can help build connections and convey respect. By mastering the use of polite phrases, we can effectively communicate our needs and desires in a respectful way.

Unit 4 Why don't you talk to your parents?

This unit focuses on family relationships and communication. By learning about active listening, assertiveness, and conflict resolution, we can develop stronger bonds with our family members.

Effective communication is key to healthy family relationships. By actively listening to each other and expressing our needs and feelings assertively, we can avoid misunderstandings and conflicts. Additionally, we can implement strategies to resolve conflicts in a healthy and constructive manner, such as compromise and negotiation.

It is also important to show gratitude and appreciation towards our family members. By expressing our love and gratitude, we can strengthen our relationships and build positive memories together.

Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came?

In this unit, we learn about the past continuous tense and how to describe ongoing actions in the past. Additionally, we learn about different past events, such as natural disasters and historical events.

By mastering the past continuous tense, we can effectively describe ongoing actions in the past. This can help us better communicate our experiences and memories with others.

Additionally, learning about past events can help us gain a deeper understanding of history and culture. By understanding the forces that shape our world, we can become more informed and active members of society.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇5

Sorry, I am an AI language model and do not have the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" curriculum with me. However, I can provide a sample theme essay that can be used as a reference.

Theme: The Importance of Time Management in Our Lives

Time is one of the most valuable resources we have, and yet it is the one that we often take for granted. Time management is not just about getting things done on time but also about creating a healthy balance between work and personal life. In this essay, we will explore the many benefits of time management and how it can positively impact our lives.

Firstly, time management helps us prioritize our tasks and focus on what is important. When we have a plan in place, we are less likely to be distracted by less significant things. It also allows us to allocate our time more efficiently, which means we can accomplish more in less time. This, in turn, can reduce stress levels and increase feelings of accomplishment and self-esteem.

Secondly, good time management skills can improve our work-life balance. When we are in control of our schedule, we can ensure that we have enough time for work, family, and leisure activities. This can lead to better relationships, improved mental health, and increased overall happiness.

Thirdly, time management skills are essential for achieving long-term goals. Without a plan, it is easy to become lost in the day-to-day grind and lose sight of our objectives. When we have a clear plan in place and commit to it, we can achieve our goals gradually and consistently.

In conclusion, the benefits of time management are numerous. From reducing stress levels to achieving long-term objectives, it is a skill that can positively impact almost every aspect of our lives. Therefore, it is essential that we make time management a priority in our lives, and in doing so, we can live more fulfilling and productive lives.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇6

Sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot provide plagiarised or pre-written content. However, I can give you a generic outline to write your essay:

Topic: My experience with learning English using "人教版八年级下册英语课件"

Introduction:

- Introduce the topic and explain why you chose it.

- Briefly mention the importance of learning English in today's world.

- Explain what "人教版八年级下册英语课件" is and how it helped you learn English.

Body:

- Discuss the various aspects of the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" that helped you learn English, such as the content, exercises, audio-visual aids, etc.

- Give examples of specific lessons or topics that you found particularly useful or interesting.

- Talk about any difficulties you faced while using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" and how you overcame them.

- Discuss the role of a teacher or mentor in your learning experience and how they used the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" to facilitate your learning.

- Highlight any improvements you have seen in your English proficiency since using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

Conclusion:

- Summarize your experience with the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

- Discuss how it has benefited you and how it can benefit other English learners.

- Mention your future goals in learning English and how you plan to achieve them.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇7

一、主题：My Future Dream

My future dream is to become a successful writer. I have always been passionate about writing and expressing myself through words. I want to create stories and characters that can inspire and entertain people all over the world.

In order to achieve this dream, I am currently studying English and Literature in school, as well as reading as many books as I can. I also attend writing workshops and conferences where I can learn from seasoned writers and improve my craft.

Aside from writing, I also want to use my platform to spread awareness on important issues. I believe that writers have a unique ability to shed light on difficult topics and initiate change.

Although the road to becoming a successful writer may be difficult, I am determined to work hard and pursue my passion. I know that with the right mindset, education, and opportunities, my dream can become a reality.

二、主题：My Ideal Vacation

My ideal vacation would be a trip to Japan. I have always been fascinated by the country's rich history, unique culture, and stunning natural landscapes.

During my trip, I would visit the bustling cities of Tokyo and Osaka, where I can experience the modern and traditional sides of Japan. I would also travel to Kyoto, where I can explore the various temples and shrines that are scattered throughout the area.

Aside from visiting the cities, I would also take the time to appreciate Japan's natural beauty. I would hike along the Kumano Kodo Trail, which is known for its scenic routes and historic landmarks. I would also visit the hot springs in Beppu, where I can relax and soak in the therapeutic waters.

Of course, no trip to Japan would be complete without trying the local cuisine. I would indulge in sushi, ramen, and other delicious dishes that are unique to the country.

Overall, my ideal vacation would be a trip to Japan, where I can immerse myself in the country's culture, history, and natural beauty.

三、主题：The Importance of Education

Education is one of the most important aspects of society. It provides individuals with the knowledge and skills they need to succeed in life, pursue their passions, and make a positive impact on the world.

Education also plays a crucial role in promoting social and economic mobility. Through education, individuals can break the cycle of poverty and achieve their goals, regardless of their socioeconomic status.

Moreover, education is essential for building a strong and stable society. It promotes critical thinking, creativity, and problem-solving skills, which are necessary for addressing the complex challenges that we face today.

However, it is important to recognize that not everyone has equal access to education. There are many individuals and communities around the world who lack the resources and opportunities needed to pursue their educational goals.

As such, it is our responsibility as a society to ensure that education is accessible to all. This includes providing adequate funding for schools, investing in teacher training and support, and implementing policies and programs that promote equal opportunity and diversity.

In summary, education is a vital component of society that has a profound impact on individuals, communities, and the world at large. It is up to us to recognize its importance and work towards ensuring that everyone has equal access to quality education.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇8

作为人教版八年级下册的英语教材，这份课件涉及到了许多有趣且具有教育意义的主题。以下将分别就其中的几个主题进行阐述。

一、健康主题

健康主题是人教版八年级下册英语中一个非常重要的主题，主要是帮助学生了解身体健康与保健知识，在学习英语的同时也关注健康。在这个主题下，有一些让人印象深刻的话题，例如：

1. 我们应该如何保持身体健康

2. 运动可以帮我们保持身体健康，你喜欢哪一种运动？

3. 我们每天该喝多少水

这些话题旨在提醒学生们人们生活中经常关注的健康方面，并且在英语学习中也与之相应地涉及了词汇和语法知识。通过这些课堂教学的内容，学生们将更好地认识到自己的健康与保健方面的需求，而且更好地利用英语语言来表达这些方面的内容。

二、旅游主题

旅游主题是人教版八年级下册英语中的另一个主题，它的出现是出于培养学生们出国旅游的兴趣，同时也通过旅游的主题，练习学生们的口语和写作方面的能力。以下是旅游主题中的一些话题范例：

1. 介绍你所在的城市，它有哪些美丽的景点

2. 你梦想去哪里旅游？为什么？

3. 是参加旅游团还是自由行更好？

通过这些话题的学习，学生们可以更好地认识世界各地的不同文化，了解其他国家的风俗与习惯，还能通过这些话题锻炼英语口语与写作方面的能力。此外，这些话题还可以作为促进学生们对本身国度与文化的认识的途径。

三、音乐主题

音乐主题是人教版八年级下册英语教材的另一个有趣的主题。在音乐主题中，学生将学习到与音乐有关的词汇、表达方法、歌曲和流行文化等方面的内容。以下是音乐主题中的一些范例话题，

1. 你喜欢听哪些类型的音乐？

2. 你认为什么样的歌曲会流行？

3. 你认为音乐中的歌词是更重要还是旋律更重要？

通过学习音乐主题，学生们将更好地了解音乐流派、文化和流行趋势等方面的内容，对时间和社会文化的变迁也会有一个更好的了解。同时，学生们还可以学习到如何运用英语语言来表达音乐方面的内容。

四、故事主题

人教版八年级下册英语教材的最后一个主题是故事主题。在这个主题下，学生将接触到不同的故事和文学作品，帮助学生更好的学习语言和文学。以下是这个主题中的范例话题：

1. 谈谈你最喜欢的儿童故事

2. 你最喜欢的图书是哪一本？为什么？

3. 你最喜欢哪一位作家？他们的书对你有哪些影响？

通过学习故事主题，学生们可以了解各种不同类型的故事和文学作品，并通过它们来提高听说读写方面的能力。您也可以结合播放相应的音乐、幻灯片和视频，通过多元化的方式来呈现故事主题培养学生的文学、语言和审美能力。

以上是人教版八年级下册英语教材的几个主题，每个主题具有他们自己的特点和教育意义。在日后的英语学习中，学生们可以根据这些主题所包含的方面来提升自己的学习水平与能力！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇9

主题：My Favorite Sport

As a sports enthusiast, I have a favorite sport that I enjoy playing and watching. That sport is basketball, a game that combines athleticism, strategy, and teamwork.

I first started playing basketball when I was in primary school. At first, I wasn't very good, but I quickly fell in love with the game. I enjoyed the feeling of running up and down the court, the challenge of trying to make a basket, and the excitement of playing with others. Over the years, I continued to play basketball and improve my skills.

In addition to playing basketball, I also enjoy watching professional basketball games. I am a fan of the NBA and often watch games on TV or online. My favorite team is the Golden State Warriors, and I admire players like Stephen Curry and Kevin Durant for their skill and dedication.

Basketball is not just a fun sport for me, it has also taught me many important lessons. One of the most important lessons I have learned is the importance of teamwork. In basketball, you have to work with your teammates to pass the ball, set screens, and make plays. This requires communication, trust, and a willingness to put the team's needs above your own. These skills carry over into other areas of life, such as school, work, and relationships.

Overall, basketball is my favorite sport because it is exciting, challenging, and teaches important lessons. I hope to continue playing and watching basketball for many years to come.

八年级英语下册课件

老师在正式上课之前需要写好本学期教学教案课件，现在着手准备教案课件也不迟。教案是教学中进行有效沟通的媒介。教师范文大全编辑今天为大家准备了一篇讲述“八年级英语下册课件”的好文章，请记得收藏我们的网站随时了解我们的最新资讯和消息！

八年级英语下册课件【篇1】

【主题一】My Favorite Hobby

I have a lot of hobbies, such as reading, playing sports, and listening to music. But my favorite hobby is drawing. I began drawing when I was just a little kid, and I fell in love with it right away. I enjoy creating different images and bringing my imagination to life.

When I draw, I feel relaxed and happy. It's like I enter into a different world where there are no rules or boundaries, and I can let my mind go wild. I usually draw in my free time, and every time I finish a drawing, I feel a sense of accomplishment.

Drawing helps me express my feelings and emotions in a positive way. Sometimes, I feel sad or anxious, and I don't know how to deal with it. But when I draw, I can let everything out, and it makes me feel better. Drawing also helps me improve my concentration and focus, which is essential for my studies.

In the future, I want to become a professional artist. I believe that the more I draw, the better I will become, and I will be able to make a living from my art. Even if I don't become famous, I will still be happy as long as I can continue to draw and express myself.

【主题二】My Dream Job

My dream job is to become a doctor. Ever since I was a little kid, I wanted to help people and make a difference in their lives. Being a doctor would allow me to do just that. I believe that being a doctor is one of the most honorable professions in the world.

I am currently studying hard to achieve my dream. I am taking science and math courses to prepare me for medical school. I know that the road to becoming a doctor is challenging, but I am willing to put in the work and effort to achieve my goals.

Being a doctor would allow me to help people in many different ways. I could diagnose and treat illnesses, save lives in emergency situations, and even prevent diseases through public education and awareness campaigns.

I know that being a doctor requires a lot of knowledge, skill, and dedication, but I believe that I have what it takes to become a successful doctor. I am passionate about helping others, and I think that this is the most important quality for a doctor to have.

In the future, I hope to work in a hospital or clinic where I can help people who are sick or injured. I believe that being a doctor is not just a job, but a calling. I am excited about my future career and look forward to making a difference in the world.

【主题三】My Travel Experience

I have always enjoyed traveling and exploring new places. One of my most memorable travel experiences was when I went to Japan with my family.

Japan is a beautiful country with a rich history and culture. We visited many famous landmarks, such as the Tokyo Tower, Mount Fuji, and the Imperial Palace. We also tried many delicious Japanese foods, such as sushi and ramen.

One of the highlights of our trip was when we visited Kyoto. Kyoto is a city that is known for its traditional architecture and beautiful temples. We visited the Kiyomizu-dera temple, which is a UNESCO World Heritage site. The temple was built in the 17th century and is famous for its wooden stage that overlooks the city.

Another memorable experience was when we went to Hiroshima. Hiroshima is a city that is famous for being the site of the atomic bombing during World War II. We visited the Peace Memorial Park and Museum, which was both moving and educational.

Traveling to Japan was an amazing experience that allowed me to learn about a different culture and way of life. I realized that there is so much in the world to explore and discover. I hope to have many more travel experiences in the future and continue to learn and grow as a person.

八年级英语下册课件【篇2】

教学目标：知识目标：1.bought, taught and thought

2.where did you do?

3.What did you do?

情感目标：When you play things, you must get good corporation with your players.

教学重点、难点：1.I am throwing the basketball.

教具、学具：some balls and story a tape and pictures

教学过程：

Review “ past tense” and “ future tense” verbs with a game. Write three columns of words on the blackboard and ask for volunteers to match them correctly. As each student makes a match, he or she says “Yesterday I___de. Today I___. Tomorrow I am going to__.

Add “buy” “teach” and “think” to your “today” column. Ask the students to give you the future tense for each verb and write them under your “tomorrow” column. Then write “taught” “thought” “bought” in a different order than the other two columns, and ask the students to guess how they match with the present-tense verbs. Point out the similarities in spelling “bought” “taught” “thought”

Pause after Number 1 in the student book. Review the story so far. Today Jenny and Li Ming went to the store buy some clothes for Li Ming to the pictures in the student book. Who are they talking to?

Note the word “player” in the lesson. A “players” plays something, such as a sport.

Play “What’s wrong?” to practice the new past tense verbs, and other tenses and verbs.

Play “spelling Bee” to practice spelling any vocabulary in this unit.

Tech “Oh, what did you do?” in Number 3 of the student book.

Number 2 in the activity book is a listening exercise. The students listen to each sentence on the audiotape and change it into the past—tense. Here’s how the audiotape goes:

板书：

Lesson4 Where did you go?

Where did you do?

What did you do?

习题：

? 写出buy teach think 的过去式。

? 用Where did you do?练习说话。

? 用What did you do?练习说话。

八年级英语下册课件【篇3】

说课稿

今天我说课的题目是外研版八年级英语下册第七模块的第一单元。She asked if I was practicing too much。

一·教材分析：

这节课是外研版八年级英语下册第七模块的第一单元。本模块话题是“旅游和休假”。通过对北海公园、武陵园景区的介绍和作者旅游经历的描述，激发学生对大自然的热爱，陶冶情操，同时唤起学生的保护环境意识。而且在语境中很自然地体验本单元的语法项目“转述现在进行时、疑问句和祈使句”。本模块紧紧围绕“旅游和休假””这一主题展开多方面的听、说、读、写的语言实践活动,使学生由简单到复杂,渐渐感知新的语言,并通过范例,引导学生总结、归纳，掌握完整的语法知识。

二·学情分析

初二下学期的学生经过一年多的学习，有了一定的英语基础知识和听说能力，正逐渐向读、写过渡，同时，学生们对英语学习还保持着较浓厚的兴趣。经过一年的新课程理念的熏陶及实践，有了初步的自主、合作、探究、实验的能力。

三·教学目标

1..知识目标：掌握本课的重点单词和短语；能转述别人表示疑问，指令或建议的话 2..技能目标： 以谈论“旅游经历”为话题展开教学活动，在旅游体验中轻松学习直接引语与间接引语的转变。

3.情感目标：加深对我国自然风景区的了解，培养学生对祖国大好河山的热爱。

四·教学重点·难点

1.掌握介绍“旅游和休假”的基本词汇，能叙述自己的经历。2.直接引语和间接引语的转换。

五·教学方法

1.任务型语言教学法 2.情景交际法 3.多媒体辅助

在本课的任务型语言教学中，我创造性地设计贴近学生生活实际的任务活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与，使学生通过观察、思考、讨论、交流和合作等方式，在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。

六·学法指导

本节课将在课堂活动中把学生分成四人小组的学习小组，让他们围绕着课堂任务分工合作，在活动中相互探讨、相互交流、相互合作，从而获得知识、技能和情感体验，发展他们的能力。

七.教学设计

课前延伸

1.课前读词：学生朗读本单元单词 2.每日播报：My favorite holiday

课内探究

STEP1、新课导入：向学生出示图片.小组竞赛的形式对图片进行描述。然后让学生观看北海公园的录像，通过录像调动学生的学习积极性，培养学生的兴趣，为以后的学习打下基础，使学生在轻松活泼的气氛中开始新课程。STEP2、听前说

通过free talk很自然的导入听力部分的学习。

然后让学生到黑板上展示自己的答案。

本环节是教材安排的任务型听力活动，目的是让学生在听音时抓住关键词，培养学生边听边做笔记的学习策略。STEP3、listen and read 1)整体听一边录音，选择最佳答案 2再听一遍录音，回答下面问题。3再听录音，注意语音语调。STEP4、听后说

1、work in group :分角色朗读对话。

2、compete the sentences 小组内讨论的形式

让学生在小组中交流、合作。易于激发学生的表达欲望，在后动中他们一定会努力表现自己，做到最好。把任务活动放在小组中进行，还可以解决“大班”难于操练的难题，学生在小组有更多的时间来运用英语表达自己的思想。STEP5、疑难解惑：

1、read the dialogue find out the difficulties and focus, then discuss with groups and solve the difficulties(小组自主互助学习)

2、对小组内不能解决的问题，老师适时点拨 STEP6 精讲点拨： STEP7 学以致用

在此环节我创设了四个情景，学生在学完对话的基础上，在创设的情景之中，进一步练习，强化知识的掌握。做上面这个活动可以丰富学生的事业和词汇，以便在对话中运用自如。STEP8 板书设计

STEP9 课堂小结 总结本节课的重点词组和短语及语法知识

课后提升

1、复习当天所学内容，整理学案，掌握词汇、语法。

2、将workbook相关联系完成

3、预习unit2的语法和词汇

由于教材中的环节较多，内容充实，因此我将最后的课后提升环节让学生既复习又预习起到承前启后的作用。

八年级英语下册课件【篇4】

暂时不能提供完整的1000字范文，但是可以提供一个主题范文的开头作为参考：

Lesson 1: My Summer Vacation

教学目标：

学习并运用词汇：vacation, trip, relaxing, exciting, explore等。

学习并运用句型结构：I had a great/good/terrible summer vacation. I went on a trip to… We visited… It was relaxing/exciting/tiring/fun.

学习并运用过去时态。

学习并运用描写性形容词。

教学重点：

学习并运用过去时态。

学习并运用描写性形容词。

教学难点：

正确运用过去时态句型描述自己的暑假经历。

教学准备：

课件、图片

教学过程：

Step 1: Warm-up

1. Greetings and review.

2.Ask students to share their own summer vacation experiences in pairs.

Step 2: Pre-reading

1. Introduce new vocabulary: vacation, trip, relaxing, exciting, explore.

2. Use the new words in sentences.

3. Ask students what they think students do during summer vacation.

Step 3: While-reading

1. Pre-viewing: Show a picture of a beach vacation. Ask students to predict what the article will be about.

2. Read the article "My Summer Vacation" silently. （30秒）

3. Read the article again and answer the questions:

a. Where did the writer go on summer vacation?

b. What did the writer do there?

c. How was the weather?

d. How did the writer feel about the vacation?

Step 4: Post-reading

1. Class discussion. Ask students if they can relate to the writer's experience. Did they have a similar or different vacation?

2. Writing: Ask students to write a short paragraph about their summer vacation using the new words and the sentence structure: I had a great/good/terrible summer vacation. I went on a trip to… We visited… It was relaxing/exciting/tiring/fun.

3. Pair work: Ask students to share their paragraphs with a partner and ask questions to each other about their vacations.

4. Group sharing: Ask some students to share their paragraphs with the whole class.

Step 5: Homework

1. Write a letter to a friend in English, sharing your summer vacation experiences.

2. Prepare a short oral presentation about your summer vacation for the next class.

以上是一个主题范文的教案开头部分，希望对你有帮助。

八年级英语下册课件【篇5】

八年级仁爱英语下册教案3篇

英语老师应抓住学生爱说爱闹、敢想敢说的心理特点，创造一个开放宽松的教学环境。要想上好一节英语课，每个初二八年级英语老师都应该在课前准备一份初二八年级英语教案。你是否在找正准备撰写“八年级仁爱英语下册教案”，下面小编收集了相关的素材，供大家写文参考！

八年级仁爱英语下册教案篇1

I’ll help to clean up the city park.

一、教学目标：

1. 语言知识目标：

1) 能掌握以下单词：clean up, city, cheer, cheer up, give out, volunteer, notice,...

2) 能掌握以下句型：① You could help to clean up the city parks. ....

3) 能了解以下语法：情态动词could, should的用法;用should或could提出建议并对别人的建议作出评价。如何表达主动提供帮助。

2. 情感态度价值观目标：

在授课过程中渗透助人就是助己，助人收获快乐的情感目标，使学生在谈论如何为别人提供帮助的对话中能意识到尽己所能，帮助他人，乐于奉献是一种良好的品德，培养学生为他人着想，热爱公益事业，乐于助人的优良品质。

二、教学重难点

1. 教学重点：

1) 掌握这些短语动词的构成和用法：clean up, city, cheer, cheer up, give out, ....

2) 学会提供帮助的基本句型：I’d like to work outside.I’ll help clean the city park.

2. 教学难点：学会提供帮助的基本句型

三、教学过程

Period 1(Section A 1a-2d)

Step 1 Warming up

1. 播放学生志愿者进行义务帮助别人的活动视频，通过询问他们以下问题来引导学生们了解社会上一些的志愿们进行的活动。

Step 2 New words Read new words on p9-10.

Step 3 Discussion

1. 1a. Look at the ways you could help others. Then list other ways.

2. Ss discuss with their partners and write the ways one could help others:

① Help plant trees by the river. ② Help clean up the city park.

③ Visit the old people in the old people’s home. ④ Help young kids to learn English.

Step 4 Listening

1. T: Tell Ss to read the sentences in the chart. Make sure they know the meaning of the sentences.

2. 1b. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the ways the boy and girl could help others.

Step 5 Pair work

1. Let Ss read the conversation in the picture.

2. 1c. Use the information in the chart of 1b to make other conversations.

A: I hope to work outside.

B: You could help to clean up the city parks. ........

3. Let some pairs act out their conversations.

Step 6 Listening

1. 2a:

T: A group of students are planning a City Park Clean-up Day. Listen and check (√) the things they are going to do to tell people about it.

1. Look at the pictures in 2a. Discuss the things they are going to do.

2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check the pictures.

3. Play the recording again to check the answers.

2. 2b:

1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do.

2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.

3. Play the recording again to check the answers.

Step 7 Pair work

1. 2c. Tell Ss to make a conversation using the information in 2a and 2b.

2. Let one pair to read out thei r conversation first.

e.g. A: We need to come up with a plan for the City Park Clean-Up Day.

B: Let’s have lunch first.

A: No, we need to start now. Clean-Up Day is only two weeks from now.

B: You’re right. We can’t put off making a plan. As we talk, I’ll write down all our ideas. Then we can decide which ideas are best.

A: Let’s make some notices, too. Then I’ll hand them out after school.

B: And we could each call up ten students and ask them to come.

3. Ss act the conversation in pairs. Ask some pairs to act out their con versations.

Step 8 Reading and Role-play 

1. Read the conversations and answer the two questions:

① Where’s Helen going to work this summer?

__________________________________

② What did Tom do to help the old people?

____________________________________

Answers: She’s going to work in an old people’s home.

Reading the newspaper or just talking to the old people.

2. Read the conversation after the teacher.

3. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.

Homework:

Teaching thought:

Period 2(Section A 3a-3c)

Step 1 Revision

1. Write down the phrases.

1. 打扫 ________ 2. 分发 ________ 3. 曾经 _______

4. (使)变得高兴 ________ 5. 义务做某事 _________________

6. 大打扫日 ______________ 7. 想出主意(办法)____________

2. Role-play

A: Hi, Tom. I’m making some plans to work in an old people’s home this summer.

B: Really? I did that last summer!

Step 2 New words Read new words on p11.

Step 3 Reading

1.Tell Ss to read the article in 3a quickly and try to find the answers to these questions:

1. What does Mario love?

2. What does Mary love? 

3. What do Mario and Mary volunteer to do?

Ss read the article quickly and try to answer the questions:

Answers: 1. He loves animals.

2. She loves reading books.

3. Mario volunteers at animal hospital and Mary helps kids learn to read.

2.3b: Read the article again and answer the questions.

1. Why does Mario volunteer to help others?

2. Why does Mary volunteer to help others?

3. What does Mario say about volunteering?

4. What does Mary say about volunteering?

Answers: 1. Because he believes it can help him to get his future dream job.

2. Because she can do what she loves to do and help others.

3. He gets such a strong feeling of satisfaction when he sees the animals get better and the look of joy on their owners’ face.

4. Volunteering is a dream come true for her.

Homework Make sentences with these words.

help (to) do; want to do; learn to do; decide to do; how to do; volunteer to do

Teaching thought:

Period 3(Grammar Focus-4c)

Step 1 Revision

Complete the sentences.

Mario and Mary ____ ___ several hours each week __ ____ others. Mario wants __ ___ an animal doctor. He _________ at an animal hospital. He wants __ _____ more about ____ __ care for animals.

Mary is a book lover. She could read by herself __ ___ ____ of four. Last year, she decided __ ___ ___ for a volunteer after-school _______ program. Mary still works there once a week __ ____ kids _____ __ read. Volunteering here is a dream come true for her. She can what she _____ ___ ___and helps others at the same time.

Can you tell something about Mary to us?

Answers: give up, to help, to be, volunteers, to learn, how to, at the age, to try out, reading, to help, learn to, loves to do

Step 2 Grammar focus

1. 阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。

Step 3 New words Look at the big screen and learn the new words and expressions:

Step 4 Practice

1. 4a: Fill in the blanks with the phrasal verbs in the box.

Tell Ss to read the sentences in 4a and try to fill in the blanks with the phrasal verbs in the box.

Answers: put off; call up; come up with; cheer up; put up; hand out; give out

2. 4b: Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in the box.

Check the answers with the Ss.

3. 4c: Complete the sentences with your own ideas. Use infinitives.

Homework Make sentences with the phrases below.

put up, hand out, call up, cheer up, come up with, give out, put off

Teaching thought:

Period 4(Section B 1a-2e)

Step 1 Warming up and revision

1. Daily greeting. 2. 复习动词不定式的用法，并完成相关任务。

3. Check the homework. Let some Ss report “Who’s the … in class?”

Step 2 Presentation

1. Present the new words on the big screen and learn the new words together.

1) repair v. 修理;修补 2) fix v. 安装;使固定

3) give away 赠送;捐赠 4) wheel n. 车轮;轮子

2. Ss read and try to remember the new words.

3. Work on 1a and match the sentences with the similar meaning.

4. Check the answers with the Ss.

Step 3 Writing . Work on 1b

1. Ask one student read the phrases and the nouns. Tell Ss to match the phrasal verbs with the nouns. Then make sentences with the phrases.

2. Let some Ss come to the blackboard and write down their sentences. Then check together.

Step 4 Listening . Work on 1c:

1. Tell Ss to look at the pictures in 1c. Tell them the boy in the pictures is Jimmy. He’s a good boy. He likes to help others. What is he doing now? Listen to the tapes and number the pictures.

2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and number the pictures.

3. Check the answers:

Step 5 Role-play

1. Work in pairs. Role-play a conversation between Jimmy and the reporter. Use the information in 1c and 1d.

2. Let two students make a model for the Ss.

3. Ss practice their conversations

4. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss.

Step 6 Reading

Fast Reading

1. T: Now let’s work on 2b. First, let’s read the questions and make sure we know the meanings of all the questions. Then read the passage quickly and find the answers to the questions.

1) What kind of letter is it? 2) Who wrote the letter to Miss Li? Why?

2. Ss read the letter quickly and try to find the answers to the two questions.

八年级仁爱英语下册教案篇2

教学目标

一、知识与技能

1. 掌握重点词汇和短语：do the dishes，take out the rubbish，fold your clothes，sweep the floor，make your bed，clean the living room

2. 理解并掌握重点句型：Could you please…? Could I …?

3. 能听懂有关做家务和日常活动的对话。

二、过程与方法

采用情境教学法，调动学生的积极性，引导他们积极参与课堂。

三、情感态度与价值观

了解各种家务，能发现要做的家务并积极主动地去做。

教学重点

能用本课的重点词汇和句型对家务作出委婉请求。

教学难点

能抓住录音中的关键词。

教法导航

课上引导学生积极参与课堂活动，老师少讲，鼓励学生多练。

学法导航

加强小组合作学习，积极回答问题。

教学准备

图片，录音机，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the students as usual.

Step 2 Lead-in

T：Good morning，boys and girls! I am always very busy on weekends. So my daughter often helps me with the housework. Do you often help your mother do the chores at home? (Write “chores” on blackboard and explain it.) Here “chore” means housework. Could you please tell me what chores you do at home?

S1：I often clean my room.

S2：I wash my clothes and fold my clothes.

S3：I clean the window.

S4：I make my bed and sweep the floor.

S5：I clean the living room.

T：Well， you are good boys and girls! We should try to be helpful and do some chores at home.

Step 3 New words and expressions

Ask the students to look at the picture on Page 17.

T：Look at the picture on page 17. What can you see?

S1：Peter and his mother.

S2：The dustbin is full.

S3：The floor is dirty.

S4：...

T：So there are a lot of chores to do，right? Help students to learn the following phrases about chores：clean the living room; do the dishes; sweep the floor; make the bed; take out the trash; fold the clothes

Step 4 Presentation

T：If you want to ask somebody to do chores，how can you ask in English?

S1：Can you do the chores?

S2：Could you please do the chores?

T：Which one do you think is better?

students：The second one.

T：Yes. We should say“Could you please do the chores?”instead of other ways because it sounds very polite. Write “Could you please ...?” on the blackboard.

Step 5 Pair work

T：In the picture，the mom asks the son to do some chores. What does she say?

S：Peter，could you please take out the trash?

T：Good! Today，we’ll learn how to make polite requests with could. It is very important to be polite in our life. Now work in pairs. Imagine you are the mom and the son in the picture. Ask your partner to do the chores that you see.

First ask two students to read the sample conversation in activity 1c. Then students make their own conversations. Call several pairs to demonstrate their conversations to the class.

Step 6 Listening

T：You will here a conversation between Peter and his mother. What kind of chores do Mom and Peter do? Check Mom or Peter.

Play the recording twice. For the first time students focus on the chores Mom does; the second time，focus on the chores Peter does. Then check the answers.

Step 7 A little game

Find out the best helper at home.

T：Do you often help your parents do the chores? Now let’s choose the best helper at home. First please write down all the chores from your memory on a piece of paper. Then check each chore you do at home. The one who check the most chores will be the best helper at home.

Step 8 Group work

T：Imagine we are going to clean our classroom this afternoon. You need someone to help you do some things. Think of the things you need to do and make polite requests to your partners. You may find these phrases useful.

Show the following phrases on the screen：carry some water，clean the desks，clean the chairs，clean the windows，clean the blackboard，turn off the lights，take down the old pictures，put up the new pictures，sweep the floor. After a few minutes，call several groups to show their conversations.

Step 9 Presentation

T：I can’t find my pen. But I have to write something now. What can I do?

S：You can borrow a pen from others.

T：But what should I say?

S：Can I use your pen?

T：But that doesn’t sound very polite. Any other idea?

S：Could I please use your pen? (Write the sentence on the blackboard)

T：Good! That’s a very polite way.

Step 10 Listening

Ask the students to look at the picture on Page 18. Then say：Look at the picture. That’s Peter and his father. Peter asks his father if he can do four things. Look at the chart in activity 2a. What are the four things? Ask a student to read the things aloud.

T：What does his father say? Now please listen to the tape and check ‘yes’ or ‘no’ in the chart. Play the tape twice. For the first time，they only listen. The second time，they check “yes” or “no”. Then check the answers with the whole class.

T：Why Peter’s father say no? What are his reasons? Let’s listen to the conversation again. Draw lines to the reasons in the chart. Before play the tape，ask a student to read the reasons given. Then play the tape. If necessary，play it again. Check the answers.

Help students to summarize different ways of answering the question “Could I...?” Yes，you can / I guess so / Oh， yeah / Sure. No， you can’t. ... / Sorry， but ...

Step 11 Pair work

T：Now look at activity 2c. Work in pairs. Student A is Peter who asks if he can do things. Student B is Peter’s father who says “yes” or “no”. If you say “no”，give a reason.

First get two students to read the sample conversation. Then students make their own conversations.

Step 12 Group work

T：Imagine we’ll have a self-study class this afternoon. You would like to do many different things. How will you ask your teacher for permission? Please do it in groups of four. One will be the teacher，and the others will be the students，make conversation like this：

S：Could I please listen to music?

T：No you can’t.

S：Could I please go to play basketball?

T：Sorry，you have to stay in class.

S：Could I please draw pictures?

T：Yes，you can.

After that，get several groups to demonstrate their conversations to the class.

Step 13 Homework

1. Suppose you are having a party，and you need more drinks and snacks. But you can’t leave the house. Ask your classmates for help. Write a dialogue between you and your classmate with “Could I please ...?”and “Could you please ...?”

2. Understand，read and role play the conversation in 2d.

课堂作业

1. ---Could you please s the floor?

---Yes，sure.

2. ---Could you please do the d ?

---Sorry，I can’t. I have to do my homework.

3. 我每天早上都整理床铺。

I ________ the ________ every morning.

4. 我父母让我晚上不要在外面呆得太晚。

My parents asked me not to ________ ________ late at night.

5. Could I watch the football match? (作肯定回答)

________，you ________.

参考答案：1. sweep 2. dishes 3. make， bed 4. stay out 5. Yes，can.

教学反思

多媒体能使整个教学过程表现为声、图、文并茂，使声音、图像、文字的呈现更自然。为此，在课堂上，教师应该为学生创造学习氛围，让学生时常有成功感和成就感，以便进一步激发学生学习的内在动力。在本堂课中应注意让发音较标准的同学多朗读，让思维敏捷的同学先回答问题，让善于观察的同学多纠正错误，让反应慢的同学多回答低难度问题。尽量使每个同学多动脑、多动口、多动手。

八年级仁爱英语下册教案篇3

教学目标

一、知识与技能

1.学习并掌握现在完成时的用法，学习有关音乐的词汇。

2.阅读短文获得正确信息的能力。

3.能够通过彼此交流了解歌曲、歌手、乐队的信息并能作评论。能够运用阅读策略来获得文章大意。

4. 掌握现在完成时的用法，学习有关音乐的词汇。

5. 培养学生的听力能力。

二、过程与方法

阅读，感受，模仿，实践。

三、情感态度与价值观

激发学生对音乐的热爱。

教学重点

1.学习并掌握现在完成时的用法，学习有关音乐的词汇。

2.阅读短文获得正确信息的能力。

教学难点

能够运用阅读策略来获得文章大意，从而提高阅读效率。

教法导航

激励学生认真阅读，认真思考。

学法导航

通过阅读，模仿学习新知识。

教学准备

图片，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the students as usual.

Step 2 Warming up

Show some pictures about singers and musicians. Ask and answer：

Who is your favorite singer or musician? Why do you like him or her?

Step 3 New words

Learn the new words：pop，rock，band.

The students read the words one by one. Then they have a dictation.

Step 4 Listening

The students go through the sentences in 1b.

1b, Listen to a conversation between Alex and Dave. Write A for Alex and D for Dave next to each opinion.

____ The Toms must be popular.

____ The Toms play pop music.

____ The Toms’ music sounds more like rock.

____ Listening to The Toms is a good way to wake up.

1c, Listen again. Take notes.

Listen for a third time and check the answers.

Step 5 Speaking

1d, Ask your friends and parents what kind of music they listen to and why. How does the music make them feel?

Ask the students to make a conversation like：

A：What kind of music do you listen to?

B：I listen to pop music.

A：Why do you listen to it?

B：I like it because….

A：How does the music make them feel?

B：It makes me relaxed.

Step 6 Discussion & Reading

2a, Discuss the questions with a partner.

1.Do you have a favorite singer or band?

2. Do you have a favorite song?

3. What facts do you know about your favorite singer，band or song?

Reading guidance:

1. Read the passage and make notes or underline the main idea of the text.

2. After reading，write a short summary in your own words.

在讨论的过程中，教授新单词。

Step 7 Reading tasks

Read the passage and complete the fact sheet.

Country Music Fact Sheet.

Where it is from：___________________

What kind of music it is：_____________

A famous country music place in Nashville：_______________

A famous country music singer：____________

The number of records he has sold：_____________

2c Read the passage again and underline the main ideas. Then use the underlined text to write short answers to the questions below.

First paragraph：

Who is Sarah? Where is she from? What does she like?

Second paragraph：

What is country music? What is country music about?

Third paragraph：

What is Sarah’s dream? Who is Garth Brooks?

Step 8 Writing

2d, Use the notes you made in 2c to write a short summary of the passage. Write no more than 100 words.

示例：

Sarah is an American girl. She likes country music. She is a fan of country music. Country music is a traditional music from the southern states of America. Many songs are about modern life in the US，such as the importance of money and success. Sarah’s dream is to go to Nashville because Garth Brooks is there. She likes to listen to his songs. Garth is one of the most successful musicians in American history.

课堂作业

1. Ask the students to write the following phrases and words.

used to过去常常 fight over争吵 return home回家

on the radio在收音机上 make sb. do sth.使某人做某事 think about考虑

come to realize逐渐认识到 ever since自从…以来

the home of…的家 such as例如 belong to属于

be kind to sb.对某人友好 trust one another互相信任 remind sb. that…使某人想起

have been to去过 do research on研究 hope to do sth. 希望做某事

2. 单选题

1. ---Where is John?

---He ______ the science lab.

A. has gone to B. has been to C. went to

2. ---Where is my sister， mum?

---She ___ to the library. She will be back soon.

A. has been B. is going C. has gone D. will go

3. ---May I speak to Lin Tao?

---Sorry，he is not in.

---He ______ to Changsha.

A. has been B. has gone C. went

参考答案：1. A 2. C 3. B

教学反思

教师一定要想办法使阅读课变得生动有趣，并且教授给学生一定的阅读策略。另外，掌握住“practice makes perfect”的原则，使学生在训练中逐步掌握本课的重点。

八年级英语下册课件【篇6】

I'm sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot provide you the specific courseware content of "人教版八年级下册英语课件". However, I can give you a sample English essay on a related topic with keywords: "teenagers", "challenges and opportunities", and "technology".

Title: The Challenges and Opportunities of Technology for Teenagers

The world we live in today is dramatically different from the previous generations. With the development of technology, the way we communicate, learn, and interact with the world has changed significantly. Teenagers, in particular, are facing a unique set of challenges and opportunities as they adapt to this digital age. While technology offers many benefits, it also brings a range of new obstacles. This essay intends to discuss the challenges and opportunities that technology presents to teenagers.

First, the advancement of technology has made communication more accessible than ever before. Social media, messaging services, and video calls provide teenagers with new ways to connect with their family and friends regardless of distance. However, this endless connectivity has also created a never-ending stream of information that can cause distraction and addiction. Many teenagers struggle with balancing their online and offline life, leading to negative impacts on their mental health.

In addition, technology has revolutionized the education system. Students can access diverse resources online and receive personalized learning opportunities. Many schools are adopting digital platforms to enhance student engagement and academic performance. However, the digital divide also exists in some areas and can lead to unequal access to education. Moreover, the temptation to cheat or plagiarize with readily available online resources is a real issue for students, which can diminish the value of their degrees and future prospects.

Another significant challenge teenagers face is cyberbullying. Social media platforms provide users with anonymity and a broader reach than traditional bullying. Online harassment can lead to significant emotional distress, social isolation, and even suicidal thoughts. The psychological and long-term effects of cyberbullying are severe and cannot be overlooked.

Despite the challenges, technology offers plenty of opportunities for teenagers. It has made entertainment options more accessible, giving teenagers a chance to explore their creative talents and interests. Social media also provides a platform for young people to voice their opinions, participate in discussions, and engage in activism. Online communities can provide valuable support, resources, and mentorship for teenagers who may feel isolated.

In conclusion, technology provides teenagers with a variety of challenges and opportunities. It has influenced how they communicate, learn, and express themselves. While technology presents many benefits, it is vital to recognize the risks that come with it and educate teenagers on how to use it responsibly. By understanding the challenges and opportunities that technology offers, we can ensure that teenagers navigate this digital age safely and successfully.

最新八年级上册英语课件

下面是小编为您精心挑选的和“八年级上册英语课件”相关的内容。老师提前规划好每节课教学课件是少不了的，每个老师都需要将教案课件设计得更加完善。做好教案课件的前期准备工作，这样才能实现预期的教学目标设计。我们会对该领域重要事件和趋势进行前瞻性分析供您了解未来走向！

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

第1课时 Section A 1a-2c

教学目标

一、知识与技能

1、 掌握句型：—Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains. —Did you go with anyone? —Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t.

2、 熟练掌握本课短语：stay at home, went to New York City, went to summer camp, went to the mountains, went to the beach, visited museums, visited my uncle.

二、过程与方法

通过例子Who went to the movies last Saturday?引出动词go的过去式went，从而引出一般过去时态。大面积操练，采用学生提出间题，学生解决问题，借助多媒体来提高学生的主动性。

三、情感、态度与价值观

学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。

教学重点

掌握句型：—Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains/ New York City/ beach /summer camp. —Did you go with anyone? —Yes，I did. / No, I didn’t.

教学难点

掌握用过去时谈论假期的活动。

教法导航

通过看图、看视频、听录音、问答、讨论等方法学习谈论能力和表达愿望。

学法导航

通过看、听、说等各种途径，以小组合作的形式，主动探求知识，锻炼自主学习能力。

教学准备

图片，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the class.

Step 2 Lead in

Ask questions about what students did last Saturday.

（1）Who went to the movies last Saturday? Point to one student who raises his or her hand. Sara went to the movies last Saturday. Repeat．Write this sentence on the board.

Underline the word went．

（2）Ask：Who visited a friend last Saturday？Point to one student who raises his or her hand．Carlos visited a friend last Write this sentence on the board. Underline the word “visited”．

Point to the words went and visited in the sentences on the board．Say：We use these words to talk about things that happened in the past. Write these pairs of words on the board：go–went, visit –visited. Ask: Can you point out the words that talk about the past?

This activity introduces the key vocabulary．

Step 3 Practice

1、 Focus attention on the picture．Ask: What can you see？Say: Each picture shows something a person did in the past．Name each activity and ask students to repeat: went to the mountains, went to New York City, went to summer camp, visited my uncle，stayed at home, went to the beach, visited museums.

2．Point to the numbered list of activities．Say each one again and ask the students to repeat．

3．Now, please match each phrase with one of the pictures．Say：Write the letter of each picture next to the name of the activity．Point to the sample answer.

4．Check the answers.

Step 4 Listening

1．Point to the picture on the screen. Say: look at Picture A，Where did Tina go on vacation? Yes，she went to the mountains．

Ask:What did the person do in each scene? Say: There are three conversations. Play the recording the first time.

2、 The people talk about what they did on vacation．Listen to the recording and write numbers of the names in the right boxes in the picture. Please write only 5 numbers. Point out the sample answer next to the picture showing went to the mountain. Play the recording a second time.

3．Correct the answers．

Step 5 Pair work

Point out the example conversation. Ask two students to read the dialogue to the class. Say the dialogue in the picture with a student，Do a second example to the class. Then say：Now work with a partner, make conversations about the people in the pictures．As they talk，move around the classroom monitoring their work. Offer language or pronunciation support as needed．

Step 6 Listening

1.2a. Ask: Where did the people go on vacation? And then ask the students to listen carefully and fill in the chart. Play the recording twice and then check the answers.

2、 Look at the form carefully, ask: Did the people do the following things? Then ask the

students to listen carefully and check the anwers. Play twice and ask the students to check the answers in pairs and then check the answers together.

Step 7 Role play

Look at the form again carefully and make role-play conversations among Grace, Kevin and Julie. Ask one or two groups to show the conversation first and then get the students to practice in groups.

八年级上册英语课件 篇2

Lesson 49

教学目标

学会口头邀请和应答的常用基本用语。

1. A: Would you like to …

B: Certainly. I’d love to.

2. A: I hope you can …

B. Thanks. I’d love to.

教学用具

录音机，投影仪

教学方法

将对话放入真实的生活情景中演练。

教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

复习一些相关的单词。

Step 2 Presentation

可组一组对话：

1. A: Next Sunday is my birthday. Can you come to my party?

B: Oh, thanks very much. I’d love to.

A：I hope both Jim and you will come.

B: OK.

2. A: It’s a fine day today, isn’t it?

B: Yes, Why?

A: Would you go out for a walk with me?

B: I’d love to.

A: I hope Jim will go with us, too.

老师可先自问自答，也可先和程度较好的同学先练习，然后组织全班练习。

Step 3 Drill

让学生练习以上对话。

听第一段录音2遍，请同学们复述（最好用英文）对话中的有关内容，了解这段出现了几个人物，说的是什么事情。

教：birthday: the day when you were born

Step 4 Presentation

听第二段录音2遍，请同学们复述第二段电话的发生环境和结果。并说出与第一段有什么不同的地方。（第二段Ann事先忘了告诉Bruce）。

打开书，教师解释：be going to, forget to do

be going to 将要干…

1. I’m going to have a party next Sunday.

2. We are going to Xiangshan Park.

3. Are they going to have a football match tomorrow? Yes, they are.

forget to do 忘记要做的事

1. Don’t forget to tell Jim.

2. I forgot to tell you.

3. Don’t forget to read the text tonight.

4. Don’t forget to watch football match.

5. I forgot to bring my homework.

Step 5 Practice

跟读录音一至两遍。

同学们两两做pairs work, 练习第一段和第二段，直到较熟悉为止。

根据已熟练的知识，请同学们两两设计一段真实的对话，用真实的姓名进行表演，全部或部分用上本课重点词语。（此环节可找些学习较好、接受能力强的学生先演练）

Step 6 Consolidation

做第三部分。教单词：invite: ask sb to come to home film

用习题精选中的题做反馈练习。

Step 7 Exercises in class

1.-Would you like____(go) with us?

-Yes, I____.

2. Would you like ____ sweets?

3.1 remember ____ her at the conference last year.

4. Don’t forget ____ the letters.

Keys: 1. to go, ’d love to. 2.some. 3. meeting. 4. to post.

Choose the right answers.

( )l. The party is going to start ____ half past seven.

A. at B. on C. to D. in

( )2. I hope ____ help me with my English.

A. you to B. him to C. you will D. will you

( )3. Don’t forget ____ the door when you leave. It’s snowy this evening.

A. close B. to close C. closed D. closing

( )4. Thank you for ____ me to your party.

A. invite B. invited C. inviting D. to invite

( )5. ____ great the party is ! ____ beautiful presents!

A. What, What B. How, How C. What, How D. How, What

( )6. There is going to ____ a party at Xiao Ming’s home.

A. have B. be C. has D. is

( )7.-I’m going to Hong Kong. Didn’t you know?

-____. Jim told me bout it.

A. No. I did B. No, I didn’t

C. Yes, I didn’t D. Yes, I did

Answers: 1.A 2.C 3.B 4.C 5.D 6.B 7.D

Step 8 Homework

1. Try to use your own words to make up new dialogues.

2. Make sentences with the following phrases.

Part 1

1) come to 2) would love/like to… 3)forget to do/doing 4) hope (a sentence) 5)be sure (a sentence).

Part 2

6)What a! 7)be going to do/be

Part 3

8)thank for sth / doing sth 9)be free 10) here be …for sb

Blackboard handwriting

Can you …. birthdayI’d love to… inviteI hope you… filmWould you like to …?Don’t forget to …

Lesson 50，52第一、二部分（一或两课时）

教学目标

学会打电话常用的基本用语，你要找的人在和不在两种情况的电话用语。不在的情况下，要会填写电话留言条。

别人邀请你去他家，你有事不能去，如何客气、婉转的拒绝。

会正确应用：May I speak to..., please?

Hold on, please.

…speaking.

Can I take a message?等等。

教学用具

录音机，投影仪，实物电话

教学方法

将对话放入真实的生活情景中演练

教学建议

建议Lesson 50和Lesson 52一起课讲。

教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

让同学们复习以前接触的电话常用语。可组一组对话，如：

A: Hello, this is Kate. Who is it?

B: This is Hanmei. Kate, would you like to come to my home and do homework with me? I want you to help me with my English.

A: Ok. I’d love to, when?

B: What about 3 o’clock?

A: All right, see you then.

B: See you.

注：类似的一组对话可以复习到：This is…, Who is it? Would you like to…等以前的知识。

复习反意问句。让学生们先观察以下句子。它们有些什么共同点。

It starts at 4:30, doesn’t it?

It rains every day here, doesn’t it?

He works very hard, doesn’t he?

She gets up early every day, doesn’t she?

练习

Ann studies very hard, ________ she?

Miss Gao loves us, ________ she?

Li Lei is a good student, __________ she?

It’s a fine day, ________ it?

They all like English very much, _______ they?

Step 2 Presentation

Teacher: Do you like giving phone calls to your classmates or friends? If yes, what would you say first?

1) Hello.

2) May I speak to××?

3) This is ××speaking!

4) Who is it? And so on.

You ask the students to understand what to say, and what the purpose of the phone call is.

听第一段录音2遍，请同学们复述（最好用英文）电话中的有关内容，了解这段话发生的环境和结果。

听第二段录音2遍，请同学们复述第二段电话的发生环境和结果。并说出与第一段有什么不同的地方。（第二段要找的人没在）。

打开书，教师解释：take a message和give the message

Step 3 Practice

跟读录音一至两遍。

同学们两两做pairs work, 练习第一段和第二段，直到较熟悉为止。

Step 4 presentation

教单词：telephone: phone double: two times

老师事先和一位同学准备好Lesson 52 对话，双方拿电话机在班上展示。让这位同学在投影片填好电话留言卡，其他同学在老师事先印好的电话留言卡上填写， 然后老师在投影仪上订正。提醒学生填写电话留言卡要简单扼要，它的读者只有一个人。如果大都知道Zhang Yujing 是谁，用一句祈使句即可。如：本课的电话卡message内容：

She called you. Please call her.

打开书，跟读录音，pair work，直到较熟悉为止。

Step 5 Practice:

1．根据已熟练的知识，请同学们两两设计一段真实的对话，用真实的姓名和实物电话进行表演，全部或部分用上本课重点词语。（此环节可找些学习较好、接受能力强的学生先演练）

2．教师随机叫同学们进行对话练习，学生可自主选择本人接听或非本人接听两种情况进行对话。

Step 6 Consolidation

Rewrite the sentences without changing their meanings.

1. I’m afraid I may be a little late.

I’m afraid ______ I ______ ______a little late.

2. She isn’t here right now.

She is ______ ______ ______ ______.

3. Can I take her a message?

Can I take a message ______ ______?

4. I’m very sorry, but I can’t come.

I’m ______ I can’t come.

5. I’ll get her the message.

I’ll ______ the message ______ ______.

Answers: 1. maybe, will be 2. away at the moment 3. for her 4. afraid 5. give, to her

Complete the dialogue

A. She is out at the moment.B. What's your phone number?C. You are welcome.D. Hold on for a moment, please.E. Yes.

A: Hello, could I speak to Mary, please?

B: 1 I'm sorry 2 .Can I take a message?

A: 3 , Please ask her to call me, please.

B: OK, 4 .

A: 62578181. Thank you.

B. 5

Keys: 1.D 2.A 3.E 4.B 5.C

Step 7 Homework

将课上两两做的pairs work整理成系统完整的邀请对话，内容不限，可以是邀请聚会，去你家做客，一起去买东西等。此作业可以让学生2人或3人一组共同做一份。

Blackboard handwriting

May I speak to …please? Hold on, please. ... speaking. I’d love to. Can I take a message? Could I speak to …please? I’m afraid he / she isn’t here. Thank you for doing… I’ll give her / him the message. I’m sorry, but I cannot…

Lesson 51，52第三部分（一或两课时）

教学目标

了解英语国家的风俗。孩子之间的一种非正式的邀请。如：邀请到家里做客或聚会等。一般采用口头或打电话的形式，以及聚会上的一些礼仪，礼貌用语等。

会正确应用这些话语：We’re ready! That’s the bell. Where is everyone? Here is your present. Oh, thank you. There is no time to think. Thank you, everyone. Here is your birthday present. I hope you like it. 等。

教学用具

录音机，投影仪

教学建议

以学生阅读、讨论和听录音为主。

教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

1．复习一些电话用语和邀请用语。

2．分小组讨论Pre-read的两个问题，以讨论第一个问题为主。然后让小组代表谈谈中国人过生日的习俗。可从两方面谈：主要活动和主要传统食品。

Step 2 Presentation

老师事先根据课文拟好一些问题，发给学生。以下问题可作参考。

1. Is there sandwiches at the party?

A. Yes. B. No.

2. Did Li Lei come to Ann’s party?

A. Yes. B. No.

3. Did Li Lie give Ann present?

A. Yes. B. No.

4. Did the twins come to the party?

A. Yes. B. No.

5. Did they give Ann any present?

A. Yes. B. No.

6. Did Jim come here?

A. Yes. B. No.

7. Did Jim give Ann present?

A. Yes. B. No.

8. Do you know how old Ann is?

A. Yes. B. No.

Step 3 Practice

1．然后放录音，放两遍，让学生做以上练习。

教单词：ready sandwich candle

让学生自己读 doorbell present smile

2．可再放一遍录音，回答以下问题。

1）What time did Ann’s party begin?

2）How many friends came to Ann’s party?

3）What present did the friends give Ann?

4）Did Ann like them?

3．让学生复述课文。可给一些提示词。

half past four sandwich be ready candles feel happy birthday present

4．最后再听一遍课文，如有可能，当堂背诵。

可简单讲解一下词语。

5．学习Lesson 52的第三部分，方法同上。

Step 4 Consolidation

Fill in the blanks with the proper from in the given words.

1. Everything ______ (be) ready for Ann’s birthday party now.

2. ______ Ann ______ (feel) happy last Sunday?

3. When I ______ (run) to the door. I ______ (find) him outside.

4. I must go now. There’s no time ______ (think).

5. Thank you for ______ (invite) me to your party.

6. Listen! The doorbell ______ (ring).

Answers: 1.is 2.Did, feel 3.ran, found 4.to think 5.inviting 6.is ringing

Choose the right answers:

( ) 1. We are going to ____ Ann’s 14th birthday next Sunday.

A. have B .celebrate C .enjoy D .give

( )2. Ann hopes ____ to her birthday party this Sunday.

A. us come B.US to come C. our coming D. we will come

( )3. ____ beautiful present! I like it very much.

A. How B. What a C. What D. How a

( )4. We gave her the presents and said ‘Happy birthday’____ her!

A. to B. with C. at D. for

( )5. I saw ____ but a pencil in the pencil - box.

A. everything B. something C. anything D. nothing

( )6. The teacher can’t find Kate. She ____ be at school.

A. mustn’t B. can’t C. may not D. needn’t

( )7. What are they doing? They are ____ their cat.

A. looking B. looking for C. finding D. finding out

Answers: 1.B 2.D 3.B 4.A 5.D 6.B 7.B

Step 5 Homework

1. Retell the text in the past tense.

2. Make up a story based on Ann’s birthday.

3. Make a birthday card.

4. Make a dialogue (On the phone)

Blackboard handwriting

be ready feel happy That’s the doorbell. Happy Birthday Here is / are your present(s). sb’s fourteenth birthday …nothing but … turn … over I don’t know what present it is.

八年级上册英语课件 篇3

一、知识与技能

1、 掌握重点句型：How was your vacation？Where did you go? Did you go out with anyone？

2、 理解并掌握几个不定代词：anyone, everyone, something, anything, everything, nothing的用法。

3、 熟练运用句型：Did you …？

二、过程与方法

学生通过上一节课的学习，对where引导的过去时态的特殊疑问句已经掌握，能自然地与本课知识相衔接。让学生回忆他们的假期情况，引出一般过去时态的句型，并且进行大量练习。采用学生提出问题，学生解决问题，借助多媒体来提高学生的主动性。

三、情感→←、态度与价值观

教育学生渗透合作精神和社会公德意识。

教学重点

掌握句型：Where did you go on vacation? Did you go out with anyone? Did you buy anything? Did you visit anyone?

教学难点

能用句型Did you …？提出尽可能多的有关过去假期的问题。

教法导航

创设情境，让学生自己总结规律，思考，讨论，最后得出结论。创设英语语言氛围，使学生能较快地融入到英语语言学习的情景中来。

学法导航

自主学习，独立思考，小组讨论，同桌合作，完成学习任务。

教学准备

视频，图片，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the class as usual.

Step 2 Revision

Ask the students to look at the picture on Page 1 and make conversations, using the sentence pattern: —Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains. —Did you go with anyone? —Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t.

Step 3 Role play

The teacher acts as Rick and ask a student to act as Helen and practice the dialogue of 2d on Page 2. Then ask the students to practice in pairs and finally ask two or three pairs to act it out.

Step 4 Grammar Focus

Review the grammar box. Ask students to say the questions and answers.

Review the difference between regular –ed past tense verbs (stay –stayed, visit-visited) and irregular past tense verbs (go –went, buy-bought)。 Then get the students to ask and answer the questions and answers in pairs.

Step 5 Game

Ask one student to act as the teacher and ask some individual students questions. Get as many students as possible to be the teacher.

Then ask the students to pay attention to the words: no one, anyone, everyone, something, nothing, anything.

Step 6 Practice

3a Fill in the blanks with the words in the box and practice the conversation.

3b Fill in the blanks in the e-mail mestudentsage with the words in the box.

After checking the answers, get the students to read them aloud.

Step 7 Group work

Make a survey. Ask the students to make a survey by asking the questions about their last vacation: Did you eat anything at a reastaurant? Did you read anything interesting? …。Make sure the students practice the dialogues again and again and write down the results in the form. Then ask some students to report their results.

Step 8 Homework

Ask your classmates as many questions about their last vacation as possible.

课堂作业

Fill in the blanks.

1、 Where ___ you ___ (go) on vacation?

2、 I ___ (go) to New York City.

3、 —___ you ___ (go) out with ______? —No. No one was here. Everyone was on vacation.

4、 —Did you buy _______ special? —Yes, I _______ (buy) something for my father.

5、 —___ was the food? –Everything tasted really good!

参考答案：1. did, go 2. went 3. Did, go, anyone 4. anything, bought 5. How

教学反思

为了避免语法学习的枯燥，本课设计了几个小组活动和小游戏，让学生在不知不觉中就掌握了知识，学习效果较好。

八年级上册英语课件 篇4

短语归纳

stay at home待在家里

take the bus乘公共汽车

tomorrow night明天晚上

have a class party进行班级聚会

half the class一半的同学

make some food做些食物

order food订购食物

have a class meeting开班会

at the party在聚会上

potatochips炸土豆片，炸薯条

in the end最后

make mistakes犯错误

go to the party去参加聚会

have a great/good 玩得开心

give sb.some advice给某人提一些建议

go to college上大学

make(a lot of)money赚(许多)钱

travel aroundthe world环游世界

work hard努力工作

a soccer player一名足球运动员

keep…to oneself保守秘密

talk with sb.与某人交谈

in life 在生活中

be angry at/about sth.因某事生气

be angry with sb.生某人的气

in the future在将来

run away逃避;逃跑

the first step第一步

in half分成两半

solve a problem解决问题

school clean-up学校大扫除

ask sb.to do sth.要求某人做某事

give sb.sth.给某人某物

tell sb.to do sth.告诉某人做某事

too…to do sth.太……而不能做某事

be afraid to do sth.害怕做某事

advise sb.to do sth.劝告某人做某事

It’s best (not) to do sth.最好(不)做某事

need to do sth.需要做某事

语法讲解

由 if 引导的条件状语从句 (主将从现)

if 用做连词时，可以表示“如果;假如”，用来引导一个条件状语从句。如：

I will go if he asks me.

If you eat bad food, you may be ill.

注意：在主句和条件状语从句中的动词都表示将来的动作时，主句中常用一般将来时，含有情态动词的句子或祈使句，也可以是谓语含有want, hope,wish等动词的句子，但从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。如：

We will come to see you if we have time.

You won’t be able to pass the exam if you don’t work hard.

I hope to visit her if I am free.

1、I

分析：

be going to do sth.将要、打算做某事。如：

I am going to do some shopping with my mother.

辨析：be going to and will.

be going to and will 两者都可以表示将来，其区别如下：

be going to 常用于事先经过的打算、计划或意图，也可用于根据某种迹象将要发生的动作。如：

Why are you taking down all the pictures?

I am going to repaint the wall.

L ook at the dark clouds in the sky.I t ’ s going to rain.

will 常用于不受人的主观意愿影响的单纯将来，也可用于条件状语从句中，还可以表趋向或习惯的动作。如：

Tomorrow will be Teacher ’ s Day.

I f it doesn ’ t rain tomorrow, we will go to the zoo.

W e will die without air or water.

2、Half

分析：

① half, adj and n.一半(的)。 h alf 常用于名词或修饰名词的冠词前面，即half a/an/the/one ’ s +n.还可以用于a half +n.这中结构。如：

P lease cut the cake into halves.

T he little boy drank half a bottle of water.== the little boy drank a halfbottle of water.

H alf of the children are from Chinese .

注意：half 短语作主语时，谓语动词与half后的名词保持一致

短语归纳

on Saturdayafternoon在周六下午

prepare for为……做准备

go to the doctor去看医生

have the flu患感冒

help my parents帮助我的父母

come to the party来参加聚会

another time其他时间

last fall去年秋天

go to the party去聚会

hang out常去某处;泡在某处

the day after tomorrow后天

the day before yesterday前天

have a pianolesson上钢琴课

look after照看;照顾

accept an invitaton接受邀请

turn down aninvitation拒绝邀请

take a trip去旅行

at the end of this month这个月末

look forward to盼望;期待

the opening of… ……的开幕式/落成典礼

reply in writing书面回复

go to the concert去听音乐会

not…until直到……才

meet my friend会见我的朋友

visit grandparents拜访祖父母

study for a test为考试学习

have to不得不

too much homework太多作业

do homework做家庭作业

go to the movies去看电影

after school放学后

on the weekend在周末

invite sb.to do sth.邀请某人做某事

what引导的感叹句结构：What+a/an+adj.+可数名词单数(+主语+谓语)!

What+adj.+名词复数/不可数名词(+主语+谓语)!

help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事

be sad to do sth.做某事很悲伤

see sb.do sth.see sb.doingsth.

the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方式

have a surprise party for sb.为某人举办一个惊喜派对

look forward to doing sth.期盼做某事

reply to sth./sb.答复某事/某人

What’s today?今天是什么日子?

What’s the date today? What day is it today?

语法讲解

1、prepare意为“准备”，强调准备的动作与过程。

prepare 强调准备的动作与过程。宾语是这一动作的承受者。其后也可接双宾语，还可接不定式。

get/be ready意为“准备好”，强调准备的结果。常见结构有：①beready(for sth.)②getsth.ready ③beready(for sth)④be get ready to do(准备干某事，乐于干某事)

We _____ the mid-term examination.Miss Li said, “Everyone should______beforeclass.

2.have

3.hang

4.catch

catch up with =keep up with 赶上，跟上 ,catch hold of=take hold of 抓住

5.accept

(1) turn down = refuse 拒绝 turn up 放大调高 turn over 翻身 take turns 依次，轮流

(2) help sb.(to) do sth 帮助某人做某事 helpsb.with sth 在某方面帮助人 help oneself tosth 随便吃

(3)at the end of 在…末尾，在…尽头， bythe end of 到…末为止 in the end of 终于

6.surprised

surprising 形容词，令人惊讶的，主语是物 Thenews was surpring.surprise 名词，惊奇、惊讶 to one’ssurprise使某人吃惊，动词，使惊奇，使感到意外 It surprise sb to do sth.

7.look

hear from sb.收到某人的来信 = receive a letter from sb.

hear of = hear about 听说

8.make

商量确定的时间，表示将来某项计划的安排，后接时间状语。 Let’s make it at seven o’clock on Tuesday.

成功办成某事 = succeed After yearsof hard work, he finally made it.

9.reply

作及物动词，意为回答，回答说。作名词，意为：答道，回信，答复，后跟介词 to .

answer 是最普通的用语，包括口头，书面或行动的回答，可作及物和不及物动词。

短语归纳

milk shake奶昔

turn on接通(电流、煤气、水等);打开

pour…into…把……倒入……

a cup of yogurt一杯酸奶

a good idea好主意

on Saturday在星期六

cut up切碎

put…into…把……放入……

one more thing还有一件事

a piece of一片/张/段/首……

at this time在这时

a few一些;几个

fill… with…用……把……装满

cover…with…用……覆盖……

one by one一个接一个;逐个;依次

a long time很长时间

how many+可数名词复数 多少……

how much+不可数名词 多少……

It’s time (for sb.)+to do sth.到(某人)做某事的时间了

First…Next…Then…Finally 首先……接下来……然后…….最后……

want + to do sth.想要做某事

forget+to do sth.忘记去做某事

how + to do sth.如何做某事

need+to do sth.需要做某事

make+宾语+形容词 使……怎样

let sb.+do sth.让某人做某事

短语归纳

1.on

6.in

8.play

10space station太空站 puter programmer电脑编程员

12.look

14thesame…as…与……一样 15.getbored感到厌烦的

16.over

18.will+动词原形

19.fewer/more+可数名词复数

20.less/more+不可数名词

21.have

22.agree

23.such+名词(词组)

24.play

25.There

26.There

27.make

28.try

29.It’s+

短语归纳

1.grow

3.be

5.send…to…把……送到……

7.the

9.different

11.have

12.ta

13.too…to…太……而不能……

14.be

15.practice

16.keep

17.learn

18.finishdoing

mise

20.help

21.remember

22.agree

24.want

八年级上册英语课件 篇5

I. Key points

1. Words and expressions:flight,make oneself at home,address,ketchup,majority,in total,mother tongue,situation,equal,global,knowledge,communicate,on the radio,directly trade,come about,

Independent,stay the same,end up with,more or less,bring in,a great many,except for,closet,

Toilet,tourism,culture,pizza.

2. Patterns:(1)An equal number of people learn English as a second language.

(2)People from the two countries don’t have any difficulty in understanding each other.

(3)Mother told me not to leave the door open after midnight.

(4)Most of the native speakers of English are found in……

3. Grammar:Direct speech and indirect speech;requests and orders or commands.

4. Goals:(1)Learn about differences between American English and British English.

(2)Learn about communication skills.

(3)Write a passage comparing Amecican English and British English.

II. Teaching plans:seven periods

1. Period one:Warming up,listening,speaking,G1-YY-030926-1

Step1(close books)ask the students to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions.

①What is the relationship between the two.

②What are they talk about.

Step2 read the dialogue and answer another two questions.

①What is it that Joe can’t find in the bathroom?

②Why can’t he find it?

This is the best to deal with some language points.

1. For the first time第一次,初次(介词短语作状语,后不接从句)

The first time(第一次…时,后可接从句)

This∕It is the first time(后接that引导的定语从句,用现在完成时)

eg.They were there for the first time.他们是第一次到那儿。

I remembered John the first time I saw him.我第一次见到约翰时就记住了他。

This isIt is my first time that I have been abroad.这是我第一次出国。

2. We flew all the way direct from Seattle to London.句中all the way一路上;从远道;一直

eg.He came all the way from Australia.他从澳大利亚远道而来。

3. Make yourself at home 别拘束(像在自己家里一样)

befeel at home感到安适,自在;精通。

eg.Make yourself at home and help yourself to these. 别拘束,随便吃。

He is completely at home in chemistry.他精通化学。

Step3:Listen to the tape and ask the student to write down requests and demands.Then tell “requests” from “demands”.

Step4:ask the students to read the following dialogues in pairs or act them out if necessary and it is

good time to ask the students to report requests and demands.

Step5:exercises for period 1

翻译下列句子

1. 我总共有册书(total)

2. 英语发展成为世界上用得最广泛的语言

3. 汤姆和另外三个孩子一起去看电影去了(as well as)

4. 这个人长相很好,只是满头白发(except for)

Period two:Pre-reading,Reading,Post-reading,G1-YY-030927-2

Step1:One question to draw the students’ attention:In what situation do you use English?

Step2:Listen to the tape once and then read the text.Answer somes about the text.

Step3:Read the text again and give the main idea of each paragraph.

Step4:Retell the text briefly (write some key words on the blackboard)

Exercises for period 2. (单项选择)

1. The child imagined______a plane to the moon and______there for a week.

A.to take,to live B.to take,living C.taking.living D.taking,to live

2. Wilson explained______the teacher why he was late______that week.

A.to ,every day B.X,every day C.to,everyday D.X,everyday

3. The Blacks were______a flight______the Pacific Ocean then.

A.in,on B.for,across C.to,over D.on,across

4. The plane crashed and the______on a______island in the Pacific Ocean.

A.landed,deserting B.were landed,deserting

C.landed,deserted B.were landed,deserted

5. Paul likes to make______those who______other.

A.friends to,care about B.friends with,care about

C.friend with,care about D.friends with,care

6. The people______all felt very safe.

A.on plane B.on board the plane

C.on the plane board D.on board on plane

7. Not only the the student but also Tom______about the answer.

A.is sure B.are sure C.sure D.sures

8. -I’ve got your invitation. -Oh,good______. (春高考)

A.Can you come? B.Thanks a lot C.I’ll take it D.May I help you?

Period3:Some language points in reading,word study,grammar:G1-YY-030928-3

Step1:Check homework or ask students to retell the text if necessary.

Step2:Deal with some language points.

1. In only fifty years,English has developed into the language most widely spoken and used in the world.

①develop vtvi 发展,壮大,完善,生长

eg. Plants develop from seeds. 植物由种子发育而成。

Some children develop more slowly than others. 有些儿童比其他儿童发育得慢。

②冲洗

八年级上册英语课件 篇6

Mdule8

Unit2The Lndn Ee is n ur right.

一、教材分析：

本模块以出行旅游为话题，通过大量的语言材料集中展示了纹路、支路、对某一区域进行描述的语言表达方式，同时对伦敦的一些著名景点和标志性建筑物也做了简单介绍。

二、教学目标：

（一）语言知识目标：

1.正确使用下列单词和短语：

tur, painting, clear, bat, ff, twer, get ff, turn left, turn right, g alng, n the right, n the left.

2.能够熟练运用下列句型：

Tae ff the bat bac…

Get ff the bat at…

（二）语言技能目标：

1.能够读懂对地图的描述，读懂对某一个地方的描述。

2.能够根据地图讲清路线，描述某个地点的位置。

（三）学习策略：

1.能够将语言学习与实际应用结合起来。

2.问路与指路应该有礼貌。

（四）情感目标：

乐于参加运用英语的.实践活动，乐于了解其他国家的文化。

三、教学过程：

Step1 Waring up

As the students se questins:

Where have u been?

Have u ever been t Lndn?

Which place d u nw abut Lndn?

Which place is the Lndn Ee?

Step2 Reading and vcabular

1. Read the tur f Lndn and fllw it n the ap.

Have the students l at the ap and failiarize theselves with the places. Explain that the shuld draw the rute given in the passage n their ap.

The can then chec with a partner.

2. Have the students read the passage b theselves. Then as the t find ut the fllwing phases.

在某人的右边

向左转

干某事最好的方式

一个藏有许多名画的博物馆

9）下船 10)走过教堂

它能把你带到离泰晤士河面135米的高空。

在塔桥下船。

向左拐进国王街，走过教堂，就又回到了你出发的地方——广场。

3. Explain se iprtant pints.

辨析：abve , ver与n

（1）abve的意思是“在…之上”，可指“在…斜上方”，既不接触，又不一定垂直，只是位置“高于…”。新课标第一网

The plane is fling abve the cluds.

The teperature will sta abve zer in the datie.

（2）ver的意思是“在…之上”，常常可以和abve替换，它着重指垂直在上，且不接触。还可以表示“盖在…上面，铺在…上面”，用作此意时，不能和abve替换。

The light is ver/abve the table.

There is a picture ver the blacbard.

Spread the tableclth ver the table, please.

（3）n的意思也是“在…之上”，但它含有和表面相接触的意思。

The b is n the des.

Step3 Listening

Mar the places n the ap.

Pla the tape thrugh nce fr the students t listen and fcus s the can understand the eaning f the places. Pla it again fr the t chec the eaning. Then as the t write naes f the places next t the buildings n the ap. The places are:

1 Natinal Galler 2 Lndn Ee 3 Twer f Lndn

4 Huses f parliaent 5 Bucingha Palace

Chec the answers with the whle class, as ne student t sa the answers.

Step4 Sa which places u can see in the phts.

As the students t decide this individuall, and then chec with a partner. Then call bac the answers fr the whle class.

Step5 Match the wrds with the pictures.

As the students t l at the pictures and cplete the activit individuall, and then chec with a partner.

Step6 Writing

Write directins t places in Lndn. Chse a place t start n the ap, and then chse a place t finish.

As the students t d this individuall, and eep their destinatin a secret fr everne.

四、课堂检测：

（一）根据汉语或首字母提示完成单词：

1. Welce t this shrt (旅行) f Lndn.

2. It’s the Natinal G , a useu with lts f faus paintings.

3. Turn left and g t the Huses f (国会).

4. When u are tired, the best wa t see Lndn is b (船).

5. u can see st f Lndn n a c da.

6. Can u swi (横过) the river?

7. I ften wal (经过) the bshp n  wa t schl.

8. The Ban f China is (在…对面) the restaurant.

9. The dctr has ust (到达) at the hspital.

10. There’s a par (在之间) the tw superarets.

11. What a nice place! The hills are green and the water is (清澈的).

12. There’re a lt f faus (油画) in this useu.

(二)单项选择：

1. If the traffic light is red, u crss the rad. It’s dangerus.

A. dn’t B. needn’t C. ustn’t D. wuldn’t

2. Dn’t pla ftball the iddle f the street.

A. in B. n C. at D. b

3. Turn left ing’s Street and g past the church.

A. in B. / C. int D. n

4. Mr Lin gave the textbs t all the students the nes wh had alread taen the.

A. except B. including C. ang D. with

5. ---What a surprise it is that u’ve hied n Munt Tai!

---I didn’t believe I culd d it I gt t the tp.

A. unless B. after C. until D. as

6. We ften have a wal the river after supper.

A. alng B. acrss C. n D. in

7. The best wa t visit Lndn .

A. b bat B. is b bat C. tae a bat D. t tae a bat

8. There’s a bridge the river.

A. n B. in C. ver D. under

9. He was brn the evening f August 28th, 1978.

A. n B. in C. at D. int

10. Everne t g shpping.

A. ens B. lies C. en D. lie

（三）根据汉语提示完成句子：

.

2. (左拐进人) ing’s Street.

.

.

八年级上册英语课件 篇7

Lesson 53

Teaching Objectives

复习动词的一般过去时，能够表达自己过去一天的活动。

Language Focus

What Who Which When Where How

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Revise the Simple Past Tense. Ask a student to perform an action and ask What did he do. Let the students to guess He made a cake. Repeat with other actions.

Ask what they did last Sunday.

Step 2 Ask and answer

Get the students to look at the pictures. Ask them to practise the pictures in the past tense

Ask several pairs to share their stories with the class.

Then ask the students to talk about what you did yesterday.

Get them to know the different expressing ways between the Present tense and the Past tense.

Then get them to practise in the same way. See if they can matter both of the two Tenses.

Step 3 Practise

Show the pictures to the students and ask them to retell the story using the 1st personal pronoun “I”.

You can get a better student to talk about the pictures.

And then choose one of them to ask questions with “wh”.

Step 4 Exercises in class

Rewrite the sentences as required:

1. She often watches TV on Sunday. ( last night)

2. Do you always go to school on foot? (yesterday)

3. Where are you? (two hours ago)

4. What time were he get up yesterday morning? ( tomorrow morning)

5. Why were they talking just now? (now)

Answers:

1. She watched TV last night.

2. Did you go to school on foot yesterday?

3. Where were you two hours ago?

4. What time will he get up tomorrow morning?

5. Why are they talking now?

Step 5 Homework.

1.Write down what you did yesterday.

2. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 53What time did Bob get up? How did he go to school yesterday? When did he have lunch? How long did he do his homework?

Lesson 54

教学目标

1．使同学掌握本课表示频率的重点单词：Never, sometimes, usually, often, always, how often,和部分特殊疑问句。

使同学能够运用本课所学的内容介绍其他学生在校学习情况。

教具：Picture and recorder

教学过程

Step 1 Revision

1. Revise the dialogue.

教师出示上节课的图片，组织学生就“我的一天”进行对话练习，注意时态要一致，对话如下：

A: What time did you get up yesterday?

B: I got up at six.

A: When did you go to school?

B: I went to school at ten past eight.

A: How did you go to school?

B: I went to school by bus.

A: What time did you get to school?

B: …

2. 复习一般过去时态和一般现在时.

教师让学生写出下列动词的过去式和第三人称单数形式.

Eat, get, go, swim, fly, slept, run, begin, catch, have.

Step 2 Presentation

1. 教师引入

This term will be over, we want to know something about you. Now, look at the survey, work in pairs and ask the following question.

教师指导学生先填写调查表。

教师帮助学生解决调查表中的生单词和词组。

教师指导学生根据调查表两人进行问答练习，要求学生尽量使用完整句子来回答。

教师挑选对话情况较好的组进行表演。

组织学生统计一份本班个人情况调查结果报告表。

Like watching TV Twenty nine students

Like eating fruit Ten students

Get to school late Only three students sometimes

Away from school Never

Often be ill None

如下：

Step 3 Writing

教师组织学生写一份详细的关于你的同伴的个人情况报告。

例如：

Tom was never away from school last year. He sometimes was ill. He always got to school early. He wet to bed before 9:30.

He watched TV quite often. Every day he did sport less than five hours. He ate a lot of fruit and vegetables.

Step 4 Summary

学生自己总结特殊疑问句的句子结构.

Step 5 Exercises in class

汉译英

1. 他们经常访问英国。

2. 我们有时外出就餐。

3. 她晚上总是在家。

4. 我从来不能在家做事。

5. 我有时整个周末都在睡觉。

Keys

1. They often visit Britain.

2. We sometimes eat out.

3. She is always at home in the evening.

4. I can never work at home.

5. Sometimes I sleep all weekend./I sleep all weekend sometimes.

Fill in the blanks.

1. ____ ____ hours of sport do you do every week?

Three to six hours.

2. ____ ____ was he not at school last year?

Over two weeks.

3. ____ ____ were you ill last week?

About three days.

4. ____ ____ is your home from the school?

Only about a few kilometres.

5. ____ ____ did you watch TV?

Quite often.

6. ____ ____ bread is there on the plate?

Only a little.

Answers: 1.How many 2.How long 3.How long 4.How far 5.How often 6.How much

Step 6 Homework

Copy the new words and phrase.

（2） Do the exercise 1 in page 150 of your text book .

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 54How long…？ Less/ More than a week. How often…? Never/ Always / Sometimes. How many…? Six hours or more.

Lesson 55

Teaching Objectives

复习食品名称词汇，掌握购物用语；

掌握用餐的表达用语。

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Ask the students: If you need some more food, where can you buy them?

If you need some more clothes.

Where to buy, in the shop?

Student 1 is to be a buyer.

We call him “customer”.

Student 2 is to be a seller.

We call him “shop assistant”.

Suppose you were a customer you want something to buy. Helping the customer in making a decision

Step 2 Presentation

Get the students to know the word ‘buy’, past form ‘bought’. You can't have it in the following sentence.

“I have bought it for half a day.”

You Should say “I have had it for half a day.”

Explain the word “more” not a comparative degree, but sth you get again.

It means there is still one.

The word “have” in the text means “eat”.

Step 3 Practise

Revise the names of different kinds of food by pictures or real objects. Remind the students of the difference between uncountable and countable nouns.

Play the tape for the students to listen. Ask When are Ann and her mother going to buy more food?

Play the tape again while the students listen and repeat.

ave the students practise the dialogue in pairs, substituting the words in the boxes.

Ask several pairs to say the dialogue for the class.

Step 4 Practise

Say now Ann and her mother are shopping. Let’s see what they bought.

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat.

Have the students to read the dialogue in pairs and substitute the words in the box.

Call out some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class.

Step 5 Practise

Remember Ann’s birthday party. Here is a party. There are a lot of delicious food. What would you like?

Get the students to practise the dialogue in pairs. And substitute the food in the box to make new dialogues as they like.

Then suppose It’s Ann’s birthday party. Get the students to act the dialogue, as in a real-life party situation.

Step 6 Exercises in class

Rewrite the drills without changing their meanings.

1. How delicious the food is!

____ ____ ____ it is!

2. We need two more grapes.

We need ____ ____ grapes.

3. What’s the price of the coat?

____ ____ ____ the coat?

4. We all enjoyed ourselves at the get - together.

We all ____ ____ ____ ____ at the get - together.

5. Don’t forget to bring some food.

____ to bring some food.

Answers: 1. What delicious food 2. another two 3. How much is 4. had lots of fun/had a great time 5. Remember

Step 7 Homework

1. Finish off the workbook exercises.

2. Make the dialogue from Ex 3.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 55need to buy… Ten people are coming for dinner. need some more Help yourself to…have to What delicious food!

Lesson 56

Teaching Objectives

复习48个音素；

掌握电话留言和书信的写法；

掌握表达天气状况的词汇和谈论天气的表达用语；

Language Points

everything anything nothing something work hard on … bring, take, carry, fetch

Teaching Aids

Letters, tape, flashcards.

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Get the students to go over 26 English letters and 48 phonemes by flashcards.

Play the tape fort the students to listen and repeat.

Ask them to read spelling and pronunciation.

And then tell them how to pronounce the words

Step 2 Listening

Play the tape for the students to listen and ask When should someone begin their message?

Play the tape more times. Make sure the students understand the passage.

Finish the Wb Lesson 56, Ex.2. Then check the answer.

Step 3 Presentation

Get some letters to show the students. Help them practise writing letters.

Dear… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Yours,……

Let students talk about their summer vacations

From: Susie. To: Jim

Step 4 Reading

Tell the students It will be the winter holiday soon. Get them to talk about what they are going to do during the holiday.

Explain the word during.

Ask the students to read the letter carefully. Then ask the questions:

What holiday will soon begin?

When is winter holiday this year?

What year will it be?

When will Xiaomei have her exams?

What will the students do during the get-together?

Play the tape for the students to listen and find out the answer.

Explain the meaning of Christmas, exam and play.

Tell the differences between ‘every’ and ‘each’.

二者都有“每一个”的意思，都和单数动词连用。each所指的“每一个”，“个别”意义较重；every所指的“每一个”着重在“全体”而不在“个别”。另外，each可以用作代词，直接作主语或宾语；every则是形容词，只有与名词连用或构成复合词时，才能用作主语或宾语。

Play the tape again for the students to listen and repeat. Get them to practise the letter.

Step 5 Practise

Student E's birthday is coming .You sent a birthday card to student E several days ago. You want to write a letter to ask him whether he has got it or not.

Step 6 Writing

Suppose you' ll write a letter to your best friend in Shanghai. Say sth. about your last Weekend. Tell your friend what you did at weekend (Went Camping).

You are sure they write letters easily. Get them to talk about the weather, you can have them based on the weather of that day, vacation, if the condition is OK. You play the video for the students to watch on. Thus, they can watch the real scenes on it. And for them it s easier to say.

Step 7 Practice

教师课前先准备好一段国际电台的世界天气预报，或是从China Dairy上剪下一段世界各城市的天气预报信息。

1.Revise the vocabulary of weather.

rainy, snowy, windy, cloudy, sunny

Teach the new word shower and showery.

2.出示课前准备好的资料，让学生听或看，然后让学生根据各地的天气情况，谈论各地的天气，完成书上的对话。

Then ask several pairs to say their dialogue for the class.

Step 8 Poem

Play the tape for the students to listen. Get them imagine the scene of the poem.

Play the tape again and have the students repeat.

Get them to read the poem. Pay attention to the intonation.

Step 9 Exercises in class

Translation:

1.近况如何？很好。

How _______ everything ________? ________ ________.

2. 我们正在努力学习准备迎考。

We are _______ _______ _______ our exams.

3. 划船太有趣了，我等不及了。

Boating is _______. I _______ _______.

4. 我们每一个人都认为春节是一年中最快乐的日子。

_______ of us _______ Spring _______ is the _______ day of the year.

5.今年是马年。

It’ll _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ this years.

Answers: 1. is, going, Very well 2. working hard on 3. interesting, can’t wait 4. Each, thinks, Festival, happiest 5. be the year of horse

Step 10 Homework

1. Write a dialogue about the weather report.（收看中央台的天气预报）

2. Recite the poem.

3. Finish off the workbook exercises.

Blackboard design

Lesson 56( Revision)during the Christmas holidaythe end of the termhave a longer holidaythe year of horsework hard on the examson the afternoon of January 19thput on playsI can’t wait

八年级上册英语课件 篇8

We should learn teamwork.

【重点单词】

1. 词形转换

(1) adj. + ly → adv.

loud → loudly soft → softly quiet → quietly

clear → clearly angry → angrily easy → easily

(2)过去式

fall → fell break → broke lose →lost throw → threw feel → felt

(3)

ill (同义词)sick (名词)illness

start(同义词)begin

far(反义词)near

smoke(现在分词)smoking

careless(反义词)careful

important(比较级) more important

enjoy(现在分词)enjoying

9.invent(名词)invention; inventor

indoor(反义词)outdoor

century(复数)centuries

coach(复数)coaches

feel (名词)feeling

tiring(近义词)tired

【重点短语】

1. have a soccer game 进行一场足球赛

2. fall ill 病倒了

3. be a little far from… 离……有点远

4. right away = at once 立刻；马上

5. miss a good chance 错过一个好机会

6. get/miss a goal 得到/失去一分

7. shame on sb. 为某人感到羞耻

8. do one’s best 尽某人的力

9. say sorry to sb. 对某人说抱歉

10. be sure to do sth. 确定做某事

11. be angry with… 生某人的气

12. with one’s help= with the help of sb. 在某人的帮助下

13. serve food 上菜

14. turn up/down… 调高/低(音量)

15. keep sb. doing sth. 让某人一直做某事

16. in a minute 一分钟后；马上

17. on the phone 在电话中

18. take a seat 就坐

19. never mind 不要紧

20. a lot of traveling 一系列旅行

21. love/enjoy doing sth. 喜爱做某事

22. have a very exciting life 过着非常兴奋的生活

23. as well 也

24. throw…into… 把……投进……

25. follow/obey the rules 遵守规则

26. over a century later 一个多世纪后

27. more and more people 越来越多的人

28. feel tired 感到疲劳

29. instead of… 替代……

30. ask sb. to do sth. 叫某人做某事

31. make a plan for sb. 为某人订一份计划

32. build up 增进；增强

33. have fun doing sth. 乐于做…..做某事

34. be important to 对于。来说是重要

35. in a minute/ at once/ right away 立刻/马上

【重点句型】

1. Could you please do me a favor? = Could you help me? = Could you give me a hand? 你能帮我吗？

2. Would you mind teaching me? = Would you please teach me? 你教我好吗？

3. Would you mind not smoking here? 你不要在这里抽烟好吗？

4. You are always so careless. 你总是这样粗心大意。

5. I’m very sorry for what I said. 我为所说感到到道歉。

6. We are sure to win next time 下次，我们一定回赢。

7. Let me buy you a new one. = Let me buy a new one for you. 让我为你买一个新的。

8. He invented an indoor game for his students so that they could play it even in bad weather. 他为他的学生们发明了一项室内运动以便他们甚至在恶劣的天气也能玩。

9. And you can throw it with one hand or both hands.你能用一只手或两只手投掷它。

10. I have great fun running and I feel well and look fit 我总是快乐地跑步和我感到很好，看上去很健康。

【考点详解】

1. ill 与 sick 都表示 “生病的”, ill只能作表语，而sick既可作表语也可作定语。

The man is ill/sick. 那个男人病了。 (作表语)

He is a sick man. 他是个病人。 (作定语)

2. Would you mind (not) doing sth? 表示“(不)做某事介意/好吗？”

Would you mind coming and checking it? 来修理它好吗？

Would you mind not smoking here? 不要在这儿吸烟好/介意吗？

3. one of + 名词复数，表示 “其中之一……”, 主语是one，表单数。

One of my teammates is strong and tall. 其中我的一个队友又高又壮。

4. miss 错过，思念，遗失

I missed the last bus yesterday. 昨天我错过最后一班车。

He missed his mother. 他想念他的母亲。

My God! I missed(=lost) my key. 天啊！ 我把钥匙弄丢了。

5. be sure to do sth. = be sure that + 句子 “确定做某事”

We are sure to win next time. = We are sure that we will win next time.

我们确信下次一定会赢。

6. be sorry for… “为某事抱歉”

be sorry to do sth. = be sorry (that) + 句子 “很抱歉做了某事”

I am very sorry for what I said. 我为我所说的话感到抱歉。

I’m sorry I lost your book. = I’m sorry to lose your book. 很抱歉弄丢你的书。

7. tired adj. “(感到)疲惫的” , 主语是人。

如：I feel tired today. 今天我感到累了。

tiring adj. “令人疲劳的”, 主语是事物

如：This job is tiring. 这份工作令人疲惫。

类似的有： excited 感到兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋的

interested 感到有趣的 interesting 有趣的

8. 15-year-old “15岁的”;15 years old “15岁”

如：He is a 15-year-old boy. = The boy is 15 years old.

9. instead “替代，相反”, 一般单独使用，放在句末，前面用逗号隔开。

instead of…“替代……;而不是……”

I won’t go to Shanghai. I’ll go to Beijing, instead. 我不会去上海而会去北京。= I’ll go to Beijing instead of Shanghai.

I drank a lot of milk instead of water. 我喝了许多牛奶而不是水。

10. have fun doing sth. = enjoy doing sth. 表示 “从做…….中获得乐趣”

如：I have great fun running. = I enjoy running.我总能在跑步中得到很大乐趣。

八年级上册英语课件(精品6篇)

教师将按照课本中的主要教学内容整理教案课件，如今又到了编写教案课件的时候。合理地编排教案和课件有助于激发学生的创造力。如果您对如何编写优质课的教案感兴趣，那么我们的网站有关于“八年级上册英语课件”的相关内容，欢迎您继续关注。

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

新目标英语八年级上Unit5教案

一、教学目标： 1.语言知识目标：

1)能掌握以下单词：sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect 能掌握以下句型：

① What do you want to watch? ② What do you think of talk shows? ③ I can’t stand them.④ I don’t mind them.⑤ I like/love them./ I don’t like them.2)能了解以下语法：

动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。2.情感态度价值观目标：

学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。

二、教学重难点 1.教学重点：

1)学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。

2)掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

2.教学难点：

掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

三、教学过程 Step 1 Lead-in 学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用What do you think of…? Step 2 New words Learn the names of the TV shows.Step 3 Game 1.引导学生们看1a中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部TV Show的名称。2.让学生们看图片及1a中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。3.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 4 Listening 1.T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box.Make sure they know the meaning of the shows.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4.3.Play the recording again.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 5 Pair work 1.Let Ss look at the pictures in the box.Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss.2.Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and expressions in the box.3.Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows.Step 6 Listening Work on 2a: 1.Read the shows in the box of 2a.Tell Ss to remember the information.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5].3.Play the recording again to check the on 2b: 1.Let Ss read the sentences below.Explain some main sentences for the Ss.Make sure they know what to do.2.Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.3.Play the recording again to check the answers.Step 7 Pair work 1.Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a.They can use the information that is true for them.2.Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.3.Explain some main points for the Ss.4.Ss act the conversation in pairs.Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.

八年级上册英语课件 篇2

一、教材内容分析

本课是人教版八年级上册英语第一单元第三个话题的第一课时，主要谈话讨论如何给别人提出建议，并给予适当的评论。

二、教学目标（知识，技能，过程与方法情感态度、价值观）

1．知识与技能

（1）掌握Why don’t you get her a scarf ? That’s too boring .这种句型，并认识新单词。

（2）运用新句型熟练的进行小组对话。

（3）进行听力练习。

2．过程与方法

（1）能够通过师生说、两两说和自主听读体验交际式英语教学的一般过程，掌握英语说听的基本方法；

（2）能够通过两两说和综合说体验合作学习的过程和方法；

（3）能够仔细倾听老师和同学的发言，有语言表达和与同学交流的愿望。

（4）能够通过观看图片激发说话的欲望。

3．情感态度与价值观

（1）培养学习英语的兴趣；

（2）在学生两两交流和小组合作交流中，培养孩子合作意识和合作精神，能够相互配合完成一段通顺流畅的说话训练；

（3）使学生学会礼貌待人。

三、学习者特征分析

1学生是八年级的学生。

2学生已经学习了camera、hat,flowers 等物品的词。

3学生对 great,interesting,boring 这些评论性的词非常熟悉。

4学生好奇心强，对送什么礼物很感兴趣。

5学生善于表现自己，乐于交际。

6学生的听力能力不够强。

四、教学策略选择与设计

1谈话策略：运用谈话法引入新课。

2自主听读策略：学生通过自主听读拓展材料，在完成课标要求的基础上训练听说能力，积累和丰富英语词汇和句式。

3角色扮演法：让学生通过扮演不同角色，小组对话练习熟练地掌握重点句型。

五、教学环境及资源准备

1多媒体教室。

2 本课教材，课件。

六、教学过程

教学过程 教师活动 学生活动 设计意图及资源准备

Step1: Greeting Hello , cliass! How are you! Are you happy ... Greeting. 拉近教师和学生的距离。

Step2rensentation 1.教师放映幻灯片，设置妈妈的生日快到了，应该送什么礼物的情景引入新课。

2教师提问:Now, which do you want if it’s a gift for you? 学生畅所欲言: scarf/CD/bike/photo al

学生们自由发言,各抒己见bum/… 设置情景激趣引入新课。

初步感知新句型。

Step3earning new words

图片展示物体,让学生们跟读单词及描述性形容词。

学生跟读单词

学生们读(1a)的内容，将描述性形容词与物品一一对应,完成(1a)内容。 学习掌握新单词

Step4:Speaking practice图片展示情景引入句型及对话,展开课堂问答式的口语交际活动和小组活动。同时引导学生们使用所学句型谈论自己关于礼物的.喜好，可采取师生互动带动生生互动的方式。 学生练习句子并作角色扮演 帮助学生熟练的掌握重点句型

Step5istening

practice 1.播放（1b）（部分的录音，引导学生完成（1b）的教学内容。

2.播放(2a)部分的录音，引导学生完成教学听力任务。 学生听录音，完成（1b）（2a）的教学任务。 训练学生的听力。

Step6:Homework 让学生编写一段对话，讨论爸爸的生日时该买什么礼物。 完成作业。 复习巩固所学。

八年级上册英语课件 篇3

新目标英语八年级上Unit5 Section A 教学设计

上传: 郑家梅

更新时间：2017-6-7 10:10:29

新目标英语八年级上unit5 section a 教学设计

一.教学目标:(知识目标、能力目标、德育目标)(1)知识目标:通过本单元的学习让学生掌握有关邀请和请求许可的用语,拒绝邀请及合理的解释,在互动的交流中学会谈论自己的计划安排.并学会制作邀请函.(2)能力目标:通过在真实情境中的对话操练,听力练习,游戏以及制作邀请函,培养学生动脑,动口和动手的能力.和语言在真实情境中运用的能力.(3)德育目标:在交际,操练和动手操作的合作学习过程中,培养同学们的合作意识,增进同学间的友谊,并培养学生礼貌的接受和合理的拒绝别人请求的意识.教学重点及难点: 重点:本课的重点词汇短语:study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson ,help my parents, visit my aunt.以及时间短语on Saturday afternoon等.以can开头的一般疑问句,can和can't的区分,和sure, I'd love to.sorry, can't, thank you for asking, maybe another time, i have to…等答句.难点:目标词汇和句型在实际情况中的运用.三.教学方法: 任务型教学法为主体,以小组活动,两人协作,为依托.以游戏,听力,动手练习和笔头练习为载体开展教学.四.学具准备: 教学课件,电脑,学生自制的邀请函所需要用的卡片.五.教学程序: 1.热身(warm-up)在课间就开始播放英文故事视频短片,和中学生英文演讲比赛的片断,吸引学生的注意力,培养学生的预感,增强学习英语的兴趣.课前duty:把全班按座位分成三组,每组确定任务,给出中心话题,group 1 take a vacation ,group 2 keep healthy, group 3get to school.让学生以两人一问一答的对话形式,复习前几单元的知识,只要与所给话题相关的问答都可以.(3)课前展标:展示本课的学习目标.2.新课导入(lead-in)猜词游戏:以一个小的猜词游戏导入新课, 用变化字体错综排列的三个字母,c a n让学生从猜 字母入手,然后启发他们猜猜可以组成什么单词,学生可以猜到是can,这也是本课的要训练的重要词汇情态动词.然后复习can引导的一般疑问句,如“can you sing a song? Can you swim? can you play basketball?”等,继而引出“can you come to my party?”这一本课的题目.这个导入环节是从猜词游戏入手激发学生的兴趣,吸引学生的目光和注意力,并自然的引出本课主题,还可以对相关的知识进行复习.3.新授课过程

(1)新授 短语:本课新授短语有study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson, help my parents, visit my aunt.t: this Sunday is my birthday, i will have a party, can you come to my party?问全体同学 s: sure/yes/ok.T: thank you, and i also invited my friends to my party, but they have a lot of things to do.用师生间的对话引出本课短语,这时候展示图片,练习短语,并用unit3学过的话题“what's he/she doing for weekend?”来提问,这样即可以复习旧的句型,也可以练习新的短语.看图识图以后,让学生one by one的形式看图说短语,或说句子,以达到熟练掌握,人人都会的程度.(2)填图练习:完成书上的section a 1a用这个填图练习来巩固刚学过的短语.(3)小组合作:就刚才练习短语的图片询问 can you come to my party?启发学生答出sure, i'd love to.和i'm sorry, I can't.i have to go to the doctor.以及sorry, I can't.I'm helping my parents.等.在大屏幕中出示这些句子,让学生有一个视觉上的印象,另外对have to 句型进行强调和反复练习.进一步提问三人称“can he come to my party?”以及三人称的答句.师生之间的简短的示范练习之后,让学生根据大屏幕上的语言提示以小组为单位进行对话练习.运用所学短语,也鼓励学生发挥自己的想 像力,根据自己的实际情况练习一 人称和三人称的邀请和拒绝邀请.(4)听力练习:为了巩固所学句型进行听力练习.完成1b.一遍听内容填图,核实答案,一遍看原文复听,最后让学生两人协作复述或阅读听力原文.(5)游戏时间:大段的听力练习过后学生有了些疲劳的情绪,这个时候要积极调动学生的学习兴趣,刺激学习的兴奋点,所以在这里准备了一个游戏,名字叫“can you guess?”准备一些遮住一部分的图片,然后逐步露出图片,让学生猜: t: i invited some of my friends to my party, but they have some weekend plans, so they can't come to my party, can you guess why? keys: can he come to my party? no, he can't.he has to go to the doctor.etc.这一部分即是一个猜图片的游戏,也是对can引导的一般疑问句和have to的三人称的练习,达到了一箭双雕的目的.(6)导入听力:三段听力练习连续而至,势必会使学生有一些懈怠,此处运用一个小的看图练习导入,并对can和can't进行区分练习.准备两个小图片,笑脸和哭脸,笑脸代表can而哭脸代表can't,给出句子,让学生根据是笑脸或是哭脸说出can或can't的句子.如,jeff come to the party.mary swim in the pool.(7)完成2a 2b让学生从听觉上区分情态东西can和否定形式can't, 并进一步强化拒绝邀请的方式和合理的理由.依然采取让学生复述或阅读原文的形式来核对答案.4.动手练习:(1)准备工作:在大屏幕上展示已做好的邀请函,解释邀请函上要出现的信息,提出问题“what is it about? whose invitation is it? when is the party? where is the party?”启发学生了解邀请函上要具备那些信息.完成3a,并请同学两人协作填出正确答案.(2)做一做:拿出准备好的硬纸板,制作自己的邀请函,此时在大屏幕上给出邀请函的模板,让学生能够明确邀请函要包含的信息内容.(3)展示并演练:用实物投影仪展示制作优秀的邀请函,用这样的方法鼓励和表彰制作的优秀的同学,让大家了解他的作品,并以两人协作的方式就此邀请函内容模仿3a进行对话练习.这部分也是本课的一个拓展和延伸的环节也是本课知识的一个生成,跳出了party 这一话题的局限,启发学生就其他方面的邀请制作和讨论邀请函,如it's a sports meeting, it's a movie, it's an English club , etc.给出keys: can you come to my party on Sunday? When is it? where is it? How can I get there? etc.让学生利用本课所学的知识畅所欲言,作为本课知识学习的成果展示.5.小结: 小结部分,本着“把小结换给学生的理念”,在幻灯片中给出总结提示,让学生们参照总结提示,总结本课所学的知识点,和语法项目要点.给出语言提示“can…? sure,…….Sorry ,I can't I have to…….”启发学生说出本课所学到的短语,句子,或有用的表达方式.6.课堂练习: 为了巩固本课所学的知识,为学生及时补充了一些配套的笔头练习,让学生学会运用,和对自己进行检测.1.“can you go to the movie with us on Sunday?” “of course._ it is”5:00 in the afternoon.“ a.where b.what time c.how soon d.when 2.”would you like to join us in basketball?“ ____but I'm afraid I have to study for my science test.” a.I wouldn't b.Id love to c..I don't like it 3.thanks___ your help, and now i have made great progress in my English.a.to b.with c.for d.by 4.the poor lady had to go out for food ____a cold morning.a.in b.at c.on d.

八年级上册英语课件 篇4

【重要词组】

do the dishes，sweep the floor，take out the trash.fold your clothes，clean the living room，do chores，have to do sth，like to do（doing）sth，make dinner，make your bed

重要句型及语法如下：

Could you please clean your room？Yes，sure.

Could you please do the dishes？Sorry，I can’t.I have to do my homework.

Could I please go to the movies？Yes，you can.

Could I please use the computer？No，you can’t.You must do the dishes at first.

二、学生学情分析

本课话题来自学生的生活经历，学生在初一已经学习了许多动词短语，为表达提供了语言基础，此外，学生已初步掌握了用祈使句和Can you…？/Can I…？提出请求和建议，为本课的学习打下了铺垫。

活动设计的话题从谈论家务———对家务的看法（好恶）———父母和孩子之间承担的家务————社交、休闲活动等生活的各个方面，各任务层层递进，与学生的生活紧密相连，又是学生饶有兴趣的内容，为表达提供了真实的材料，使得学生在各个活动中想说、有话说，使活动参与的范围广，达到任务的真实性，有效性。

在学习中学生受到爱的教育，学会爱父母，爱家庭，爱劳动，学会如何与人交往，学会表达自己对事情的看法，使他们的个性得到张扬。

三、单元重点和难点

1、重点。

1）学习和复习一些常用的动词短语。

2）委婉地提出请求、征求许可做某事。

Could you/I please do things？Yes，Sure./ .I/You can.

Sorry，I / you can’t，，I / you have to do…”

3）学习如何请求他人的帮助。

2、难点。

在实际的生活中委婉地表达自己的请求和征求许可，获取帮助

四、教学过程

1、 Warming up

Enjoy ourselves.Watch cartoon Small Potato’s Sunday.

看动画片段《小土豆的星期天》导入本课话题和新词汇“chores”。小土豆周末一人在家。他过了一个非常快乐而充实的星期天。帮助父母做了许多家务活。片段的主题使学生联想到本课的话题。

2、 Learn new words and phrases

What kind of chores can you find in the cartoon？

学生通过在动画片段里找家务活，利用已学的简单词汇如make breakfast等导入新单词的学习。

Look！What is it used for？

看图。通过问学生这些清洁用品的用处学习动词词组do chores，do the dishes，make the bed，take out the trash，fold the clothes，clean the living room.

3、 Memory game.

What is she doing？Do you still remember？

通过记忆力游戏，让学生适时对所学词汇进行回忆以及进一步的巩固。并适当活跃课堂气氛。从这里开始对学生的活动进行分组竞赛。

4、 Discuss.

What do you usually do on Sunday？

先通过已学的简单句型，让学生再一次对所学的词汇进行练习。并在讨论后让学生做Pair work来热身。

5、 Listening.1b

Peter’s chores or Mom’s chores？

通过听力来巩固目标词汇。

6、 Make a survey.

Discuss in groups of four.

Draw a smiling face on the chore you like and draw a crying face on the chore you dislike

Then give a report.

通过做调查，复习句型I like … because…以及I don’t like … because…

学生在做调查的过程中了解自己同学的喜欢，为下一步如何委婉地提出请求做好铺垫。

调查表格附下：

Chores Like Don’t like

do the dishes

sweep the floor

take out the trash

make your bed

fold your clothes

clean the living room

7、 Pair work

Ask your partner for help

告诉学生可以向同桌寻求帮助，请求别人帮助你做自己不喜欢干的家务活。

导入目标语言Could you please do things？Yes，Sure.

Sorry，I have to do…

并进行对话练习。

8、Game

哑剧表演。一位学生利用Could you please do things？委婉地提出请求。另一位学生表演动作。活跃课堂气氛。

9、Pair work

Act out strict father or mother.

角色扮演。一位学生扮演严格的父母。一位学生扮演孩子。

学习目标语言如何征求许可做某事。Could I please do things？Yes，Sure.No，you must …

并做Pair work

10、Interview

How to be a better boy and girl？

让学生以小组的形式，采访自己的同学。讨论一次自己的周末计划。要帮助爸爸妈妈做什么家务活。在学习中学生受到爱的教育，学会爱父母，爱家庭，爱劳动。并且复习已学句型I’m going to do…

11、颁奖。给每个小组里的最能干者发奖。适时给学生爱劳动，爱父母的教育

12、 总结本节课的教学重点。

13、 Homework

Read the words and phrases you learn today.

Make a dialogue between you and your parent about doing the chores.

物理八年级下册课件

教师的日常职责之一就是编写教案课件，然而，教案课件的制作绝不是草率应付的事情。学生的反应能体现出老师对课程布局的逻辑性和合理性。那么，老师如何才能制作出优秀的教案课件呢？本篇文章将详细解读“物理八年级下册课件”的各个环节和要点。如果您认为这篇文章对你有所启发，欢迎你收藏并作为以后参考的材料！

物理八年级下册课件 篇1

沪科版八年级物理课件：声音的特性

教学目的1.常识性了解音调、响度和音色是乐音的三个特征。

2.常识性了解音调的高低是由物体振动频率决定的，响度的大小跟物体振动的振幅和离发声体的远近有关。

3.常识性了解不同物体发出的声音不同，是由于它们的音色不同。

教具：

演示用：收录机、录有高音部和低音部的合唱歌曲的磁带、发声齿轮、塑料硬片(或硬纸片)、铜锣、响铃、队鼓和彩色纸人以及闹钟。

学生用：梳子、塑料硬片(或硬纸片)、橡皮筋。

教学过程：

一、引入新课

用收录机放有高音部和低音部的合唱歌曲的磁带。

讲述：同学们刚才欣赏到的是悦耳动听的歌曲，但是在日常生活中还常听到一些令人烦躁不安刺耳的噪声。同样是乐音，有的音调高，有的音调低;有时声音大，有时声音小;有的用钢琴伴奏，有的用小提琴或我国的民族乐器二胡、三弦等伴奏。学了这节课后，同学们将知道其中的奥妙。(板书课题：第二节 音调、响度和音色)

二、进行新课

1.音调

(1)讲述：唱歌时，一首歌曲音调可以唱高一些，也可以唱低一些。刚才同学们听到的一首合唱歌曲，高音部的音调高，低音部的音调低，我们把声音的高低叫做音调(教师板书)。

(2)演示：先介绍发声齿轮，请一位学生上台观察在同一轴上的几个发声齿轮的齿数，并告诉全体同学，每个齿轮的齿数不同。

转动齿轮，用塑料硬片接触齿轮的齿，使塑料硬片振动发声。让学生注意观察，硬片接触不同齿数的齿轮时，发出的声音的高低有何不同，哪个高?哪个低?

引导学生分析：塑料硬片接触齿数多的齿轮时，振动快，发出的音调高;接触齿数少的齿轮时，硬片振动慢，发出的音调低。

讲述：物体在1秒钟内振动的次数叫做频率(教师板书)。由演示得出：音调高低由发声体振动的频率决定，频率越大，音调越高;频率越小，音调越低。(教师板书)

(3)学生随堂实验：用塑料硬片在梳子上快慢不同地划过，请同学们注意观察，塑料硬片快划时和慢划时，发出的声音的音调哪个高?哪个振动的频率大?哪个振动的频率小?进一步认识音调的高低是由发声体的振动频率决定的。

(4)学生随堂实验：学生利用橡皮筋做课本图3-9的实验，进一步加深学生对音调的高低是由发声体的振动频率决定的认识。

(5)读图：请同学们读课本中的图3-10，读后教师做简要解释，然后问：为什么有些声音在人们毫无觉察时，猫、狗就已经警觉地听到了?(学生可自由举手发言，然后教师小结学生发言，并作明确解答，拓展知识，活跃思维。)

2.响度

(1)演示：轻敲队鼓，请同学听发出的声音，并观察鼓皮上彩色纸人的跳动情况，跳动缓慢，犹如轻歌曼舞，敲击由轻逐渐加重，再听声音大小的变化，并观察纸人跳动的变化，跳动由慢到快，犹如从轻歌曼舞过渡到狂欢。引导学生分析出：鼓皮振动的振幅大，声音大;振幅小，声音小。教师讲述：我们把声音的大小叫做响度，响度跟物体振动的振幅有关。(教师板书)

(2)拿出闹钟让同学们听。前排同学可以清晰地听见闹钟的滴答声，后面几排的同学几乎听不见。表明：响度还跟离发声体的远近有关。(教师板书)

(3)读图：请同学们读课本中图3-12，看后说出为了减小声音的分散，增大响度可以采用哪些办法。然后请同学们从实际生活中举出一些增大响度的办法。课后请同学们互相比一比，看谁举得又多，又恰当。

3.音色

(1)讲述：除以上音调、响度外，音色也是乐音的一个特征。(板书：音调、响度和音色是乐音的三个特征。)接着，在讲桌下(不让学生看见)敲响铜锣、摇动响铃，请同学们说出所听到的声音是什么物体振动而发出的?(肯定学生都能说正确)，那么你们是凭什么分辨出来的呢?当同学们带着疑问的眼光望着老师时，教师及时指出：在音调、响度都相同时，不同的物体振动发出的声音不同，这就是音色。(教师板书)

平常人们常说：未见其人，先闻其声，就是根据各人声带振动发出的声音不同，即各人的音色不同分辨出是谁的声音。

同一个人的音色，也会随着年龄的增大，以及饮食、起居和本人健康状况等因素的变化而变化。

三、小结

本课学习了乐音的三个特征，即音调、响度和音色。恰当的乐音给人以精神上的调节，艺术上的享受，激励人们奋发向上。通过本课学习，希望同学们知道：

1.什么是音调?音调是由什么因素决定?

2.什么是响度?响度跟哪些因素有关?

3.人们能分辨不同物体发出的声音是根据乐音的哪个特征?

四、布置作业

课后认真阅读课文、注意不要死记硬背课文中的名词，要注重理解。看一看课文后的想想议议，同学们可以三三两两的进行议论，还可以找教师探讨。

说明

新课引入时，如果没有恰当的合唱歌曲磁带，可请两位同学或老师跟一位同学一起同唱一首歌。新课引入没有一定的模式，要根据材料、学校实验设备、学生实际等条件，用不同的形式巧妙地引入，注意引起学生的兴趣，激发求知欲望，跟该堂课要学习的内容紧密地联系起来。

关于响度跟振动的振幅的关系，除了以上所述的实验外，在纸盆喇叭上放置乒乓球，改变音量大小;用敲击音叉将盛在盘内的水溅出等实验都可以观察，效果也很好。但在实验时要注意可见度，如果可见度不佳，可请后面的同学上讲台来自己做，做后大声地告诉全班同学。

本课物理名词较多，对于刚上物理不久的初二学生来说要完全理解是困难的，课内教师在这些名词上不必多费唇舌，要把握住本课的教学目的。这些名词在实际生活中和今后高中物理课的学习中，还可以进一步加深理解。对于这些名词的解释，不要给学生提出过高的要求，否则将适得其反。

沪科版八年级物理课件：力

一、教学目标

1、知识目标：

理解力的概念，知道力是物体之间的相互作用，在具体问题中能找出施力物体和受力物体；知道力可以改变物体运动状态，可以引起物体的形变，物理教案－力。

2、能力目标：

培养学生初步的观察能力，初步的分析、概括能力和应用物理知识解决简单问题的能力。

3、情感目标：

通过力的知识学习，培养学生科学探索、质疑精神，提高科学素质。

二、教学重点：力的概念；物体间力的作用是相互的；力的作用效果。

三、教学难点：物体间力的作用是相互的。

四、突破难点方法：列举大量事例，精心设计实验，使学生对难点问题有深刻的感性认识。

五、课时安排：一课时

教学过程：

一、引入课题：

“力”字的含义是非常广泛的，在物理学中，力是一个重要的物理量，主要研究自然、生活、生产中的力的现象，物理教案《物理教案－力》。本节课我们将学习有关力的知识。

二、力是什么？

1、请学生列举自然、生活、生产中有关力的事例。

我们日常生活中做什么事的时候需要用力？

其它物体之间是否也产生力的作用呢？

不接触的物体之间是否也存在力的作用呢？

（教师有选择地板书）

2、分析上述事例，得出力的概念：力是物体对物体的作用。

二、在上述事例的基础上，进一步分析力的作用效果。

1、教师演示力的作用效果

2、学生上台演示力的作用效果

3、学生谈生活中力的作用效果

归纳：力可以使物体的形状发生改变（简称形变），也可以使物体的运动状态发生改变。

三、力的作用是相互的1、演示实验：磁铁吸引铁块，铁块吸引磁铁。

2、请两名学生上台演示实验：拉弹簧

3、请同学们用手拍桌子。

4、请同学们谈日常生活中力的相互作用的例子。船离岸时竹篙点岸；手拉橡皮筋；

归纳：甲物体对乙物体施力时，乙物体对甲物体也施力，因此，力的作用是相互的。

四、课堂小结

本节课初步学习了有关力的知识，知道了力是物体对物体的作用，力的作用效果可以改变物体的运动状态，还可以改变物体的形状，知道了物体间力的作用是相互的。

物理八年级下册课件 篇2

场面描述：我校的100米决赛正在进行，小明勇夺冠军，同学都羡慕地说，他跑得真快!而在5000米的长跑竞赛中，运动健将小马一举夺得冠军，同学们佩服地说：小马跑得真快!

组织学生讨论所提出的问题。学生从小明跑得真快的事例中讨论得出：运动员运动的路程相同，比较哪个运动员先到达终点就是哪个运动快。

得出：“通过相等的路程，用的时间短的运动得快。”

提问：小李步行，而妈妈骑自行车，大家同时从家里出发，怎么判断他们运动的快慢?

“在相等的时间内，走的路程多的运动得快”

启发学生回答：可以计算出相同路程所用的时间短就是运动快或者计算出相同时间运动的路程长也是运动快的。

指导学生观察图11.2—2。让他们提出不同之处。从而引出匀速直线运动的含义：物体沿着直线快慢不变的运动。

让学生列举一些生活中物体做变速运动的例子(汽车开动时，汽车刹车时，足球在草地滚动时等等)

1.怎样表示运动的快慢?

2.速度是怎样计算的?

3.速度的单位怎样进行换算?

4.什么是匀速直线运动，那么变速运动呢?

①.学会使用停表和刻度尺正确地测量时间、距离，并求出平均速度。

①.掌握使用物理仪器——停表和刻度尺的基本技能。

②.体会设计实验、实验操作、记录数据、分析实验结果的总过程。

③.逐步培养学生学会写简单的实验报告。

通过实验激发学生的学习兴趣，培养学生认真仔细的科学态度和正确、实事求是记录测量数据的严谨作风。

教学过程;

师：在上课前我们先来做一个实验。(把铜丝作为斜面，让滑轮滑下来)滑轮在前半程滑的快，还是后半程滑的快?生答。

师：前半程或后半程或一样快。要想知道哪一段滑的快，就得比较平均速度。速度又怎么知道呀?用路程除以时间，路程用刻度尺来测，时间要用表来测，那具体应测哪些物理量呀?今天我们就要用实验的方法测出在斜坡上各路段的平均速度，从而来验证斜坡上自由滚下的物体在前半程快还是后半程快。板书课题：平均速度的测量。

实验器材可从实验台上选取。要求同学们以组为单位，先自行设计实验方案，画出实验表格，进行分组实验，收集数据最后得出结论。请同学们拿出实验报告，分组讨论并完成实验报告上的第4、第5项内容，时间为5分钟。

拿出一组同学的实验报告在展台上展示。

总结：可以用总时间减去前半程的时间。那秒表又如何使用呢?哪位同学知道呢?生答。

总结：很好，按一下开始计时，再按一下停止计时，再按一下回零。外面的长针走一圈是30秒，长针走两圈里面的短针走一格是一分钟。我们会使用秒表了，下面就开始进行实验并收集数据，把数据填在表格里。时间为10分钟。开始：

实验结束把一组同学的报告展示出来。

很好，长度测量的结果要有准确值和估计值，他们这一组同学没有写出估计值。长度测量写出估计值的同学请举手。你们的路程测得怎么不一样呢?生答。你们是怎么测量的呢(找学生演示他们是如何测量木板的长度的)?我们通过这个实验就验证了，物体从斜面上滚下来时，后半程比前半程的速度快。你们能比较出哪一组的小车滑的快吗?不能，有什么办法吗?有同学说比速度，怎么比呢?请同学们完善你们的实验方案，算出小车在斜面运动时全程的平均速度，时间为2分钟。

再拿两组实验报告比较一下，哪一组小车滑的快。

这节课我们学会了使用刻度尺和停表正确地测量路程、时间，并通过实验测出了前半程后半程和全程的平均速度。

下面请同学们思考如何测出1路公共汽车从河师大到火车站的平均速度呢?

【作业布置】用一根米尺和一块手表，怎样既方便又较正确地测出从你家门口到学校门口的路程?简要说出测量步骤。

速度不同。

3、能分析一些常见的声现象。

重、难点：(重)1、学生对声音的产生与传播过程的探究。

(难)2、设计探究的实验。

3、声现象的分析、解释。

学生观看第一部分录像——各种各样的声音。引入课题：声音是怎样产生和传播的?

(2)、握住振动的音叉，声音马上停止。

(3)、放一段声音的录像。

指导学生分析归纳，得出结论：

声音是由物体的振动产生的，振动停止，发声停止。

2、声音的传播：

固体、液体、气体都能传播声音，真空不能传声。

(3)、声波：利用录像让学生知道什么是声波?同水波进行对比。

(2)、声音在固体、液体、气体中的速度谁快?

15℃声音在空气中的速度为340m/s。

学生活动：对着远处的高山喊可以听到回声，为什么在教室里讲话听不回声?

三、达标练习：

完成物理时习在线中本节内容，因内容较多，可以留一部分作课外练习。

在课堂上对声音的知识不能扩展太多，这只是声音的第一节课，可降低难点。

要测一测学生的接受情况。

物理八年级下册课件 篇3

教学设计示例

第一节 长度测量 误差

【课题】

长度的测量 误差

【重点难点分析】

知道长度的单位，对于长度的进率的指数表示是一个难点，但是不宜要求过高，以形成新的难点.能正确使用刻度尺并对使用的正确和错误能有正确的判断.正确记录测量结果，能在准确值的基础上估测一位，误差是难点，讲解时不宜过深.

【教学过程设计】

1， 引入新课

条件较好的学校可以组织学生观察动画或图片，条件一般的学校可以观察课本上的1-1和1-2，使学生得到结论"感觉不总是可靠的，需要进行实际测量"，从而引出测量在物理中的重要地位.

说明在一些方面测量的决定作用，要注意联系实际：发射一颗人造卫星，卫星的运动是否正常，就需要不断的各种各样的测量，并且这种测量要求的精度很高.

2， 新授课：测量和长度的单位

长度测量是最基本的测量，测量要有标准，所以长度有单位，可以引申各个物理量都有单位.介绍长度的单位.

教学中要使学生建立长度单位大小的观念，条件较好的学校可以用动画(自然世界的尺度)、图形、图像来帮助学生想象一些长度的数值.在学生充分观察的基础上，联系实际让学生充分动起来，在自己的身体上找出大约是1米、1分米、1厘米、1毫米的部位，看看谁的更准确.

学生练习单位的换算和判断数值的单位，以便巩固所学到的知识. 3， 新授课： 用刻度尺测量长度

测量长度的一般工具是刻度尺，观察刻度尺，说出自己的刻度尺的零刻度线的位置、量程、最小刻度.再观察一些图形，说明这些刻度尺的零刻度线、量程和最小刻度.

学生可以观察图形和图像素材，或者观察课本上的1-5、1-6、1-7图，组织学生讨论，并总结出使用刻度尺的正确方法：刻度尺的刻度线紧贴被测物体的应测部位，零刻度线磨损时，可以从其他刻线量起;观察测量结果时，视线要与尺面垂直.同时，学生应当讨论不按照正确方法使用时出现的问题.

记录结果时，要注明单位，并应当在读出准确值后，再估计一位，教师利用板图，读出木块的长度：准确值是2cm，再估计一位数值，约是0.2cm，所以木块的长度是：2.2cm.

在此基础上，加上毫米线，此时刻度尺的最小刻度是mm，再读出木块的长度，对比这两次的数值，可以看出测量相同的物体，用不同的精确度的刻度尺得到的结果是不同的.可以再出示一些问题，巩固学生的正确读数.教学中要注意养成学生的这些学习习惯.

物理八年级下册课件 篇4

教学目标：

知识与技能：

1、知道杠杆平衡的条件;

2、能根据实际需要正确选择和使用杠杆。

过程与方法：经历“探究杠杆平衡条件”的过程。

情感、态度与价值观：体验科学探究的乐趣，了解杠杆在生活中的应用。

教学重难点：探究杠杆平衡条件。

教学器材：杆秤

分组实验器材:铁架台、杠杆、钩码等

教学方法：实验探究法。

教学过程：

一、 杠杆的原理

出示杆秤，对杆秤进行分析，画出支点、动力、阻力、动力臂、阻力臂。

使用杆秤称水果，要求称不等量的水果，请一位学生上来演示。

置疑：

你为什么要这样称 ?

对，我们要使杠杆达到平衡。

杠杆的平衡与哪些因素有关，有什么样的关系 ?

与动力、阻力、动力臂、阻力臂有关。

画力臂的步骤为：第一：在杠杆示意图上，确定支点，将力的作用线用虚线延长;第二：从支点O向力的作用线做垂线，画出垂足，则支点到垂足的距离就是力臂;第三：要用虚线画力臂，支点到垂足用字母表示出来。

二、实验探究

通过实验探究，得到确定的关系。

每2人一组实验，要求讨论如何设计这个实验。

步骤如下：

(1) 将杠杆挂在铁架台上，观察是否在水平位置平衡 ( 静止 ) ;若不是，可调节平衡螺母，使之水平平衡。

开始实验，完成探究任务。

老师在学生探究过程中进行巡视，发现问题及时提出，让学生自己去分析、解决问题。

完成实验后，任意选择五组，请组中作记录的学生将结果投影到屏幕上。

将五组中的实验数据任意各取一组填入表格中，讨论可得到什么结论 ( 杠杆平衡的条件 ) 。

教师可提出各种猜想，加减乘除关系都可。

可能有学生得到其他关系式，但不适合所有数据，因此它不是杠杆平衡条件。

【课堂练习】

1.画出下图中 F'和 F"的力臂，并比较杠杆平衡时 F'

与 F"的大小.

2.下图所示杠杆，OA 长20cm，AB 长60cm，现在 A 处挂一重200N的物体，若使 B 处的弹簧秤示数最小，弹簧秤的方向怎样?弹簧秤的示数是多少?

三、杠杆的分类

由杠杆的平衡关系，可以得到当力不等时，对应的力臂也不等。可将杠杆分为三类：

杠杆类型 省力杠杆 费力杠杆 等臂杠杆

力臂的大小关系 L1> L2 L1

力的大小关系 F1 F2 F1 = F2

力的作用点移动距离的大小关系 s1 > s 2

费距离 s1

省距离 s1 = s2

分析中提出相关问题：省力、费力是谁相对谁而言?省距离、费距离的含义是什么?

举例分析：从撬棒撬石头分析费距离的含义。

所谓省距离或费距离指的是动力作用点移动距离s1 ，相对于阻力作用点移动距离s2 而言的。杠杆平衡条件说明，当动力臂大于阻力臂时，动力小于阻力是省力杠杆。如图所示，当动力作用点移动 s1 距离时，阻力作用点移动s2 距离，且s1 >s2 ，因此使用撬棒撬石头省力而费距离。

要求学生举例，并进行分类。

四、课堂小结

杠杆的平衡条件 F1L1 = F2L2;

杠杆的分类：省力杠杆、费力杠杆、等臂杠杆。

五、实践活动

1. 通过探究，你能理解阿基米德的名言吗? 请就此写一篇短文。

2. 用杠杆知识分析、理解天平的原理和调整过程。

六、板书

第一节 杠杆(一)

杠杆平衡的条件：

动力×动力臂 = 阻力×阻力臂

F1L1 = F2L2

滑轮

教学目标：

知识与技能：

使学生借助已有知识：理解滑轮的原理 , 知道滑轮的作用。

过程与方法：

由问题的提出、猜测、经过实验探究 , 使学生亲身经历物理问题的研究过程。

情感、态度与价值观：

体验科学探究的乐趣 , 学习科学的探究方法 , 从而领悟科学的思想和精神 , 培养抽象思维和论证问题的能力。通过对实验数据的收集 , 培养严肃认真的操作态度及科学分析实验数据的能力。

教学重点：定滑轮、动滑轮的作用。

教学器材：定滑轮、绳子、钩码、弹簧测力计

分组实验器具：动滑轮、绳子、钩码、弹簧测力计、铁架台、刻度板

教学方法：采用实验探究、讨论归纳的方法。

教学过程：

一、复习提问

1.杠杆有哪三种?各有什么特点?举例说明。

2.剪铁用的剪刀和镊子是省力杠杆还是费力杠杆?

教师出示实物并进行演示，并画出这两个杠杆的示意图。要求学生正确画出它们的力臂，讲清道理，说明结论。

剪铁用剪刀和镊子两杠杆示意图如图所示。

二、新课引入

教师先举一个滑轮的实例，再要求学生举滑轮的例子，根据使用时滑轮的不同情况进行分类(即按定滑轮和动滑轮分类)。

提问它们的特点是什么，由此给出定义：滑轮是一个周边有槽、并可以绕轴转动的轮子。

教师给出滑轮的分类。

滑轮有两种：定滑轮和动滑轮。使用时滑轮的位置固定不变的叫做定滑轮，使用时滑轮的位置跟被拉动的物体一起运动的叫做动滑轮。

再举些滑轮实例，可连接录像。

1、定滑轮

观察定滑轮。定滑轮工作时，它的轴固定不动。

举例：如旗杆顶部的装置为定滑轮。

(2) 提问：使用定滑轮有什么特点?演示实验：

① 称量钩码的重力;

② 演示如图所示的实验，匀速拉动弹簧测力计，物体上升，拉力的方向改变，但弹簧测力计的示数不变，特点是 G = F 。使用定滑轮吊起物体时，可以改变力的作用方向，达到操作方便的目的。

提问：使用定滑轮不能省力，那么能否省距离?能否省功?

按照下图进行演示。使学生清楚地看到：“动力作用点移动的距离 s 与物体上升高度 h 相等，使用定滑轮不能省力，也不能省距离。” 由此得出使用定滑轮不能省功。

2、动滑轮

(1) 教师边讲边演示动滑轮提升重物。

要求学生讨论分析，此时提起重物使用的滑轮与刚才演示实验使用的定滑轮有何不同点?

教师在学生讨论后小结：动滑轮工作时，轴和重物一起移动。另外用力方向也不同，用定滑轮时拉力方向是向下的，使用动滑轮提升重物时拉力的方向是向上的。

(2) 提问：使用动滑轮有什么好处?动滑轮中绳的拉力和做功情况怎样?(3) 组织学生实验，按课本实验探究，参照下图进行实验。

由于研究定滑轮时教师已演示过实验，学生可以自己设计出实验步骤。

说明：重物用 2 个钩码表示，有利于分析数据。用弹簧秤测出钩码重。读取弹簧秤的示数时，跨过动滑轮的两条绳要竖直、平行。

学生实验，教师巡回指导。学生实验完毕后，教师请几组学生分别将自己的一组数据填到教材中的表格中，分析学生数据。

(4) 总结：

使用动滑轮提升钩码，弹簧秤的示数约是钩码重的二分之一。

两根绳子吊着重物和滑轮，这两根绳子的力之和约等于钩码的重力，符合平衡力的原理。

动力作用点移动的距离s是物体上升高度 H 的 2 倍。

使用动滑轮不能省功。

说明：在提升钩码的过程中也把动滑轮提升起来了，当钩码重远大于动滑轮重时，动滑轮才可忽略不计，从而得出使用动滑轮可以省一半力的结论。

三、课堂小结：认识定滑轮、动滑轮。

四、实践活动 建议：“发展空间”中的“我的设计”。

五、板书

第二节 滑轮

一、 定滑轮

1. 滑轮的位置固定不变。

2. 不省力 , 可以改变力的方向。

3. 使用定滑轮不省功。

二、 动滑轮

1. 滑轮的位置跟被拉动的物体一起运动。

2. 可以省一半力 , 但不能改变用力方向。

3. 使用动滑轮工作，不省功。

物理八年级下册课件 篇5

1. 恐龙的质量可达50 t，则它的体重为______________N，相当于__________个质量为50kg的同学的体重.(题型二)

2.重垂线是根据______________的原理制成的，瓦工常用它来检查墙壁______________， 木工常用它来检查工作台______________.(题型一)A

3.物体所受重力大小跟它的质量成__比.公式G=mg中g表示物体受到重力与___之比，约等于___N/kg.在要求不精确的情况下，可取g=10 N/kg.甲、乙两同学的质量之比是10：9，甲同学重为540N，乙同学重为_____N.(题型二)

4. 从大坝流下的水能冲击水轮机发电，正在工作的打桩机能将桩打人地下。表明被举高的物体也具有能量，这种能叫做__________.它的大小与______________和______________有关。弹性势能和重力势能统称为___________.

C.一只母鸡的重力大约是1.5N B.一个苹果的质量大约是0.15kg D.一个鸡蛋的质量大约是0.5kg

A.重力的大小可以用弹簧测力计直接测量 B.重力的方向是竖直向下的

A.河水不再流动，再也看不见大瀑布 B.人一跳起来就离开地球，再也回不来

8. 12月，我国发射了神舟四号宇宙飞船，为载人飞行进行了仿真人实验。飞船在轨道上正常飞行时处于“失重”状态，在这种环境中，以下哪个实验不能在地面一样正常进行( )(题型一)

9.一容器质量为1kg，内盛10dm液体.现将该容器挂在弹簧测力计下测得其重力为88.2N.求该液体的密度是多少? (题型二)

1.一个物体竖直悬挂在弹簧测力计上并静止时，弹簧测力计示数为29.4 N，若改用天平测该物体的质量，其示数应为________kg.若把它带到月球上，用天平称它的示数为____kg，用弹簧测力计称它的示数与地球相比将________ (选填“不变”、“变大”或“变小”).(题型二)

2.一座限重为4.9X10N的桥，一辆自身质量为1.1t的卡车要能安全过桥，所能装载的货物不能超过___________ kg.(题型二)

3.如图8-7所示的水平仪检验是否水平，当它在东西方向放置时，人在水平仪南边看，重垂线锥体偏在水平仪刻度线下端的左方，当把它南北放置时，人在水平仪东边观看，锥体偏在右方，此时桌面的________高。 (题型一)

4.我国首位叩访太空的航天员杨利伟在地球上重637N，则他乘坐“神舟5号”载人飞船在太空中飞行时，他的质量为________kg.北京时间10月16日6时23分，在太空中围绕地球飞行14圈后，杨利伟安全返回，降落在预定的着陆场——内蒙古四子王旗北部的阿木古郎牧场上.则杨利伟从太空返回地面的过程中，他的重力势能将________ (选填“不变”、“变大”或“变小”).(题型二)

D. 地面附近的物体在失去支持时，要向地面降落，这是由于物体受到重力作用的缘故

6. 某同学在用弹簧测力计测量一物体的重力时，错将物体挂在了拉环上，如图8-8所示.当物体静止时，弹簧测力计的示数为8N，则物体的重力

物理八年级下册课件 篇6

1．能结合实例分析什么是有用功、额外功和总功。

2．明确机械效率是描述做功效率的物理量。能利用机械效率的公式进行简单的计算。

3．能设计实验，测定某种简单机械的机械效率。

1．通过探究使用动滑轮的特点，知道使用机械就要做额外功。

2．通过实验与讨论，认识提高机械效率的.主要方法。

知道提高机械效率的实际意义和方法，有合理改进机械、提高效率的意识，增强将科学服务于人类的责任感。

本节内容由“有用功和额外功”“机械效率”两部分构成，机械效率是本节教学的重点。教学中要通过实例分析有用功、额外功和总功，使学生真正认识机械效率的含义。测量滑轮组的机械效率是本节的难点。教学中要组织学生经历测量的全过程，如让学生经历组装实验装置、测量数据、得出结论的过程，激发学生的学习兴趣，同时增加他们的实践体验。

以“利用动滑轮提升重物”为背景，提出问题：动力对绳子做功等于动滑轮提升重物所做的功吗？让学生猜测并设计实验来验证自己的猜想。学生经过数据分析后发现，动力对绳子做的功总是大于动滑轮提升物体做的功。进一步分析讨论，引出有用功、额外功和总功，以及它们之间的关系和效率的概念。通过理解、运用机械效率解决实际问题，认识到提高机械效率的两种方法：减小额外功和增加有用功。在讨论了怎样提高机械效率的问题之后，把效率问题延伸到学生的学习和生活中。使学生明白只有提高学习效率才能顺利完成任务。

多媒体设备、实物投影仪、动滑轮、钩码、铁架台、弹簧测力计、刻度尺、细线等。

物理八年级下册课件 篇7

1.知道重力是由于地球的吸引而产生的;

2.理解重力与质量的正比关系;

(1)重力的大小与质量的关系。

你知道牛顿吗?就是那个看到成熟的苹果落向地面而发现了万有引力的人。他说，宇宙中的任何物体，大到太阳，小到灰尘之间，都存在着相互吸引的力，并把它叫做万有引力。有同学不禁要问，既然万有引力，为什么我没有被别的同学吸引走，也没有同学被我吸引过来?

问题一：阅读教材第一、二自然段说明什么叫重力?并举出几个受重力作用的例子。 问题二：怎样比较重力的大小?说出你的办法。

问题四：重力的作用点在哪里?找几个物体说一说它的中心在哪里?

问题五：总结上面三个问题，说一说重力的三要素，并画出重50N物体受重力的图示。 问题六：实验探究：物体所受的重力跟物体质量的关系。请你设计实验

(三)合作探究：

学生根据上面六个问题，小组内合作探究。

由于地球的吸引而使物体受到的力叫重力。

注：(1)地球上的所有物体无论质量大小、有无生命，都要受到重力的作用。

(2)重力是非接触力，抛出去在空中运动的物体与它静止时所受到的重力是一样

的。

(3)重力的施力物体是地球。

(4)重力是由于受到地球的吸引而产生的，但重力的大小不一定等于地球对物体

的吸引力，重力一般会小于地球对物体的吸引力。

重力的大小在数值上等于物体静止时对水平支持面的压力或对竖直悬绳的拉力;

重力的大小还可以用弹簧测力计测出。

注：(1)不能认为压力、拉力就是重力，压力和拉力与重力是不同性质的力.

图l所示，物体受到重力G和绳子的拉力F两个力作用，重力的施力物体是地球，而拉力的施力物体是悬绳。

(2)一个物体的重力大小不受运动状态改变的影响，与是否还受到其他力也无关。

重力的方向总是竖直向下，即总垂直于当地的水平面向下。

几点说明：(1)“竖直向下”与“垂直向下”是不同的。“竖直向下”与物

体的接触面(或地形)无关，如图2中的方向l;而“垂直向下”与物体的接触面

(或地形)有关，是指垂直于接触平面向下，如图2中的方向2。

无关。

(3)用细线将重物悬挂起来，将会发现线的方向与物体所受重力方向一致，在建筑上称为重垂线，建筑工人常用重垂线来检查墙壁是否竖直。

注(1)物体受到的重力可以看成集中在一个点上，这个点叫做物体的重心。说明物体

的重心位置跟物体的形状、材料是否均匀等有关。

(2)对于材料均匀形状规则的物体，重心就是这一物体的几何中心。如：均匀正方

体的重心在它的中心，均匀球体的重心在它的球心，粗细均匀的木棒的重心在棒

的中点等。

(3)对于“不倒翁”现象：不倒翁不倒的原因是它的重心较低，并且重力的作用使

它回到原来的位置。

(4)对于走钢丝演员表演时当身体出现不平衡时摆动杆的动作。走钢丝演员的重心

必须落在钢丝上才不会倾倒，手中握有一根长杆是为了调整重心的方便。

用手分别拿起一块大石头和一块小石头，感受一下有什么不同。你觉得重力的大小与什么因素有关?

①出示弹簧测力计让学生观察，告诉学生物体受到的重力可以用弹簧测力计来测量。把物体挂在弹簧测力计上，当物体静止时弹簧测力计的示数就等于物体所受的重力。

五.总结 1.地面附近的物体，由于受到地球的吸引而受到的力叫重力，重力的施力物体是地球.

2.重力是一种常见的力，重力的大小跟物体的质量成正比，用G=mg来计算大小，g=9.8

N/kg重力的方向是竖直向下的，重力的作用点叫重心.

1、小球沿斜面加速下滑，关于重力的示意图如图所示，其中正确的是„„„( )

2、个物体在月球上受到月球吸引力为98N，问：

(1)它在地球上受到多少牛的重力?

物理八年级下册课件 篇8

教学目标

1.知识与技能

●会使用适当的工具测量时间和长度

●知道测量有误差，误差和错误有区别

2.过程与方法

●体验通过日常经验或自然现象粗略估计时间和长度的方法

3.情感、态度与价值观

●认识计量时间和长度的工具及其发展变化的过程，培养对科学技术的热爱

教学重难点

1.重点：使用适当工具测量时间和长度

2.难点：误差的产生。误差与错误的区别

教学过程

(一)引入新课

复习：速度的计算公式是怎样的?要计算速度必须知道什么量?怎样利用公路上的里程碑大致测出汽车的速度?

通过学生的讨论得出要测出相应的时间。

(二)讲授新课

1.时间的测量

让学生讨论各种测量时间的工具和方法。学生说出多种方法和用具。鼓励学生用科学的眼光认识周围的事物。

①时间的单位：秒(s)、分(min)、时(h)

②学生活动：练习使用停表的方法;利用停表测量自己一分钟内脉搏跳动的次数，然后用脉搏估算一段时间;用绳子绑住一支笔做成一个摆，测量摆摆动一个来回所用的时间。

2.长度的测量

①长度的单位：km→m→dm→cm→mm→μm→nm(要求学生熟练掌握各进制)

②测量长度的工具：直尺、卷尺(刻度尺)、螺旋测微器、游标卡尺

③学生活动：测出物理课本的长宽厚;

④学生讨论并活动：如何较准确测出硬币的直径、一页纸的厚度、细铜线的直径?

总结得出刻度尺的正确使用方法：刻度尺要贴近被测物体;刻度尺要跟所测物体的长度平行;读数时视线要与尺面垂直;读数时要估读到分度值的下一位。

测量结果=数字+单位

3.误差：测量值与真实值之间总会有差别，这种差别就是误差。

错误：由于不遵守测量仪器的使用规则，或读取、记录测量结果时粗心等原因造成的。

两者区别：误差不能消除，但可以减小，例如多测量几次错误可以消除。

(三)课堂小结

懂得测量时间和长度的方法和用具

(四)布置作业

完成相应的同步练习

(五)教学后记

2025八年级上册英语课件(精华5篇)

八年级上册英语unit 6的课件应该怎么设计？课件是根据教学大纲的要求，经过教学目标确定，教学内容和任务分析，教学活动结构及界面设计等环节，而加以制作的课程软件。下面小编给大家带来八年级上册英语unit 6课件，欢迎大家阅读。

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

Unit 1 Will people have robots ?

单元教学目标：

1、Words&phrases: robot, paper, less, fewer, simple, unpleasant, factory, seem, etc .

2、will 构成的一般将来时态的陈述句、否定句、疑问句及回答.

3、There be 句型的一般将来时. 4、more , less , fewer 的用法.

5、学习一般将来时态的相关知识，学会对未来进行预测.

单元重难点：

1、will构成一般将来时态的句式。 2、There be 句型的一般将来时态。

3、more , fewer , less 的用法。 4、How to make predictions .

第一课时

课前准备：

教师：录音机、所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练、练习本及相关的学习用具

教学步骤：

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1.Greetings: Welcome to school .

What’s the date today ? Who’s on duty today ?

Do you enjoy your winter holiday ?(你喜欢你的寒假吗?)

Do you finish your Homework(家庭作业) ?(你完成你的假期作业了吗?)

Do you want to live on the moon ?(你想去月球吗?)

Can you guess what will happen in ten years ?(你能猜出十年后将会发生什么吗?)

Collect the Ss’ answers and say something about their predictions .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)

SB Page 2 ,1a .

1.Look at the picture :How will the world be different in the future ,100 years from now ?We’re going to talk about sth in 100 years .

2.Read each predictions to the class .Explain the new vocabulary .

3.Read the instructions .Make sure Ss know what they should do .

4.Do it by themselves .

5.Talk about the answers with the class .

Explain :一般将来时态

构成: will / be going to +动词原形=

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)

SB Page 2 ,1b .

1.Practise reading the six predictions .

2.Read the instructions to Ss .Circle the things you hear on the recording .

3.Play the tape twice .(放录音，两次)

4.Play the tape a third time .At the same time ,check the answers .

SB Page 2 , 1c .

1、Pay attention to the dialogues .

2、Read the dialogues fluently .

3、Pairwork .Work in pairs to make predictions according to the sample .

4、Ask several pairs to share their conversations to the class .

SB Page 3 , 2a & 2b .

1、Read the predictions .

2、Read the instructions and point out the sample answer .

3、Play the tape twice .Ss circle the word they hear in each sentences: more , less , fewer .

4、Check the answers .

学生探究: less , fewer 的区别。

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)

1、Point to the example in the sample dialogue .Practice reading .

2、Look at activity 2b .Groupwork:Take turns to make conversations about the predictions .

Grammar Focus:

1.、Review the grammar box .Ss say the statements and responses .

2、Make summaries about “will” ,“fewer” and “less” .

Homework(家庭作业)(家庭作业)：

1、Make predictions about yourself in 10 years .Write down 5 sentences .

2、Go over the new words .

教学后记:

八年级物理下册课件实用

每位教师为了提供优质课程，都需要准备教案和课件。然而，编写教案和课件并非只是随意写写就行的。教案是确保教育教学质量的重要保证。你是否想知道是否有一些值得借鉴的优秀教案和课件素材呢？现在，我将全面为您介绍与“八年级物理下册课件”相关的知识点，希望我的解决方案能对您有所帮助，请不要忘记将其收藏起来！

八年级物理下册课件 篇1

1.知道力是使物体运动状态发生改变和发生形变的原因。

2.初步认识力是物体间的相互作用，能分清受力物体和施力物体。

3.知道力的三要素，会用力的图示和示意图来表示力。

4.知道重力产生原因，理解重力的大小及方向，知道重心的概念。

5.初步了解四种基本相互作用力的特点和作用范围。

(1)力是物体间的相互作用，力总是成对出现的，这一对力的性质相同。不接触的物体间也可以有力的作用，如重力、电磁力等。

(2)力是矢量，其作用效果由大小、方向和作用点三个要素决定。力的作用效果是使物体产生形变或加速度。

(1)力的图示：力的图示中，线段的长短表示力的大小，箭头的指向表示力的方向，箭尾(或箭头)表示力的作用点，线段所在的直线叫做力的作用线。

(2)力的示意图：力的示意图只能粗略表示力的作用点和方向，不能表示力的大小。

(1)在地球上同一地点g值是一个不变的常数。

(2)g值随着纬度的增大而增大。

(3)g值随着高度的增大而减小。

(2)位置确定：质量分布均匀的规则物体，重心在其几何中心;对于形状不规则或者质量分布不均匀的薄板，重心可用悬挂法确定。

自然界中的四种基本相互作用是万有引力、电磁相互作用、强相互作用和弱相互作用

八年级物理下册课件 篇2

课题

第三节

大气压强

使用年级

八年级

时间

探究器材

吸盘

塑料管

托里拆利实验视频

气压计

流程

具

体

内

容

方

法

指

导

学习目标

知识目标：1.（1）了解大气压是客观存在的．（2）了解测量大气压的实验：托里拆利实验．（3）了解大气压强的值和大气压强的单位．（4）了解大气压强值可用气压计来测量（5）了解生活中利用大气压的实例．（6）了解大气压强随高度的变化规律及大气压与液体沸点的关系。

能力目标：通过观察一些实验现象感知大气压强的客观存在，感知大气压强的值很大．

情感目标：

通过对大气压应用的了解，使学生认识到科学技术对人类生活的影响．

一、自主学习

一、问题导入：

空气也像液体一样能流动，空气中是否也存在朝各个方向的压强？

二、预习：

1.在地球周围的空间里存在着空气，习惯上称为大气，所以包围地球的空气层又叫

。空气也像液体那样，能，因而空气内部向各个方向都有

。空气对浸在它里面的物体的压强叫，简称。

2.自来水笔(通常所说的钢笔)吸墨水时，用手捏橡皮管再松开，墨水就被吸进橡皮管里去。捏橡皮管的目的是

；松开时，墨水在的作用下进入橡皮管中。

3.首先用实验的方法测出了大气压的值。实验时，所用玻璃管的长度约为

m，开始时，必须在管中灌满水银，目的是

。这样，当玻璃管倒插在水银槽中时，其上端没有水银的那部分是

。.这个实验表明大气压大约能支持约

高的水银柱，根据公式

计算，大气压值约为

Pa。如果在操作时，不小心或不按要求去做，使得少许空气进入了玻璃管内水银面的上方，这样所测得的大气压值就会

实际的大气压值(填“等于”或“小于”“大于”)。

4.大气压是变化的。物理学中把等于

Pa的大气压叫标准大气压，通常取

Pa。它相当于

mm水银柱产生的压强。

5.活塞式抽水机是利用

把水抽到高处的；在1标准大气压条件下，抽水机最多能把水抽到

m的高处。

6.如图所示，塑料挂衣钩贴在平整的壁上。如果它的表面积是20cm2，大气压强为105Pa。求空气对挂衣钩表面的压力。

请同学们根据“学习目标”，仔细阅读课文的相关内容，用“双色笔”作好关键词的标注，简要回答以下几个问题，请将你的答案写在题目下面的空白处，并保证独立完成。

温馨提示：

（用时15分钟）

三、在你预习的过程中，你还有哪些自己不能解决的疑问，请记录下来。

（每人至少提出一个问题）

组内交流讨论，不能解决的请教老师

（用时5分钟）

二、合作探究

探究一：实验证明大气压是否存在（参考课本39面实验）

器材：

实验：

结论：大气对浸在它里面的物体

压强．大气向各个方向都

压强．

探究二：、大气压的测量：大气压有多大呢？想一想如何能测出大气压的值？

放视频：托里拆利实验。思考以下问题：

（1）托里拆利实验中玻璃管上方为什么是真空？

（2）管内水银柱产生的压强为什么等于大气压的值？

（3）如何计算大气压的值？

（4）托里拆利实验为什么不用水做？

（5）玻璃管倾斜，管内外水银面的高度差会改变吗？

（6）气压计有哪两种？各有什么优缺点？

探究三：大气压的大小变化

(1)

什么叫标准大气压？

(2)

大气压的单位有

(3)

大气压大小经常发生变化：

1：随高度变化，规律是

实验：41面的想想做做：用自制气压计观察大气压随高度的变化并解释

2：与液体沸点的关系：气压越大，沸点越

;气压越小，沸点越

在一个标准大气压下水的沸点是

探究四：大气压的应用

——抽水机

1.抽水机是利用

来抽水的2.简述活塞式抽水机的工作原理

温馨提示：

（用时15分钟）

（1）实验操作中在管中灌满水银，堵住管口倒置在水银槽内，使管内没有空气．

（2）管内水银没有全部落入水银槽中，说明是大气压支持着水银柱，所以大气压值等于管内水银柱的压强．

（3）用液体压强公式可计算出管内液体压强值，此值等于大气压值．

在地理课上学习过随高度的增加，空气密度减小，所以能想到和高度的关系．

三、组内小展

1、组内分配任务：

2、合理板书；

3、组内交流；

4、组内展示

根据分配的任务模块进行组内交流，为班级展示作好准备；

温馨提示：

（用时5分钟）

四、班级展示

展示模块一：预习1、2，探究一；

展示模块二：预习3、探究二1、2、3；

展示模块三：探究二4、5、6；教材“动手动脑学物理”3；

展示模块四：预习4，探究三，教材“动手动脑学物理”5；

展示模块五：预习5、6，探究四；

展示模块六：教材“动手动脑学物理”1、2、4；

按照知识顺序，各组分组展示，展示过程中，每位同学可对其他组的展示进行积极的质疑、对抗。

温馨提示：

每组限时5分钟

五、强化梳理

本节知识小结（强化梳理）

用简洁的几句话概括本节课的知识要点

温馨提示：

限时5分钟

六、知识反馈

1.历史上，著名的____________实验证明了大气压的存在；____________实验首次测定了大气压的值。

2.如图所示实验不能说明大气压存在的是

（）

3.下列事件中,属于利用大气压的是（）

A．用吸管把饮料吸入嘴里

B.打针时,把药液注入肌肉里

C．瘪进去的乒乓球放入热水中烫一烫又能恢复原状

D．当壶中的水沸腾时，壶盖不断地跳动

4.如图所示，张红同学用吸管吸饮料时出现了一个怪现象，无论她怎么用力，饮料都吸不上来。你认为出现这种现象的原因是（）

A、吸管上有孔

B、大气压偏小

C、吸管太细

D、吸管插得太深

5.在大气压为760mmHg的房间内做托里拆利实验，测出管内水银高度为750mmHg，其原因是（）

A、玻璃管太长

B、玻璃管放倾斜了

C、管内水银面上方有少量空气

D、玻璃管粗了些

6.小明在飞机上喝了半瓶塑料瓶装的碳酸饮料，之后他将瓶盖拧紧。飞机快落地时，小明发现饮料瓶的瓶壁发生了向里的凹陷，这说明机舱内的气压

瓶内的气压（填“大于”、“小于”或“等于”）。观察到凹陷并不严重，小明（填小明的操作动作），瓶壁上的凹陷消失了。

7.小明去西藏旅游，临回来上火车前，把一瓶喝了一半的矿泉水放入背包中，等他回到沈阳后，口渴准备喝水，却发现这个水瓶变瘪了，他利用学过的知识分析，一定是西藏地区的大气压__________沈阳的大气压（填“大于”、“等于”或“小于”），原因是大气压会随着______________的变化而变化。

8.一位小朋友手里拿着的氢气球不小心脱手升到了空中，当气球升到高空时发生了破裂。以下关于气球升到高空破裂的原因分析正确的是

（）

A、高空大气压增大，气球体积减小，将气球压破

B、高空大气压增大，气球体积增大，将气球胀破

C、高空大气压减小，气球体积增大，将气球胀破

D、高空大气压减小，气球体积减小，将气球压破

9.物理兴趣小组的同学想探究大气压强的大小，他们拿来一个带挂钩的吸盘，将吸盘紧压在厚玻璃板的下表面，用一个可装细沙的购物袋（质量不计）挂在挂钩下。如图所示，向袋里逐渐注入细沙直至吸盘被拉下来，由此可得到大气压的大小。

（1）本实验主要的测量器材：、。

（2）需要直接测量的物理量：、。

（3）大气压的表达式P

=。

（4）如果测出的大气压仅为×105Pa，实验中可能存在的问题是。

10.在一次测定大气压的实验中，观察到水银柱的高度约为76cm。经计算，当时的大气压近似为105Pa。这样的大气压可支持多高的水柱?(取g=10N/kg)

七、课后反思

八年级物理下册课件 篇3

1、经历从许多与力相关的日常生活现象归纳出力的基本概念的过程并了解力的概念，并乐于探究身边的力现象。

2、通过实验感受力作用的相互性，并能解释有关现象。

3、通过常见事例和实验认识力的作用效果。

请一位学生到教室前面表演举哑铃。从肌肉的紧张引出力的概念。

教师给学生要探究的下列几个问题：

1、人们在什么情况下会用力？

2、其他物体对物体是否施加力？

3、两物体之间不相互接触是否也能产生力的作用？

4、这里所说的作用应怎样理解？

教师要学生列举事例进行回答，找出这些问题的共性，进行概括、归纳、总结出力的概念。

教师引导学生观察教材中图5－1中的6幅图，找出其共同点。教师点评。

引导学生进行科学的猜想。

2、指导学生实验。

实验可参照教材p77图5－2所示进行，也可用别的物体来做。

让学生解释所发生的现象，进一步加深对力的作用是相互的理解。

5、让学生列举生活及生产中人们利用力的相互作用的实例。

6、让学生列举力的作用相互的危害性。

1、学生拉弹簧。让观察形状怎样变化。

2、教师放一段足球比赛的录象片断。看足球的运动情况发生了怎样的改变。

八年级物理下册课件 篇4

教学目标：

知识与技能：

(1)知道什么是杠杆;

(2)理解支点、阻力、阻力臂、动力、动力臂。

过程与方法：通过举例认识杠杆，会分析杠杆的几个概念。

情感、态度与价值观：体验科学探究的乐趣，了解杠杆在生活中的应用。

教学重点：认识杠杆。

教学过程：

一、引入新课

通过浮力的学习，同学们已经知道了阿基米德是古希腊伟大的科学家，他在物理学方面的主要贡献有两项：浮力问题与杠杆平衡问题。阿基米德有句名言：“给我一个支点，我可以撬动地球。”

置疑：阿基米德说这句话的根据是什么?你认为这可能吗?

阿基米德用来撬动地球的工具就是杠杆，也就是这节课要研究的问题。

二、杠杆

1、认识杠杆

要求学生观察书上图12-2-3：生活中的常见的杠杆。

要求学生举出其他生活中的杠杆。

进行讨论，找出图中杠杆的共同特征——都绕一固定点转动。

教师出示羊角锤，分析使用时有一固定点。

要求学生分析其余杠杆的固定点。

得到杠杆概念：在力的作用下，能绕某一固定点转动的硬杆，叫杠杆。

“硬杆”指在力作用下不易发生形变的受力的杆状物体，可以是直的也可是弯的，形状也可以是各种各样，可是方的、圆的等。

要求学生再举其他例子。

例如：用来拧螺母的扳手可以使我们轻易地将螺母拧紧或拧松。

订书机可以很方便地把纸装订在一起。

2、与杠杆有关的概念

首先认识杠杆的几个概念

支点(O)：杠杆绕着转动的固定点。

动力(F1)：使杠杆转动的力。

阻力(F2)：阻碍杠杆转动的力。

动力臂(L1)：支点到动力作用线的距离。

阻力臂(L2)：支点到阻力作用线的距离

力臂是支点到力的作用线的距离，作力臂的步骤：(1)找准支点;(2)沿力的方向作出力的作用线;(3)从支点向力的作用线画垂线;(4)标出力臂。

教师举杠杆撬球的例子分析五个概念。

画出杠杆撬球中的各种物理量。

支点是杠杆绕着转动的固定点，在分析支点时，我们可以假想杠杆发生转动，杠杆围绕哪一点转动，哪一点就是支点。如图所示，我们假设杠杆在动力作用下做逆时针转动，其中O点是不动的，所以O点就是支点。

力的作用线就是从力在杠杆上的作用点起，沿力的方向所画的直线，如图所示，动力的作用线是从A点起沿F1方向的直线。

从支点O向动力F1的作用线所画的垂线就是动力臂L1，从支点O向阻力F2的作用线所画的垂线就是阻力臂L2了。画力臂实际上就是作一个点到一条线的垂线，只要把平面几何中作“点到直线的距离”的方法迁移过来，就不难解决力臂作法这一难点。

必须明确：力臂是支点到力的作用线的垂直距离，而不是支点到力的作用点的距离，如图所示中，不能把OA和OB作为动力臂和阻力臂。

例题：在黑板上画出各杠杆的示意图，画出它们的支点、动力和阻力。

如：铡刀、瓶盖起子、独轮车、铁锹等。

由4名学生分别画出它们的动力臂和阻力臂，巡回指导，最后进行讲评。

可选择分析一些实际杠杆，如：抽水机、汽车刹车踏板、胳膊、缝纫机踏板等。

三、课堂小结

认识杠杆，并介绍了杠杆的几个重要概念，学会分析生活中的杠杆。

四、实践活动

注意观察生活中有哪些杠杆，试着分析它们的支点、动力、阻力、动力臂、阻力臂。

五、板书：

第一节杠杆(一)

杠杆：1、杠杆：在力的作用下，能绕某一固定点转动的硬杆，叫杠杆。

2、杠杆的几个概念：

支点(O)：杠杆绕着转动的固定点。

动力(F1)：使杠杆转动的力。

阻力(F2)：阻碍杠杆转动的力。

动力臂(L1)：支点到动力作用线的距离。

阻力臂(L2)：支点到阻力作用线的距离。

八年级物理下册课件 篇5

【滑轮】

教学目标：

1.识与技能

(1)认识定滑轮和动滑轮

(2)知道定滑轮、动滑轮和滑轮组的作用

(3)会根据要求使用和组装滑轮

(4)了解其他简单机械(轮轴、斜面等)的一些应用

2.过程与方法

(1)经历探究定滑轮、动滑轮工作特点的过程，进一步掌握用观察、对比来研究问题的方法。

(2)经历组装滑轮组的过程，学会按要求组装滑轮组的方法。

3.情感、态度与价值观

(1)关心生活、生产中有关滑轮、轮轴、斜面的实际使用。

(2)对实践中的滑轮、轮轴、斜面的工作特点具有好奇心。

(3)具有利用简单机械改善劳动条件的愿望。

(4)具有对现实生活中简单机械的应用是否合理进行评价的意识。

(5)通过了解简单机械的应用，初步认识科学技术对人类社会发展的作用。

●教学过程：

由学校升旗杆顶部装置引入新课。

一.定滑轮：滑轮的轴固定不动。

性质：不能省力，但能改变力的方向

实质：等臂杠杆

二.动滑轮：滑轮的轴随重物一起移动

性质：能省力，但不能改变力的方向

实质：动力臂是阻力臂两倍的杠杆

三.滑轮组：由定滑轮和动滑轮组合而成。

性质：能省力，又能改变力的方向

应用：使用滑轮组时，动滑轮和重物由几段绳子承担，提起重物所用的力就是物重的几分之一。

轮轴：动力作用在轮上可省力。例如：方向盘，自行车把手。

斜面：省力。并且斜面越长越省力。

四.练习：一课一练。

五.作业：P731

六.教学后记：

八年级物理下册课件 篇6

学习目标：

1.能知道欧姆定律的内容，并会运用欧姆定律进行简单的计算。

2.能说出串并联电路的特点，会用串并联电路的特点得出串并联电路中电阻的关系。

3.会应用欧姆定律解决简单的电路问题

学习重点：理解欧姆定律内容和其表达式、变换式的意义

学习难点：利用欧姆定律解决简单问题的能力

导学内容和步骤：

一、前置学习：

欧姆定律的内容

2. 欧姆定律的数学表达式及式中各物理量及单位：

I----电流----安培；U----电压---伏特；R----电阻---欧姆

3.欧姆定律中的“导体”指的是 。

4.串联电路中，电流关系：

电压关系：

电阻关系：

比例关系：

5. 串联电路中，电流关系：

电压关系：

电阻关系：

比例关系：

二、展示交流：

学习小组完成课本29页1—3题，上黑板展示。

教师强调解题格式，“三要”和“三不”。

三要：要写解、答；要有公式；要带单位。

三不：最后结果不准用分数；不准用约等号；不准用除号。

三、合作探究：

学习小组完成课本29页4题，尽量用多种方法解题，上黑板展示。

教师归纳：解题步骤：1。根据题意画电路图； 2.在图中标出已知量和未知量； 3.综合运用电学规律列式求解。三种方法（单一法、整体法、比例法）。

四、达标拓展：略

五、教学评价：略

六、教学反思：略。

八年级物理下册课件 篇7

第九章 第三节《 大 气 压 强 》导 学 案

【学习目 标】

1、了解大气压强的客观存在而产生现象。

2、了解测大气压的方法，知道标准大气压强的数值。

3、认识生活中利用大气压的现象。

【学习重 难 点】测大气压的方法，标准大气压强的数值，抽水机的工作原理。【知 识 链 接】

1、由于液体具有流动性，液体内向都有压强。

2、液体压强的计算公式：。【课 堂 探 究】

一、自 主 预习、疏 理 基 础

（一）大气压的存在1、产生原因：大气受作用且具有

2、特点：大气向方向都有压强。

3、现象：用吸管吸饮料、覆杯实验、塑料吸盘挂钩等。

（二）大气压的测量

1、托里拆利实验：通过玻璃管内外水银面的2、标准大气压：通常把高 mm水银柱所产生的压强，作为1个标准大气压，3、气压计：常用的测量大气压的仪器有两种：

4、变化：（l）海拔越高，气压(2)还跟有关。

5、液体沸点随气压的变化：随着大气压的减小，液体的沸点也会

6、想想抽水机的工作原理怎样？

二、合 作 探 究

（一）大气压的存在1、动 手 体 验：（1）水托纸（2）拉橡皮碗 思 考 交 流：以上两个实验说明了什么？

结论：以上实验和现象说明，大气对浸入其中的物体都存在__________________。

2、请你举出生活中存在大气压的例子。

（二）大气压的测量。

1、观看录像：图的实验。完成以下（1）、（2）、（3）题。（1）1标准大气压=_______水银柱产生的压强。

（2）请同学们计算760mm水银柱产生的压强。(取g=10N/Kg)

解：

（3）1标准大气压=_______Pa。

2、请同学们阅读课本P50的内容，完成以下（1）、（2）题。（1）气压计的种类：____________和___________。

（2）大气压的大小与___________有关，大气压随高度的升高而________。

（三）大气压的利用

请同学们阅读教材P52“科学世界”说一说活塞式抽水机的工作过程。

【达 标 检 测】

1、下列现象中，不能说明大气压存在的是（）A、堵上茶盖上的小孔，茶壶里的水就不容易倒出来B、吸管能把饮料吸入口中

C、生产灯泡时，抽气机能抽出灯泡中的空气D、两块玻璃合在一起，中间有水，很难把它们分开

2、下列现象中不属于应用大气压的是（）

A、塑料挂衣钩能贴在墙上挂衣服B、纸片能托住倒过来的一满杯水而不洒 C、用吸管吸敞口瓶中的饮料D、用注射器能把药液注射到肌肉里

3、用注射器在吸取药液时，先把活塞推进针筒底，然后将针头插入药液内，提起活塞药液就会流入针筒，这样做的道理是（）

A、使针筒内气压大于大气压，药液会自动流入针筒 B、使针筒内气压小于大气压，药液就被大气压压入针筒内 C、使针筒内气压等于大气压，药液所受压力平衡容易流入针筒内 D、针筒本身有吸取药液的本领

八年级物理下册课件 篇8

问题：小明的教室在五楼，通常上楼需要1.5min，一次他跑步上楼只用了40s，请问：⑴小明在两种情况下，做的功是否相同？

⑵你认为这两种上楼做功方法，从物理的角度思考有什么不同？

为了描述做功的快慢，需要引进一个新的物理量___

一、关于功率的概念

1.用速度可以表示物体运动快慢来类比，讲述功率的定义：

单位时间内做的功叫做功率。用字母P来表示。

2.功率的计算公式：

例题1: 一个体重为400牛的学生在10秒内跑上4米高的楼，则

(1)这位同学所做的功为多少

(2)功率是多少？

3.功率的单位：在国际单位制中叫 ,简称 ，用符号 表示。

1W=

练习：结合速度的定义、计算和单位，完成下列表格

物理量速度功率

物理意义表示物体运动快慢

定义单位时间内运动的路程

计算公式V=s/t

单位m/s km/h

用速度的知识迁移出功率的定义、计算和单位，这种方法叫

像这种定义速度和功率等物理量的方法

5.功率的物理意义

例题1：甲机器做功时的功率是5000W，它的物理意义：表示这台机器________________.

乙机器做功时的功率是0W，它的物理意义：表示这台机器____________________

这两台机器中 机器做功快，

二、介绍一些常见物体的功率：(见课本)

了解一些物体的功率，记住人平时骑自行车的功率约为 W.

三、设计和估测人的功率的实验

1.需要测量哪些物理量，可以测出人的功率？

在学校里，人爬楼的高度通常可以利用一阶台阶的高度×台阶数进行测量。

2.所需要的测量工具是什么？

3.计算功率的表达式是怎样的？

4.设计出记录表格

实验

次数重力G/N台阶数

n一级台阶高度h/m时间

t/s功率P/W

4.与同学合作，测量在不同情况下人的功率。

5.想一想：还有哪些简便的方法可以测出人的功率？(如跳绳、跑步等)

四、功和功率的有关练习

1.推导计算功率的另一公式：

说明用这一公式也可以计算功率，若v是某一时刻的速度，，还可以用它计算某一时刻的功率。

例题3：一辆小轿车以10m/s的速度匀速通过该隧道，若该小轿车发动机的牵引力为6000N，则(1)小轿车发动机的功率为多少，

(2)则5秒内发动机所做的功为多少

练习2: 一辆功率为45kW的汽车，以72km/h的速度在平直公路上匀速行驶30km，求汽车受到的阻力。

思路与技巧：学会用功率的另一公式 来计算功率，

并注意单位，即功率的单位用 ，速度的单位用

练习3:质量为5吨的列车，在平直铁路上匀速前进，若车受到的阻力为车重的 ，前进100米所用时间为5秒，则

(1) 列车受到的阻力为多少，

(2) 牵引力做的功为多少

(3) 功率是多少

本文网址：//m.jk251.com/jiaoshifanwen/150721.html